mm 


'■:■.', 


hv/. 


THE  ADVANTAGES  OF  ECLECTIC  SHORT-HAND. 


We  claim  that  the  demonstration  of  the  following  four  propo- 
sitions is  an  unanswerable  argument  why  the  short-hand  student 
should  adopt  Eclectic  Short-hand. 

1.  It  is  the  briefest.  3.     It  is  the  easiest  to  write. 

2.  It  is  the  simplest.  4.     It  is  the  most  legible. 

DEMONSTRATION   OF   THE   PROPOSITIONS. 

Prop.  1. — In  December,  1880,  Broivne's  Phonographic  Monthly, 
then  the  leading  stenographic  journal,  published  comparisons  of 
twenty-live  of  the  best  systems  in  existence,  giving  the  writing,  in 
all  the  systems,  of  a  stanza  of  five  lines.  The  Eclectic  writing  of 
the  stanza  contained,  by  actual  computation,  14  per  cent  less  than 
the  briefest  of  the  others  (Graham's),  and  49  per  cent  less  than  the 
longest  (Lindsley's),  and  was  30  per  cent  l)riefer  than  the  average  of 
all  of  them;  hence  the  briefest  system. 

Prop.  2. — It  is  the  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  which  is  based 
on  the  English  alphabet.  It  contains  less  than  fifty  word  signs,  and 
has  no  exceptions  to  rules;  hence  the  simplest  system. 

Prop.  3. — It  is  the  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  which  dis- 
penses with  vertical  characters,  writing  with  characters  in  three 
directions  instead  of  four,  and  the  only  system  of  connective  vowels 
similar  in  form  to  the  consonants,  and  with  a  single  exception  the 
only  light-line  system ;  hence  the  easiest  system  to  write. 

Prop.  4. — It  is  the  only  system  of  the  twenty-five  that  makes  as 
free  use  of  vowels  as  of  consonants,  and  while  writing  words  with 
less  strokes,  still  by  its  principles  writes  words  more  fully  and  with 
less  memorizing  of  word  signs  than  any  other  of  the  twenty-five. 
It  also  has  no  vertical  strokes  to  become  confounded  in  rapid  writ- 
ing with  similar  oblique  characters;  hence  the  most  legible  system. 

To  add  strength  to  our  demonstration  we  give  the  writing  of  the 
Lord's  Prayer  by  botli  the  Pitmans,  Graham,  Munson,  Lindsley, 
Pernin,  and  Eclectic  Short-hand,  and  we  ask  attention  to  the  more 
uniform  direction  of  the  characters  in  the  Eclectic,  their  easier 
combinations,  and  the  fewer  number  of  strokes,  while  the  Eclectic 
writing  writes  more  of  the  sounds  than  either  of  the  others.  The 
Isaac  Pitman  writing  has  106;  Graham's,  88;  Munson's,  90; 
Lindsley's,  96;  Pernin's,  93;  and  the  Eclectic,  65  strokes.  Adding 
together  the  strokes  of  all  but  Eclectic,  we  have  475;  dividing  by  6, 


ADVANTAGES  OF  EGLEGTIG  SHORTIIAND-Cont'd. 


we  find  llie  average  is  95,  from  which  subtracting  the  strokes  in 
the  Eclectic  we  liave  30,  whicli  is  46  per  cent,  of  the  Eclectic 
writing,  and  31  per  cent,  of  the  average  of  the  five. 

ISAAC  PITMAN. 

-1 


GKAIIAM. 


\ 


^1, 


MUXSO.V. 
-^1     .       ( 


y  ^ 


"s^^^/L^c.--/ 


Z. 


/. 


rx 


u 


CROSS-(ECLECTIC  ) 


A   SUCCESS   IN   AMANUENSIS   WORK. 

"With  less  than  tvsro  months'  instruction,  I  could  report  any 

ordinarily  rapid  speaker."— C.  Q.  Thorpe,  Chariton,  Iowa. 

"With   a   comparatively   small   amount   of  study,  in   three 

months  I  acquired  a  speed  of  135  words  per  minute." — J.  E.  Challenger, 
slenoyraplier  with  Philadelphia  and  Reading  Railroad,  Philadelphia. 

"After  one  month's  lessons  in  Eclectic  Short-hand,  and  some 

daily  practice  for  two  months,  I  coaUl  easily  write  150  words  a  minute."— E. 
Eloise  Baker,  Steaugrapher  wi'h  The  Current,  Chicago. 

"At  the  end  of  four  -weeks'  study  I  found  myself  able  to 

write  faster,  and  to  transcribe  more  readily,  than  I  could  after  studying  Mun- 
son's  system  four  months.  I  studied  Munson  under  a  very  able  stenographer. 
This  sydem  1  have  studied  alone."— 11.  G.  Stripe,  Stenograi^her  u'ith  Union 
Pacific  Railway,  Omaha. 

"After  less  than  two  -weeks'  instruction  in  Eclectic  Short- 
hand, without  any  previous  knowledge  except  a  partial  knowledge  of  the  prin- 
ciples, I  was  able  to  use  it  with  the  greatest  satisfaction  in  general  correspond- 
ence work,  and  have  never  experienced  the  least  trouble  in  transcribing  my 
notes.'"— W.  A.  Sjiollinger,  Covenant  Mutual  Benefit  Ass'n,  Galesburg,  III. 

"  The  comparative  ease  w^ith  which  the  Eclectic  Short-hand 

is  written  is  truly  wonderful.  I  am  now  writing  160  to  170  words  per  minute." 
— W.  W.  White,  stenographer  to  JV.  <&  G.  Taylor  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

"I  have  frequently  w^ritten  at  the  rate  of  180  w^ords  a  min- 
ute, afterward  reading  my  notes  with  the  same  facility  as  though  taken  at  a 
moderate  speed."'— John  F.  Stetler,  1931  Walnut  St.,  Philadelphia. 

"I  commenced  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short-hand  the  12th  of 

June,  and  on  the  15th  of  August  following  I  accepted  a  position  as  amanuensis 
with  one  of  the  largest  Arms  in  Chicago,  which  position  I  still  hold.  The  sys- 
tem is  easily  acquired,  and  is  just  the  thing  for  practical  worA;."— Jennie  A. 
Wells,  Stenogiapher  to  McCormick  Harvesting  Machine  Co.,  Chicago. 

"  I  have  had  an  Eclectic  employed  in  my  office  for  over  a 

year,  and  I  have  iierir  yet  had  to  hare  a  trarcscript  rewritten  or  corrected  on 
account  of  misinterpretation  of  the  notes.  From  the  experience  I  have  had 
with  the  system,  I  consider  it  one  that  can  be  rapidly  written,  and  read  like 
print."— J.  E.  Stuart,  Postoffice  Inspector,  Chicago. 

The  lady  referred  to,  in  two  7nonths'  study,  reported  and  transcribed  a  speech 
delivered  in  court  at  tlie  rate  of  1,0V  words  the  first  five  minutes,  or  an  average 
of  over  200  ivords  p)er  minute. 

"I   have   devoted  one-half  of  my  time    during-  a  period  of 

three  months  to  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short-hand,  and  have  had  occasion  to 
apply  it  daily  in  taking  from  rapid  dictation  letters  pertaining  to  fire  distinct 
branches  of  business,  frequently  where  the  mistake  of  one  word  would  have  been 
vital  to  the  transaction  under  consideration,  and  have  found  the  system  rapid, 
legible,  and  2>erfiCtly  reliable.  I  b.lieve  it  simply  impossible  to  overestimate 
its  utility  to  anyone  contemplating  a  thorough  business  education. — C.  R. 
Smith,  iiorth  Dakota  Loan  and  Trust  Co.,  Jamestown,  Dak. 


A  SUCCESS  IN  COURT  REPORTING 

WHERE  THE  GREATEST  ACCURACY  AND  SPEED  ARE  REQUIRED. 

From  the  Hon.  J.  J.  Phillips,  Judg-e  of  Fifth  Circuit  Court,  III. : 

"  I  have  had  reporters  on  the  Chicago  Times,  Missouri  Republican,  and  St.  Louis 
Globe  Democrat  report  speeches  made  by  myself,  whose  worlc  was  nothing  like 
as  correct  as  that  done  by  Eclectic  students  in  court  under  my  observation." 

From  the  Hon.  Q-wen  T.  Reeves,  Judg-e  of  Eleventh  Circuit 

Court,  111.:  "  Mrs.  C.  P.  Remine,  an  Eclectic  writer,  has  been  engaged  as  a  short 
hind  reiiorter  in  this  Circuit  Court  several  years.  I  have  examined  the  tran- 
scripts of  her  notes  taken  in  cases  tried  by  me,  and  I  regard  her  a  competent 
short-hand  reporter  in  taking  evidence." 

From  the  Hon.  N.  F.  Pillsbury,  Judg-e  of  Eleventh  Circuit 

Court,  111. :  "After  a  term  of  about  three  mouths,  one  lesson  daily,  in  Eclectic 
Short- hand,  my  daughter  is  able  to  correctly  report  as  fast  as  an  average  speaker 
will  talk,  and  appears  to  have  no  difficulty  in  reading  the  notes  afterwards." 

From  G-en.  John  McNulta,  Master  in  Chancery,  Blooming-ton, 

111. :  "In  October,  1883,  Miss  Shinn  was  called  upon  to  re])ort  a  case  before  me. 
Ilcr  services  were  called  for  with  much  reluctance  on  my  iiart,  as  I  was  informed 
that  she  had  devoted  but  about  three  months  to  the  study  of  Eclectic  Short- 
hand. Since  that  time  she  has  done  substantially  all  the  reporting  of  the  con- 
tested chancery  cases  before  nie.  Her  speed  is  adequate,  and  her  reports  are 
absolutely  accurate  verbatim  reports.  She  reads  her  notes  when  called  upon 
with  as  much  ease  and  facility  as  she  would  a  printed  article  from  a  newspaper, 
and  reads  old  notes  with  as  much  ease  as  fresh  ones.  I  have  never  known  a 
stenographer  who  wrote  more  accurately,  or  who  read  with  as  much  facility." 

From    Miss   Mary   S.    Minor,    Court    Stenogrrapher,    Dallas, 

Texas:  "After  a  series  of  six  lessons,  and  a  few  hours"  daily  study  for  three 
months,  I  was  able  to  report  court  testimorDj,  and  to  read  my  notes  as  readily 
as  long-hand.  Such  is  the  simplicity  of  its  construction,  the  flexibility  of  its 
lines,  and  its  perfect  legibility,  that  the  work  necessary  to  attain  verbatim 
r-peed  is  only  pastime."     [Miss  Minor  writes  180  words  a  minute.] 

From  Sims  Ely,  Official  Reporter  Eig-hth   Judicial  District, 

Kas.:  "Having  used  the  Eclectic  i^ystem  in  court  reporting,  I  speak  advisedly 
when  I  say  that  it  is  fully  capable  of  meeting  every  possible  requirement.  As 
to  the  time  required  to  learn  the  system,  I  regard  it  as  settled  beyond  contro- 
versy—not  alone  by  my  experience,  but  that  of  others  known  to  me— that  all 
the  proficiency  requisite  for  general  reporting  of  every  description,  can  be 
acquired  In  three  months  of  constant  study." 

From  R.  L.  Davidson,  OflB.cial  Reporter  Nineteenth  Judicial 
District,  Kas. :  "In  my  examination  for  this  position  I  averaged  169  words  per 
minute  for  five  consecutive  minutes."     [He  had  studied  but  ten  weeks.] 

From  E.  B.  Sherman,  Master  in  Chancery,  Circuit  Court  of  the 

V .  S  ,  Chicago:  "^Miss  Kate  S.  Holmes  has  liceu  doing  stenographic  work  in  my 
office  for  several  months,  and  although  without  previous  experience,  except  in 
ordinary  office  matters,  is  doing  very  satisfactory  work.  Judged  by  its  practical 
results,  the  Eclectic  system  must  possess  some  positive  merit,  and  one  desiring 
to  acquire  the  stenographic  art  should  carefully  examine  its  claims." 


Eclectic  Shorthand  Dictionary 

GIVING    THK 

Phonetic  and  Shorthand  Equivalents  of 

the  Primitive  words,  and  the  various 

classes  of  Derivative  words  of  the 

English  language. 

ALSO  

Several  Vocabularies  of  Teclmical  Terms.. 


By  J.  G.  CROSS,  IVI.  A. 
AUTHOR   OF   ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


382  Pages.    Sent,  Postpaid,  on  Receipt  of  Price,  $2.50. 


This  work  is  intended  to  be  an  authoritative  writing 
of  the  language  according  to  Eclectic  Shorthand,  and  is 
invaluable  to  every  writer  of  the  system.  It  should  espe- 
cially be  the  constant  companion  of  every  learner,  as  the 
acquisition  of  the  art  will  thereby  be  rendered  much 
easier,  more  rapid  and  certain. 


"I  have  carefully  examined  it,  and  must  say  that  it  surpasses  my 
most  sanguine  expectations,  both  in  the  selection  of  information  and 
in  its  mechanical  make-up.  It  is  a  book  that  should  be  in  the  liands 
of  every  Eclectic  writer,  not  only  the  beginner,  but  also  the  experi- 
enced reporter." —  Prof.  Amos  Eosenberger,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

"The  student  who  has  a  copy  of  Cross'  Shorthand  Dictionary  by 
his  side  will  never  be  without  a  ready  and  perfect  instructor,  while  to 
those  whose  business  demands  a  large  number  of  railway,  insurance, 
law,  or  medical  terms,  it  will  prove  itself  of  incalculable  value." — 
D.  H.  Case,  Official  Reporter,  21st  Judicud  District,  Kansas. 


Eclectic  Shorthand  Dictionary. 


"It  will  be  particularly  beneficial  to  beginners,  on  account  of  the 
phonic  spelling  given." — Prof.  31.  B.  WUks,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

"  The  Dictionary  is  indispensable  to  the  student,  and  of  inesti- 
mable value  to  the  expert." — Rohert  L.  Davidson,  Official  Reporter, 
19th  Judicial  District,  Kansas. 

"It  brings  the  mastery  of  shorthand  writing  within  the  compar- 
atively easy  possession  of  those  who  are  only  able  to  buy  a  copy  each 
of  the  text  book  and  Dictionary,  and  study  at  home,  or  while  pursu- 
ing some  other  employment." —  C.  W.  Taylor,  Telegraphic  Institute, 
Janesville,   Wis. 

'■  To  the  student  this  work  is  simply  indispensable.  Every  practi- 
cal reporter,  also,  will  find  in  its  pages  many  'pointers'  and  'short 
cuts'  hitherto  unthought  of." — Sims  Ely,  Court  Reporter,  8th  Judi- 
cial District,  Kansas. 

"Writers  of  Eclectic  Shorthand  will  welcome  this  book.  For  the 
completion  of  any  series  of  shorthand  text  books  a  dictionary  is  indis- 
pensable, and  this  Dictionary  is  one  of  the  best  of  its  kind.  The  plan 
of  the  work  is  admirable,  the  primitive  words  being  given  first  in  a 
body,  with  an  occasional  derivative,  the  writing  of  which  is  important; 
then  come  the  derivatives,  classified  according  to  the  prefix  or  the  suf- 
fix which  they  are  intended  to  illustrate;  after  these  are  several  vocab- 
ulai'ies  of  technical  words,  including  commercial,  railway,  insurance, 
law,  and  medical  terms,  which  those  who  are  fitting  themselves  for 
office  dictation  work  will  find  especially  useful.  Each  outline  is 
marked  with  an  italic  letter,  showing  the  position  in  which  it  is  to 
be  written.  The  Look  will  be  useful  to  the  advanced  writer  of  Eclectic 
Shorthand,  because  it  will  show  him  the  best  outlines  for  uncommon 
words,  and  will  often  help  him  to  read  a  carelessly  written  outline. 
The  student  of  the  system  who  shall  write  the  Dictionary  through,  will 
have  the  best  grounding  in  its  principles  that  any  teacher  can  give." — 
The  Writer,  a,  monthly  magazine  for  literary  workers,  Boston,  Mass. 


Sold  by  booksellers,  or  sent  postpaid  on  receipt  of  price,  $2.50. 


SCOTT,  FORESMAN  &  COMPANY, 

CHICAGO. 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND: 

WRITING  BY  PRINCIPLES  INSTEAD  OF 
ARBITRARY  SIGNS, 

FOR  GENERAL  USE  AND  VERBATIM  REPORTING. 
By  J.  G.  CKOSS,  M.A. 

AUTHOR  OP  DICTIONARY  OF  ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 
WBITING  19  THE  CONSERVATOR  OF  THOUGHT. 


/ 


O  -^  ^O 


FIFTY-SEVENTH  THOUSAND. 

CHICAGO: 
SCOTT,  FORESMAN  k  COMPANY 

1900. 


Copyright,  1878, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPAXY. 

Copyright,  18S2, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 

Copyright,  1885, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 

Copyright,  1890, 
By  S.  C.  GRIGGS  AND  COMPANY. 


PRESS   OP 

THE   HENKY   O.  SHEPARE    CO. 

CHICAGO. 


CHIEOGEAPHIC  DIAGEAM 

SHOWIXG  THE 

DERIVATION  OF  THE  ALPHABETIC  CHARACTERS 


ECLECTIC  SHOETHAI^D 

FROM  THE  ELLIPSES, 

From  which  are  derived  the  lines  used  in  the  construction  of  thb 
longhand  alphabets  of  all  modern  european  languages. 


"^  FACILE   LINES,   RAPID  MOVEMENTS,  INTERDEPENDENT. 


^ 


t^ 


mTRODUCTION. 


This  system  of  shorthand  writing  has  been  before  the 
public  long  enough  to  either  demonstrate  or  refute  the 
claim  that  it  is  the  easiest  to  learn,  the  simplest  in  struct- 
ure, the  briefest,  and  yet  the  fullest  phonetic  writing  of 
the  language  that  has  been  devised,  and  it  still  lives. 

Its  development  has  been  the  result  of  a  single  seed- 
thought.  In  1878,  while  teaching  the  alphabet  of  Taki- 
graphy,  I  became  strongly  impressed  with  the  fact  that 
there  was  no  law  of  motion  in  the  phonographic  alphabets, 
such  as  in  the  written  Eoman  alphabet,  and  set  about 
seeking  a  more  facile  and  cursive  set  of  characters  to 
represent  the  alphabet  for  purposes  of  shorthand  writing. 

In  writing  the  Roman  alj)habet,  the  motion  of  the  pen 
is  upward  and  downward  alternately,  except  an  occasional 
stroke  to  the  right,  which  always  occurs  after  an  upward 
stroke.  Hence  the  movement  of  the  hand  is  only  upward, 
downward,  and  to  the  right,  and  the  mental  action  in 
writing,  after  a  little  practice,  becomes  very  easy. 

In  Pitmanic  phonography  no  stroke  or  character  indi- 
cates the  direction  in  which  the  next  should  be  drawn. 
It  was  the  recognition  of  this  fact  which  induced  investi- 
gation. 

The  number  of  characters  required  in  the  structure  of 
a  shorthand  alphabet  demands  that  we  should  distinguish 


4iRl>ii 


VI  INTRODUCTION^. 

them  in  some  way;  by  hooks  or  circles  beginning  or  end- 
ing them,  as  in  the  older  systems,  or  by  thickness,  as  in 
the  Pitman ic  systems,  or  by  using  a  number  of  compound 
characters,  or  by  making  the  characters  long  and  short. 

This  last-named  method  has  the  advantage  of  having 
been  long  employed  in  the  written  Eomau  alphabet,  in 
which  there  are  at  least  six  different  lengths  of  lines,  and 
was  therefore  adopted  as  being  the  more  natural  to  both 
mental  and  manual  action.  Proceeding  with  the  investi- 
gation, I  soon  became  convinced  that  the  circle  is  not  the 
best  alphabetic  basis  that  can  be  devised;  and,  notwith- 
standing the  antiquity  of  this  use  of  the  circle,  I  decided 
that  if  it  were  possible  to  derive  from  the  Chirographic 
Ellipse  {i.e.,  the  inclined  ellipse)  a  sufficient  number  of 
simple  characters  to  represent  the  alphabet,  these  would 
constitute  the  basis  of  a  thoroughly  practical  shorthand 
alphabet. 

Motion  resultant  from  two  continuous  opposing  forces 
is  elliptical  in  its  path,  as  illustrated  in  the  orbits  of  the 
celestial  spheres.  These  bodies,  acted  upon  by  the  centri- 
fugal force,  tend  to  move  in  a  straight  line,  but  this  ten- 
dency is  modified  by  the  centripetal  force,  which  con- 
stantly draws  the  body  toward  the  center;  thecombinatiDU 
of  the  two  forces  thus  producing  the  elliptical  orbit. 

In  writing  we  constantly  employ  two  forces,  viz. :  the 
projective  and  the  retractive.  The  projective  force  of  the 
hand,  acting  on  the  pen,  carries  it  upward  and  forward, 
corresponding  to  the  centrifugal  force  acting  upon  the 
spheres.  The  retractive  force  carries  the  pen  backward 
and  downward,  corresponding  to  the  centripetal  force  in 
its  action  on  the  spheres.     These  two  forces  combined 


INTRODUCTION.  Vll 

must  produce  elliptical  outlines,  all  outlines  evolved  in 
the  act  of  writing  being  more  or  less  affected  by  the  two 
motions.  This  is  especially  true  in  rapid  writing,  in 
which  the  action  of  the  hand  must  conform  to  the 
natural  laws  of  motion,  irresiioctive  of  the  arbitrary  out- 
lines we  try  to  make.  These  outlines,  no  matter  what 
their  form  and  direction,  will  become  more  or  less  modi- 
fied by  the  two  forces  acting  together.  Because  of  this, 
all  the  connective  written  alphabets  of  all  modern  lan- 
guages are  elliptical  in  their  outlines,  the  curved  lines 
being  arcs  of  the  outlines  of  ellipses,  and  the  straight 
lines  chords  of  those  arcs.  These  arcs  and  chords  I  have 
therefore  adopted  as  natural  alplial)etic  characters.  They 
dilfer  from  similar  characters  used  in  other  systems  in 
both  form  and  slope.  Euskin  says:  "A  curve  that  is  uni- 
form in  the  degree  of  its  curvature  is  not  a  good  curve." 
This  is  not  only  true  in  art,  but  it  is  emj)hatically  so  in 
practice  in  shorthand,  as  well  as  in  all  other  writing. 

The  curves  deduced  from  the  circumference  of  a  circle 
are  not  adapted  to  writing,  because  the  hand  does  not 
naturally  draw  curves  which  are  uniform  in  their  degree 
of  curvature,  but  those  which  are  un-uniform.  The 
curves  of  this  system  are  all  of  the  character  of  the  out- 
line of  the  ellijDse,  which  constantly  varies  in  the  degree 
of  its  curvature.  Being  derived  from  the  inclined 
ellipse,  their  degree  of  slant  is  greater  than  that  of  arcs 
taken  from  the  circle.  What  is  true  of  inclined  curves  is 
also  true  of  their  arcs,  i.  e.,  they  slant  at  a  greater  angle 
than  the  two  oblique  axes  of  the  circle  which  are  used  for 
alphabetic  characters  in  other  systems.  I  repeat:  the 
alphabetic  characters  of  this  system  are  such  as  are  the 


Vlll  INTRODUCTION. 

direct  result  of  the  motion  of  the  hand  in  the  writing 
position,  instead  of  arcs  and  axes  of  the  circle,  which 
cannot  be  produced  by  the  writing  movement. 

As  there  are  no  perpendicular  arcs,  chords,  or  axes  in 
the  chirographic  ellipse,  my  alphabet  was  at  once  divested 
of  the  periiendiculur  characters  which  encumber  all  the 
Pitmanic  alphabets. 

Having  decided  upon  the  characters  to  be  used  in  the 
structure  of  an  alphabet,  there  arose  the  important  ques- 
tion of  the  appropriation  of  the  moi'e  facile  characters  to 
represent  tlie  more  frequent  letters,  and  of  the  less  facile 
to  rejiresent  the  less  frequent.  To  decide  upon  the  com 
parative  frequency  with  whicii  the  sevei'al  letters  of  the 
aljihabet  are  used,  recourse  was  had,  first  to  the  printer's 
case,  and  finally,  to  settle  the  matter  phonetically,  five 
hundred  words  Avere  written  from  the  sacred  Scriptures, 
an  equal  number  taken  from  art  phraseology,  from  com- 
mercial phraseology,  from  legal  phraseology,  from  Shakes- 
peare and  from  Edward  Everett's  writings;  making  in  all 
three  thousand  words,  in  all  of  which  the  phonetic  ele- 
ments were  counted,  with  this  result,  the  letters  being 
given  in  the  order  of  the  frequency  with  whicli  they  are 
used,  the  highest  first,  and  so  on:  i,  a,  n,  o,  r,  t,  u,  e,  s, 
z,  d,  th,  1,  m,  b,  c,  x,  f,  h,  g,  w,  j,  ch,  y,  sh,  wh,  ng,  zh, 

Having  determined  the  comparative  values  of  the  char- 
acters to  be  used,  and  the  relative  frequency  of  the  sounds 
to  be  represented,  the  selection  of  the  proper  characters 
to  represent  given  sounds  would  seem  to  be  an  easy 
problem,  were  it  not  for  the  added  necessity  of  combining 
characters,   which  demands    that    frequently    recurring 


JJSTTKODUCTION".  IX 

combinations  should  be  represented  by  characters  which 
combine  easily. 

The  question  of  vowel  representation  was  one  not 
easily  settled.  The  recognition  of  the  disadvantage  of 
disconnective  vowel  signs  in  other  systems,  and  of  the 
difficulty  of  minute  cotmective  vowels,  led  me  to  inquire 
whether  it  would  not  be  practicable  to  write  shorthand 
with  five  vowels,  which  might  be  represented  by  five 
characters  similar  to  those  employed  to  represent  the  con- 
sonant sounds,  and  possessing  similar  advantages,  viz.: 
the  advantages  of  connectibility  with  other  characters, 
and  of  the  applicability  to  them  of  the  various  contrac- 
tions which  are  applied  to  the  consonant  characters. 

Is  it  not  possible,  I  asked,  to  write  shorthand  by 
means  of  twenty-five  consonant  characters  and  five  voivels  f 

The  fact  that  we  employ  but  five  vowels  in  all  our 
correspondence  and  in  printing  all  our  literature,  and 
that  the  stenographer  who  takes  his  notes  in  the  use  of  a 
system  representing  all  the  vowel  sounds  transcribes  the 
notes  for  others  to  read  in  the  use  of  only  five  vowels, 
caused  me,  after  long  consideration,  to  finally  decide,  that 
not  only  Avould  it  be  possible  to  write  shorthand  by  the 
use  of  five  vowels,  but  that  several  important  advantages 
would  arise  therefrom,  viz. : 

I.  That  the  vowels  would  be  represented  by  characters 
of  equal  value  with  the  consonant  characters. 

II.  That  they  would  be  connective. 

III.  That  they  would  admit  of  the  contractions  com- 
mon to  the  consonant  characters. 

IV.  That  instead  of  writing  as  few  vowels  as  possible, 
and  relying  almost  wholly  on  consonant  outlines  of  words 


X  IXTRODUCTIOX. 

after  the  manner  of  other  systems,  many  more  vowels 
would  be  written,  and  the  writing  would  therefore  become 
more  nearly  phonetic. 

The  use  which  is  made  of  positions  in  the  Pitmanic 
systems,  in  which  all  the  numerous  vowel  sounds  are 
represented  by  three  joositions;  each  of  these  three  posi- 
tions representing  sounds  of  all  the  different  vowels,  the 
position  representing  the  inflected  vocal  element  of  a  word 
which  may  begin  the  word,  or  be  in  the  middle,  or  at  the 
end  of  it,  leaves  the  reader  no  means  to  determine  its 
locality  in  the  Avord,  except  as  he  is  guided  by  the  context 
and  by  his  knowledge  of  the  word.  This  unphonetic, 
involved,  illegible,  position-alphabet,  which  I  had  during 
twenty  years  regarded  as  the  nightmare  of  the  shorthand 
student,  inclined  me  to  rejec':.  entirely  the  use  of  jiositions, 
although  I  was  evidently  discarding  a  most  eflicient  factor 
in  securing  simjMcifij  and  dvevity  of  outline. 

After  much  reflection  I  reached  the  conclusion  that  so 
important  a  factor  as  that  of  position  could  not  wisely  be 
rejected  from  the  alphabetic  problem  if  it  were  possible 
to  so  employ  it  as  to  secure  simplicity  and  legibility  at  the 
same  time.  The  alphabetic  arrangement  of  five  positions 
to  represent  both  vowels  and  diphthongs  seemed  to  meet 
both  of  these  requirements,  and  was  finally  adopted  in  its 
present  form. 

I  subsequently  discovered  that  it  would  be  possible  to 
represent  five  consonants  as  well  as  five  vowels  by  the  five 
positions,  without  ambiguity,  writing  a  consonant  on  a 
given  position  to  express  the  vowel  following  it,  and 
writing  a  vowel  on  a  given  position  to  express  the  conso- 
nant after  it. 


INTRODUCTION.  XI 

These  five  consonant  positions  soon  grew  to  represent 
twelve  consonants,  and  the  second  edition  of  "Eclectic 
Short-hand  "  announced  the  discovery  of  the  possihility  of 
representing  all  the  consonants  by  five  positions  in  a  very 
simple  and  practical  way. 

The  invention  of  my  full  position-alphabet  so  simpli- 
fied and  abbreviated  most  words,  that  I  soon  conceived 
the  idea  of  disiDcusing  as  far  as  practicable  with  the  use  of 
word-signs  ;  and,  in  the  third  edition,  the  long  list  of 
signs  which  appeared  in  the  first  and  second  was  omitted, 
the  chief  object  of  the  few  word-signs  which  were  retained 
being  their  use  in  phrase-writing. 

In  the  third  edition  the  last  vestige  of  perpendicular 
characters  disappeared,  even  the  upright  ticks.  This  I 
had  sought  from  the  first,  but  had  not  until  then  been 
able  to  accomplish. 

iVll  the  linear  characters  were  grouped  in  three  classes: 
left  oblique,  right  oblique,  and  horizontal ;  and  thus 
became  so  similar  in  their  combinations  to  the  movement 
of  the  hand  in  longhand  writing  that  the  ease  with  which 
they  are  written  is  a  matter  of  constant  remark  among 
practical  writers  of  the  system,  especially  among  those 
who  were  formerly  writers  of  other  systems. 

In  addition  to  the  linear  characters,  it  was  necessary, 
in  order  to  complete  the  alpliabet,  to  employ  a  few  others 
which,  from  their  form,  are  distinguished  as  Surface 
Characters,  and  which  are  especially  valuable  because  of 
their  facility  in  joining  with  other  characters  ;  because  of 
their  distinctive  outlines,  and  because  they  readily  admit 
of  modification  in  size,  still  retaining  their  characteristic 
appearance. 


Xii  IXTKODUCTIOX. 

The  system  may  be  justly  characterized  as  a  free-hand 
shorthand.  Since  the  publication  of  the  third  edition 
the  main  features  of  the  system  have  remained  unchanged, 
but  the  fifth,  ninth  and  tenth  editions  presented  some 
slight  modifications.  The  first  edition  of  the  Shorthand 
Dictionary  contained  several  changes  which  were  gener- 
ally welcomed  as  valuable,  and  the  second  edition  contains 
a  few  others  which  will  prove  equally  acceptable.  From 
the  tenth  to  the  present  edition  there  have  been  no 
changes  in  the  plates  of  the  work. 

Doubtless  it  has  sometimes  seemed  undesirable  to 
Avriters  of  the  system  to  be  obliged  to  frequently  learn 
something  new  in  order  to  keep  abreast  with  its  develop- 
ment, but  for  the  most  part  only  favorable  criticisms  have 
been  offered. 

The  fundamentals  of  the  system  Vv'ere  the  result  of 
most  thorough  investigation,  and  I  have  never  ceased  to 
regard  all  the  most  minute  details  which  clothed  it  with 
constantly  increasing  interest  and  affection,  striving  to 
avoid  the  addition  of  anything  unimportant,  or  that 
might  mar  'its  symmetry,  so  that  in  all  its  parts  its  unity 
might  be  evident. 

Lovingly  as  it  has  been  nursed  from  its  very  birth,  the 
vast  labor  required  to  bring  it  to  its  present  state  of 
maturity  has  often  caused  the  wish  that  it  had  been  pro- 
duced from  the  brain  of  a  Jupiter,  that  like  Minerva  it 
might  have  sprung  into  being  fully  developed. 

I  owe  sincere  gratitude  to  intelligent  and  enthusiastic 
teachers  who  have  so  ardently  advocated  its  claims  in  all 
parts  of  the  couniry,  many  of  whom  have  generously 
responded  to  my  repeated  inquiries;  and  I  have  profound 


INTRODUCTION".  Xlll 

admiration  for  the  strong-liearted  young  men  and  women 
who,  by  well-directed,  earnest,  loving  effort  have  demon- 
strated its  practicability  in  all  departments  of  reportorial 
work. 

This  edition  contains  everything  valuable  which  has 
been  connected  with  the  system.  It  has  been  written 
anew  throughout.  The  contractions  have  been  repre- 
sented in  the  form  of  brief,  simple  rules,  with  ample 
illustrations. 

The  coalescents  are  all  presented  as  combinations, 
before  the  position-alphabet  is  given,  so  that  there  may 
be  less  embarrassment  to  the  learner  in  writing  words 
which  begin  with  coalescent  consonants.  All  the  short- 
hand instruction  is  put  in  the  form  of  short  lessons  with 
review  questions,  that  teachers  may  the  more  easily  and 
thoroughly  drill  learners  on  the  elements,  a  feature  which 
I  believe  will  be  appreciated. 

I  have  considerably  increased  the  number  of  illustra- 
tive words  in  this  edition,  and  have  given  a  long  list  of 
common  phrases,  and  also  lists  of  business  and  legal 
phrases,  which  will  greatly  increase  the  practical  value  of 
the  book. 

In  order  that  the  jjupil  may  have  the  advantage  of 
accurate  rej)resentation  of  all  the  princii3les  and  expe- 
dients employed,  I  have,  myself,  carefully  written  for  the 
photo-engraver  all  the  illustrative  characters  and  pages. 
Such  have  been  the  improvements  in  the  photo-engraving 
art  within  the  past  few  years,  that  the  illustrative  written 
pages  of  this  edition  are  much  better,  and  more  perfect 
reproductions  of  the  work  of  the  pen,  than  were  those  of 
any  previous  edition.     Heretofore,  writing  for  the  photo- 


XIV  INTEODUCTIOJST. 

engraver  had  to  be  made  twice  as  large  as  it  was  to  appear 
in  the  plate,  that  by  diminishing  its  size  by  means  of  the 
camera  the  sharpness  of  outline  might  be  preserved.  To 
write  rapidly  twice  as  large  as  usual,  and  at  the  same  time 
preserve  all  the  relative  proportions  of  the  characters,  was 
a  very  difficult  task,  and  many  disproportionate  characters 
necessarily  resulted,  which  to  some  extent  impaired  the 
legibility  of  the  exercises.  For  this  edition  the  writing 
is  done  in  my  uniform  style  and  size,  and  is  exactly  repro- 
duced in  the  plates  by  photo-engraving;  and  it  is  believed 
that  these  rapidly  written  illustrations  will  be  far  more 
valuable  to  the  learner  than  carefully  engi-aved  samples. 

Projected  on  an  entirely  new  plan, — a  system  of  short- 
hand Avriting  by  principles  and  rules  having  no  excep- 
tions; almost  without  word-signs;  writing  words  more 
fully  and  yet  with  less  strokes  than  any  other  system,  it 
has  had  a  steady,  gradual,  practical  development.  It  was 
at  first  favorably  received  by  the  public,  and  for  a  work 
of  its  character,  has  been  Avidely  studied,  and  is  now 
employed  in  all  parts  of  the  country  in  commercial,  legal, 
and  general  reporting. 

The  modifications  of  this  edition  will,  it  is  hoped,  give 
facility  in  reading  and  writing,  lend  stability  to  the  sys- 
tem, and  lighten  the  load  of  the  great  army  of  toilers 
with  the  swift  pen,  thus  rendering  the  verbatim  record 
of  thought  more  possible  and  absolute  in  all  its  depart- 
ments. 

J.  G.  Cross. 
Chicago,  January  1,  1890. 


OOI^TENTS. 


Chirographic  Diagram, 
Introduction, 


PAGE 

Frontispiece 

V-XIV 


CHAPTER  I. 


How  to  Teach  Shorthand, 
How  to  Study  Shorthaiul, 
Attitude  while  Writing, 
Materials, 
Perseverance, 


1-3 

3-5 

5 

5-7 

7 


CHAPTER  II. 

CHARACTERS   AND   THEIR   COJIBIXATION. 

Lesson    I.     Derivation  and  Classification  of  the  Characters,    8-10 
The  Alphabet,  .  .  .13 

"      II.     Learning  the  Alphabet,  .  .  .    13,14 

"     III.     Combinations  of  Ticks,  and  Circles  with  other 

Characters,       .....    15-17 
"     IV.     Combining  the  Diagraphs  sh,  ch,  wli,  with  other 

Characters,  .  .  .  .18,19 

"      V.     Combining  Hooks  with  other  Chai'acters,     .  19-21 

Illustrative  Combinations,  .  .  .    22-26 

Movement  Exercises,  ...  27 

"     VI.     Shading  to  Express  Letters,      .  .  .28, 29 

"    VII.     The  Coalescent  Z  and  w,       .  .  .         30,31 

"  VIII.     Coalescent  s, 32-35 

Review  Illustrations,  ...  36 


CHAPTER  III. 
Lesson  IX.     Phonography, 


37-40 


xvi  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

EXPEDIENTS   OF   ABBREVIATION. 

Lesson       X.     Position  Alphabet,      ....  41 

Rule  1,  Vowel  Positions,              .            .  42, 43 

"         XI.     Vowel  Sounds,  ....    43-47 

XII.     Rule  2,  Consonant  Positions,        .             .  48-49 

"      XIII.     Rule  3,  Consonant  Positions,  continued,  .    50-53 

XIV.     Complete  Position  Alphabet,         .             .  53,54 

"        XV.     Rule  4,  Writing  Diphthongs  on  Positions,  .    54,55 

Writing  Words  beginning  with  Two  Vowels,  56 

XVI.     Rule  5,  Writing  Coalescents  on  Positions,  .    57-62 

"     XVII.    Rule  6,  Lengthening  of  Characters,         .  62,63 

Rule  7,  Enlarging  Surface  Characters,  .    63-65 

'•   XVIII.     Rule  8,  Shortening  Short  Characters,      .  65-68 

Rule  9,  Diminishing  Surface  Characters,  .    68-70 

Exercise  on  Relative  Sizes,             .             .  70 

XIX.     Rule  10,  Writing  Characters  Irregularly,  .    71-80 

"        XX.     Rule  11,  Writing  Initial  h  on  Position,  80,81 

"     XXI.      Review  of  Hooks  and  Circles,            .  .    82-86 

CHAPTER  V. 

ABBREVIATION   BY   SUFFIXES   AND   PREFIXES. 

Lesson    XXII.     Abbreviation  by  Sufifixes,           .             .  87-93 
"      XXIII.     List    of    Terminations,    with    Disconnected 

Signs, 93-97 

"      XXIV.     List    of    Terminations   with  Signs  Written 

Across,              ....  98 

Exercise  in  Terminations     .             .  99-101 

XXV.     Prefixes  Classified,           .             .             .  102-110 

"      XXVI.     Prefixes  with  Special  Signs,             .  111-115 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Lesson  XXVII.     Words  of  Frequent  Occurrence,            .  116-122 

Proper  Names,        .             .             .  123-125 

Writing  Exercise,        .             .             .  125,  126 


CONTENTS.  XVll 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PHRASE- WRITING. 

Lesson  XXVIII.     First  Method,         .            .             .  127-130 

XXIX.     Second  Method,             ...  131 

XXX.     Third  Method,        .             .             .  132-136 

Fourth  Method,             ...  136 

Rules  for  General  Phrase-Writing,  137-138 

Illustrations  of  Common  Phrases,              .             .             .  139-154 

Business  Phrases,       .             .             .  155-159 

Legal  Phrases,     ....  160-164 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

GRADED   READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES. 

The  Old  Oak  Tree,  .....      165,  166 

The  Rose  and  the  Clay,  .....        167 

The  Ox  and  Calf,  .  .  .  .  .  .167 

The  Old  Dame  and  Her  Maids,  .  .  .  .168 

The  Bees  and  Snail,        .  .  .  .  .  .168 

The  Wolf  and  Fox,  .....  169 

The  Fly  and  Ant,  .  .  .  .  .  .170 

The  Hart  and  Vine,  .  .  •  .  .  171 

The  Last  Rose  of  Summer — Thos.  3Ioore,        .  .  .      172 

The  Girl  and  Chickens. — Hans  Christian  Andersen,  172 

The  New  Frock. — Hans  Christian  Andersen,   .  .  .173 

Bread  and  Butter. — Ha7is  Christian  Andersen,       .  .   174.  175 

Lecture  on  Shirt  Buttons. — Dougtas  Jerrold,    .  .  176-178 

Baby's  Soliloquy       ......  178 

Those  Evening  Bells. — Thos.  Iloore,       ....   179 

A  Hundred  Years  to  Come  .....  180 

The  Pilot.— Jo/)«  B.  Gough,    .  .  .  .  .181 

The  Stream  of  LUe.-Ii.  Heher,     ....  182 

Advice  to  Young  Men. — Noah  Porter,  .  .  .      183 

Lincoln  the  Shepherd  of  the  People. — Phillips  Brooks,  .      183,  184 


XVlll 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

ADDENDA. 

Omission  of  Words,            .....  185 

"        Consonants,  Vowels,         .             ,            .  186,  187 

Prefixes,  Suffixes,         ....  188 

Technical  Terms,  Negative  Words,  Shorthand  Notation,  .      189 

Proper  Names,  Punctuation,         ....  190 

Shorthand  Capitals,  Preparing  Copy  for  Printer,        .  .       191 

Proof  Reading, 191-193 

Long  and  Short  Vowels,         ....  194,  195 

Epitome  of  Rules,              .             .            .            .             .  196 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE     AMANUENSIS. 

Qualifications,  .  .  .  , 

Character,   .  .  .  - 

Education 

Shorthand  .... 

Penmanship,  the  Writing  Machine, 

Regarding  a  Position, 
The  Writing  Machine, 
Correspondence  ..... 

Typewritten  Letters,    . 

Exercises  for  Correction 
The  Legal  Amanuensis, 

Legal  Forms, 


198 

.  198 

199-301 

.  201 

302 

203-208 

209-214 

.    214 

215-225 

.  226 

227 

227-237 


CHAPTER  XL 

COURT   REPORTING. 

Taking  the  Notes  of  a  Trial,         ....        240-243 

Making  Transcript,   ......  243-246 

Typewritten  Transcript  of  a  Case  in  Court,        .  .        247-249 

Notes  of  Preceding  Transcript,         ....  250-254 

Illustrations  of  Transcript,  ....        255-261 

ILLUSTRATIONS   OF   CURVE-LINE   RULING. 

Our  Country. — Eenry  Armitt  Broivn         .  .  .  262 

The  Power  of  B.ahit.—JoJm  B.  Gough,  .  .  .263 

The  Love  of  Country. — Sydney  Smith,      .  .  .  264 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 


CHAPTER   I. 


HOW   TO   TEACH   SHORTHAND. 

1.  This  edition  is  intended  to  be  so  written  that  the 
teacher  will  have  little  to  do,  except  to  make  a  repeated 
and  thorough  revision  and  examination  of  all  his  pupil's 
work,  to  be  sure  of  its  correctness.  No  pupil  can  learn 
shorthand  without  study,  but  these  lessons  being  short 
and  clear,  if  frequently  and  thoroughly  reviewed,  every 
student  may  make  certain  progress. 

2.  In  reviewing,  dictate  every  exercise  to  the  class, 
one  or  more  pupils  writing  on  the  board  v^hile  others 
write  on  their  blanks.  Let  the  writing  on  the  board  be 
carefully  criticised,  and  all  errors  pointed  out  and  cor- 
rected. Occasionally  look  over  the  written  exercise  of  the 
whole  class  to  be  sure  that  each  pupil  understands  the 
work  he  is  doing.  If  any  pupil  fails  to  apply  the  prin- 
ciples, he  had  better  be  turned  back  to  the  beginning  and 
go  through  them  all  again,  rather  than  go  on  to  the  par- 
tial or  complete  failure  which  inevitably  results  from  not 
mastering  the  fundamental  priiici})les  of  any  study. 

3.  Insist  on  the  pupil  kee2)ing  to  the  exercises  of  the 
book  without  dictation  of  other  matter  until  he  has  quite 
finished  the  Text-book  and  Shorthand  Dictionary.     Then 


3  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

you  may  begin  to  dictate.  At  first  dictate  simj)le  matter, 
as,  the  First  Reader,  Robinson  Crusoe  in  monosyllables, 
^sop's  Fables,  etc.  These  short  words  serve  to  illustrate 
the  application  of  all  the  princi^^les  except  the  prefixes 
and  suffixes,  and  offer  less  embarrassment  to  the  learner, 
until  he  begins  to  have  some  proficiency  and  confidence, 

4.  The  rate  of  dictation  should  at  first  be  sufficiently 
moderate  to  enable  the  writer  to  follow  it  easily,  but 
should  gradually  be  increased,  until  speed  is  attained. 

5.  Dictating  very  slowly,  the  student  repeating  each 
Avord  as  often  as  possible  before  the  next  is  uttered,  is 
excellent  practice  to  familiarize  him  with  words. 

6.  Frequently  time  the  student,  to  ascertain  how 
many  words  he  can  write  in  one,  two,  three,  or  five 
minutes. 

7.  Insist  on  the  pupil  reading  all  he  writes.  In  read- 
ing in  class  do  not  allow  too  much  prompting.  The  pupil, 
should  become  self-reliant  as  fast  as  possible.  He  should 
frequently  be  called  on  to  rise  and  read  his  notes, — an 
excellent  exercise,  than  which  nothing  can  inspire  more 
confidence. 

8.  As  early  as  jiossible  after  the  pupil  has  thoroughly 
mastered  the  jirinciples,  he  must  Ijegin  to  transcribe  his 
notes  on  the  machine,  and  should  have  several  business 
letters  or  business  or  legal  forms  dictated  to  him  daily, 
to  be  transcribed  on  the  machine  and  submitted  for 
examination  and  criticism. 

9.  One  difficult  exercise  repeatedly  performed  by  the 
pupil  until  he  can  do  it  quickly  and  perfectly  is  worth  a 
vast  amount  of  easy  or  aimless  work,  either  in  shorthand 
or  on  the  machine. 


HOW   TO    STUDY   SHOKTHAXD.  3 

10.  The  Avritten  exercises  should  not  only  be  fre- 
quently read  and  copied  by  the  pupil,  but  should  be 
dictated  to  him,  that  he  may  compare  his  writing  with 
that  of  the  text-book. 


HOW   TO   STUDY   SHORTHAND. 

1.  Learn  the  alphabet  thoroughly,  so  that  you  can 
make  any  character  perfectly  and  quickly,  and  can  write 
without  hesitation  any  letter  called  for.  Do  not  be  in 
haste  to  leave  the  alphabet. 

2.  Study  the  illustrations  of  combinations,  and  prac- 
tice them  until  you  can  reproduce  them  from  the  keys 
which  follow  without  referring  to  the  illustrations. 

3.  Study  and  practice  the  coalescents  until  you  are 
familiar  with  them. 

4.  Read  the  chapter  on  phonography  until  you  under- 
stand it. 

5.  The  position-alphabet  is  no  less  important  than  the 
alj)habet  of  characters,  and  must  be  studied  and  practiced 
with  the  same  pains-taking  care.  Let  no  rule  or  remark 
pass  until  you  thoroughly  understand  and  can  apply  it. 

6.  The  words  given  in  the  illusti'ations  must  be  re- 
written many  times,  until  you  can  write  every  one  of 
them  correctly  and  without  hesitation. 

7.  You  must  frequently  review  the  rules  ;  otherwise 
in  learning  so  many  similar  new  things,  one  after  an- 
other will  be  forgotten,  and  their  future  application 
impossible. 

8.  Do  not  be  too  anxious  to  practice  writing  general 
matter,  but  be  satisfied  to  confine  yourself  to  the  words 


4  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAXD. 

given  in  the  illustrations  until  you  have  passed  through 
all  the  rules  and  the  lists  of  phrases.  At  this  point  you 
should  write  a  number  of  pages  daily  from  the  Shorthand 
Dictionary. 

9.  Study  and  practice  the  phrases  until  you  have 
thoroughly  memorized  them,  then  you  may  practice  the 
illustrative  written  pages  following  them. 

10.  All.  the  writing-exercises  in  this  book  should  be 
practiced  until  yon  can  write  them  perfectly.  You 
should  also  transcribe  them  in  longhand  or  type-writing 
and  write  your  transcript  in  shorthand  to  compare  your 
writing  with  mine,  and  do  not  be  satisfied  until  you 
write  perfectly. 

11.  When  you  begin  to  write  from  dictation,  you 
should  critically  examine  your  writing  frequently,  to 
discover  any  errors  you  may  have  fallen  into,  and  to  pre- 
vent their  becoming  permanent. 

12.  You  may  hear  it  said  that  every  stenographer 
must  have  some  peculiarities  of  his  own,  some  word  and 
phrase-signs  of  his  own  invention.  Be  not,  however,  so 
ambitious  to  develop  these  erratic  tendencies,  as  you  are 
to  become  thoroughly  established  in  all  the  principles  of 
the  system,  for  these  will  afford  you  ample  foundation  for 
definite,  comprehensive,  and  brief  writing. 

13.  You  must  not  neglect  reading,  but  should  care- 
fully and  repeatedly  read  all  the  exercises.  When  you 
are  able  to  write  correctly  from  dictation,  you  must  read 
all  you  write.  If  you  have  difficulty  in  reading,  you  must 
devote  the  more  attention  to  it.  Take  one  of  your  rapidly 
written  exercises  of  a  dozen  pages  and  read  it  repeatedly 
forwards  and  backwards,  and  then  go  over  it  all,  calling 


ATTITUDE    WHILE    WKITIKG.  5 

out  words  here  and  there  until  you  can  call  any  word  at 
sighto  By  this  means  you  will  fully  overcome  any  diffi- 
culty you  may  have  in  reading. 

14.  The  foregoing  remarks  on  reading  are  based  on 
the  assumption  that  you  have  already  learned  to  write 
reasonably  well,  for  unless  you  understand  the  rules  and 
apply  them  correctly  in  writing,  your  notes  will  neces- 
sarily be,  to  a  greater  or  less  extent,  illegible. 

ATTITUDE   WHILE   WRITING. 

1.  To  write  easily,  sit  nearly  erect  at  the  table,  resting 
both  arms  on  its  surface,  leaning  slightly  on  the  left  arm, 
that  the  right  may  receive  none  of  the  weight  of  the 
shoulders,  but  may  rest  so  lightly  as  to  offer  no  obstacle 
to  its  easy  movement  in  all  directions. 

2.  In  writing,  the  right  arm  and  hand  must  rest  on 
the  table  buoyantly,  like  cork  on  water. 

3.  Do  not  hold  the  pen  too  tightly  with  the  fingers, 
but  only  with  a  grasp  sufficiently  firm  to  keep  it  well  in 
its  place.  Too  much  pressure  of  the  fingers  on  the  pen 
will  render  the  whole  hand  and  arm  rigid,  and  thus  pre- 
vent freedom  of  action. 

MATERIALS. 

1.  There  is  no  doubt  that  curve-line  blanks  are 
superior  to  those  ruled  with  straight  lines.  Inquire  of 
your  stationer  for  them;  their  use  will  add  much  to  your 
ease  and  speed  in  writing.  The  hand  moves  in  curves 
much  more  easily  and  swiftly  than  in  straight  lines. 


b  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

2.  Pencils. — Pencils  are  more  generally  used  than 
pens,  because  they  are  more  easily  carried  and.  are 
always  ready  for  use.  The  stenographer  bays  them  by 
the  dozen  or  gross,  and  always  keeps  at  hand  a  number  of 
them  well  sharpened.  Pencils  ISTos.  2  or  2^  of  some  reli- 
able manufacture  will  bear  whittling  to  a  long  point,  and 
require  much  less  pressure  in  writing  than  hard  pencils 
do.  In  sharpening  the  pencil,  whittle  away  the  wood  and 
lead  by  small  shavings  taken  equally  from  all  sides  of  it, 
and  you  will  be  less  likely  to  break  the  point. 

3.  Pens. — The  pen,  if  well  chosen,  is  an  easier  in- 
strument to  use,  and  less  fatiguing  than  the  pencil, 
because  it  requires  much  less  pressure.  It  also  produces 
more  definite,  legible  and  permanent  characters.  In 
phonography  a  flexible  pen  is  far  superior  to  a  stiff  one. 
The  points  should  be  smooth  and  reliable.  Steel  pens 
used  in  acid  inks  soon  become  corroded  and  sharp,  and 
should  therefore  be  frequently  replaced. 

4.  A  good  half -stub  pen  is  a  very  pleasant  instrument 
for  shorthand  work.  I  have  used  the  Esterbrook 
"Chancellor"  with  much  satisfaction. 

5.  A  straight,  short-nibbed,  flexible,  smooth-pointed 
gold  pen  is  the  best  instrument  for  constant  use,  but  care 
must  be  taken  to  select  one  that  is  not  springy  and 
unmanageable.  Select  one  that  will  readily  respond  to 
pressure,  and  that  Avill  produce  short,  firm,  definite 
shades  with  but  slight  effort  of  the  writer.  The  ordinary 
long-nibbed,  springy  gold  pen  should  not  be  used  by  the 
stenographer.  If  a  good  gold  fountain-pen  can  be  secured 
to  suit  your  hand,  it  will  give  you  the  best  possible 
service. 


PERSEVEEING   STUDY.  7 

6.  Paper, — The  paper  you  use  must  be  selected  with 
reference  to  the  instrument  yon  write  with.  If  you  write 
with  a  pencil,  select  paper  with  a  smooth  but  medium- 
soft  surface,  which  the  pencil  will  slightly  indent  while 
writing.  If  you  use  a  pen,  select  a  calendered  paper  of 
medium-hard,  smooth,  even  surface. 

7.  Blank  books  are  made  to  open  from  the  end,  called 
end-fold,  or  from  the  side,  called  side-fold  blanks.  Either 
has  some  advantages  not  possessed  by  the  other,  but  you 
can  only  decide  by  practice  which  you  would  prefer. 

PEESEVERANCE. 

1.  You  Avill  deriye  great  advantage  from  the  use  of 
good  materials,  but  without  thoughtful,  persevering  study 
they  will  avail  but  little.  The  best  pens,  pencils  and 
paper,  with  the  best  system  of  shorthand  and  intelligent 
teaching,  cannot  make  you  ?j  stenographer. 

2.  As  a  foundation,  you  must  possess  a  good  English 
education.  If  you  lack  this,  you  must  at  once  take  up 
the  study  of  orthography,  dictionary  work,  grammar  and 
punctuation,  which  you  can  carry  on  with  shorthand. 

3.  Do  not  become  discouraged  ;  whether  studying  by 
yourself  or  in  school  keep  thoughtfully  and  patiently  at 
work,  becoming  daily  more  perfect  in  your  knowledge 
and  more  skilful  in  your  practice.  Every  student  is 
liable  to  occasional  feelings  of  discouragement,  but  suc- 
cess does  not  lie  in  yielding  to  them.  Laugh  at  dis- 
couragements and  press  onward.  If  you  make  a  little 
progress  daily  and  persevere,  you  will  be  able,  almost 
before  you  are  aware  of  it,  to  write  legibly,  rapidly. 


CHAPTER   II. 


CHARACTERS  AND  THEIR  COMBINATIONS. 
LESSON   I. 

1.  The  alphabetic  characters  used  in  this  system  of 
shorthand  are  arcs  and  chords  of  the  chirographic  ellipse. 

2.  The  Chirograjfhic  Ellij^se  is  an  ellipse  from 
which  are  derived  the  lines  of  the  longhand  alphabet. 

3.  The  following  figures  will  serve  to  show  the  arcs 
and  chords  which  are  approj^riated  to  the  alphabet  of 
this  system  of  shorthand. 


4.    These  lines  stand  in  three  directions,  viz. : 

HORIZONTAL.  FORWAED-SLANT.       BACK-SLANT. 


5.    Each  line  is  used  both  long  and  short,  thus  doub- 
ling the  number  of  lines. 

LONG    LINES. 


DEKIVATION    OF   CHARACTERS.  9 

SHORT   LIKES. 

6.  Each  line  has  three  characteristics,  viz, :  form, 
direction,  length. 

7.  There  are  no  perpendicular  characters,  but  some 
are  more  nearly  perpendicular  than  others.  The  natural 
action  of  the  hand  in  the  forward  movement  draws  up- 
ward lines  at  a  greater  slant  than  downward  lines,  and  in 
the  back  slant  characters  those  drawn  by  finger  movement 
stand  more  nearly  perpendicular  than  those  drawn  by  a 
gliding  movement  of  the  hand,  as  illustrated  in  the  fol- 
lowing longhand  characters: 

/^ 


8.  The  degree  of  slant  of  the  forward  oblique  charac- 
ters when  written  upwards,  is  about  thirty  degrees  from 
the  horizontal,  and  when  drawn  downwards  is  about  thirty 
degrees  from  the  perpendicular.  The  slant  of  the  back- 
ward oblique  characters  when  drawn  by  the  finger  move- 
ment is  about  thirty  degrees  from  the  perpendicular,  but 
when  made  by  the  hand  and  arm  movement  is  about 
thirty  degrees  from  the  horizontal,  as  shown  by  the  fol- 
lowing diagrams: 


9.  This  law  of  movement,  adopted  from  longhand,  is 
peculiar  to  this  system  of  shorthand,  and  is  important; 
the  motions  employed  being  so  similar  to  those  used  in 
longhand,  to  which,  by  long  practice,  we  have  become 


10  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

accustomed^  are  much  easier;  and  correct  execution  of 
the  characters  is  much  more  certain  than  in  those  systems 
which  employ  perpendicular  characters  in  connection 
with  backward,  forward  and  horizontal  characters,  the 
combining  of  which  produces  an  irregular  and  unnatural 
action  of  the  hand,  very  difficult  to  acquire  and  especially 
difficult  to  maintain  in  rapid  writing. 

10.  In  longhand  there  are  upward,  downward,  and 
horizontal  lines  of  various  lengths  occurring  in  regular 
order.  In  this  system  of  shorthand  we  have  upward, 
downward,  and  horizontal  lines  similar  in  form,  direction 
and  length  to  those  of  forward  longhand,  and  in  addition 
downward  lines  similar  in  slant,  form  and  direction  to 
those  of  the  back-slant  longhand. 

11.  The  characters  are  divided  into  two  general  classes, 
viz. :  Linear  Characters,  those  having  only  length, 
and  Surface  Characters,  those  having  both  length 
and  breadth.  The  Surface  Characters  comprise  the  two 
hooks,  two  circles,  and  the  circles  distinguished  by  the 
different  ticks  beginning  them. 

LINEAR    CHARACTERS. 


SURFACE    CHARACTERS. 

y^     U     O    ^    S>     h   o^   — 5 

12.  All  the  curves  being  derived  from  the  ellipse,  rapid 
practice  in  the  formation  of  continuous  ellipses  is  valu- 
able to  the  shorthand  student.  The  following  exercises 
should  be  practiced  at  a  rapid  rate: 

MOVEMENT   EXERCISES. 


MOVEMENT   EXERCISES. 


11 


EEVIEW. 


From  what  outline  are  the  alphabetic  characters 
formed?  In  what  three  directions  are  the  characters 
drawn?  What  three  distinctions  has  each  character? 
What  are  linear  characters?  What  are  surface  characters? 
What  is  the  degree  of  slant  of  the  forward-oblique  char- 
acters when  drawn  upwards?  What  is  the  degree  of  slant 
when  drawn  downwards?  By  what  movement  are  the 
upward  lines  drawn?  By  what  movement  are  the  down- 
ward lines  drawn?  By  what  movement  are  the  horizontals 
produced?  By  what  movement  are  the  more  upright 
backward  characters  jDroduced?  By  what  movement  are 
the  very  slant  backward  characters  produced? 


\>^^ 


f 
g 

h 

A 
B 
C 
D 
E 
F 
G 


ty 


THE  ALPHABET. 

SMALL   LETTEKS. 


-       ( 


^ 


J 

k      /-^       s 
1  ^        t 


m 


n 


u 


w^ 


p  <?         X      ""^ 

CAPITAL    LETTERS. 


^ 


^ 


R 
S, 

T 
U 

V 


/ 


sn       p 
ch       -^ 


ex 


wh 
til 

ng  ^ 

nj  ^ 

Y     V_ 
Z     *--^ 

Sh      J? 
Ch      -2, 

Wh    cy 
Th    . — , 


LEARNING   THE   ALPHABET.  13 

LESSOX    II. 
LEAENING   THE    ALPHABET. 

1.  Make  a  copy  of  the  aljjliabet. 

2.  Write  a,  i,  o,  j,  <9,  k,  "W,  v,  and  straight  s  very 
slanting,  npward,  by  a  gliding  movement  of  the  hand 
and  forearm  towards  the  right. 

^     ^     -^  ^    X^  ^^  ^^^^^ 

3.  Write  a,  o,  i,  j,  q,  "W,  v,  and  straight  t  nearly 
perpendicular  downwards. 

^  /  y  */^  /  y  /  / 

The  two  slants  are  similar  to  those  of  the  upward  and 
downward  strokes  in  longhand,  as  illustrated  in  the 
following  letters:  tn^  a,  e. 

4.  W^'ite  b,  X,  e,  u,  y,  and  z,  very  slant  downward, 
making  an  angle  of  about  thii-ty  degrees  with  the  hori- 
zontal line.  This  is  easily  done  by  a  slight,  quick  move- 
ment of  the  hand  to  the  right  in  forming  each  character. 


5.  Write  the  same  characters  nearly  perpendicular, 
forming  each  character  by  a  movement  of  the  fingers. 
This  movement,  although  not  so  easy  as  that  of  the  hand 
and  arm,  should,  as  well  as  the  other,  be  much  practiced, 
that  the  learner  may  become  very  proficient  in  each 
movement. 

\  \  V,  A  V  ^ 

6.  Write  m,  n,  r,  s,  f,  d,  th,  and  ng,  from  left  to 
right,  forming  each  character  by  a  gliding  movement  of 


14  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAXD. 

the  hand  towards  the  right.     The  r  is  distinguished  from 
n  by  bei)ig  heavy. 


7.  Write  p,  g,  r,  h,  1,  sh,  ch,  wh,  beginning  p  and 
sh  at  the  bottom  and  all  the  others  at  the  top.  Make 
the  h  and  r  and  the  circles  of  sh,  ch,  and  "wh  of  uni- 
form size. 

<>         u         o         o        ti^      S>      h      <=* 

8.  Write  the  vowels  a,  i,  o,  e,  u, beginning  them 
at  the  top  and  making  them  by  a  downward  movement; 
also  write  a,  i,  o  upwards  and  e  and  u  downwards  very 
slanting. 

9.  Study  and  practice  the  alphabet  until  you  not  only 
know  each  letter  at  sight,  but  can  reproduce  any  letter 
without  hesitancy  and  by  a  quick  stroke.  It  is  well  to 
practice  until  you  can  write  the  entire  alj^habet  correctly 
several  times  in  a  minute. 


cy  o 


^^  ^7    f    

10.  Observe  those  characters  which  you  make  imper- 
fectly, and  devote  more  attention  to  them,  until  you  can 
make  all  the  characters  with  equal  facility  and  accuracy. 

EEVIEW. 

What  are  horizontal  characters?  What  are  the  for- 
ward-oblique characters?     How  are  they  written?    What 


COMBINATIONS. 


15 


causes  the  difference  in  their  slant?  What  are  the  back- 
ward-oblique characters?  Why  are  they  written  with  two 
different  slants?  How  are  the  characters  of  each  slant 
written?  What  are  the  surface  characters?  How  do  you 
begin  the  ticked  characters?  Which  of  them  are  written 
downwards?     Which  upwards?     -;■. 


i  LESSON  III. 

COMBINATIONS. 

1.  Combining  the  ticks  with  other  char- 
actef's. — Prefix  t  to  other  characters. 

2.  Affix  t  and  s  to  other  characters. 

ILLUSTEATIONS. 
Ta,       ti,       to,     te,     tu,       t^      td,         tf,       tg,    tj,   tth,    tk, 

tl,     tm,     tn,    tp,  tq,  tr,    ts,    tt,        tw,      tv,      tx,      ty,     tz,     tng, 
tbh,    teh,   at,    it,     ot,      et,    ut,    bt,^    A,t,       dt,       ft,     gt,  lit,  jt, 


bs,    y^s,       ds,       es,       fs,       gs,    hs,    is,    js,    ks,  Is,     ms,    ns,  os. 
ps,  qs,      rs,        ts,    ths,     us,         vs,        \vs,    xs,       ys,        z^.   slis.clis, 

whs,  ngs. 


d-- 


\ 


,    ECLECTIC    SHORTHAXD. 


1.  Combining  the  circles  tvith  other  char- 
acters, — Prefix  r  to  each  character  by  writing  the  circle 
on  the  inner  side  of  cnrves^  and  on  the  upper  side  of 
straight  lines. 

OJt^^  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

fj/      X   /      ^^'   ^^^     ^^    ^^'    ^6,     rf,     rg,    rh,     ri,     rj,    rk,   rl,     rm, 

rn,     ro,  rp,  rq,  rr,        rs,      rt,  rth,     ru,       rv,       rw,      rx,      ry, 
rz,     rch. 

2.  Affix  r  to  each  letter  by  writing  the  circle  on  the 
inner  side  of  carves,  and  under  side  of  straight  lines. 

N^    )A  ILLUSTRATIOXS. 

^        I       Ar,    br,     jkx,    tlr,    er,      fr,     gr,     ir,     jr,     kr,   Ir,    mr,    nr, 

or,    pr,    qv,      sr,      tr,     thr,     ur,    vr,     wr,    xr,     yr,     zr,     shr, 

^^  ^    i ^     S      .— ^     -^^-^^^^^--^  ji, 

chr,  whr. 
^      <^ 

3.  Prefix  and  affix  1  in  the  same  manner  as  r,  to 
other  characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

J      ,       La,  al,  lb,    bl,      1^^,     Id,       dl,     le,    el,        If,       fl,    Ig,  gl, 

^iT^      I      li,     il,     Ij,     jl,     Ik,     kl,     Ira,     ml.     In,     nl,    lo,    ol,  Ip,  pi, 


'A 


COMBINATIONS. 


1? 


Iq,  qi,     11,     Is,     .  si,      It,  tl,    1th,      thl,    ]u,     ul,    Iv,    vl,    hv. 
/      wl,    Ix,     xl,     ly,     yl,     zl. 


4.  Prefix  h  to  the  vowel  characters,  making  the  h 
and  joining  it  angularly  to  the  letter  following  it;  pre- 
fix and  affix  it  to  consonants,  joining  it  angularly. 

ILLUSTEATIONS. 
Ha,    he,     hi,     ho,     hu,       hm,     lin,     hd,  hs,  hth,      hf,      ht, 

r     "^    y      ^     "^    c^ <^a~^c^.^-~^a ^     9 

hv,    hy,     hx,     dh,     mh,    nh,    fh,      bhv,      bhf,       bhiul,    bhd, 


5.  Enlarge  h.  to  exjoress  a  following  t  or  d,  joining 
it  angularly  to  other  letters. 

ILLLTSTRATIONS. 
Hts,     hdd,    htm,    hdn,  blid,  dhd,    wht,  tht,  shd,     vhd. 

EEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

In  what  direction  is  the  straight  t  always  written  ? 
What  distinguishes  straight  t  from  straight  s  ?  How  is 
the  circle  r  joined  to  curves?  How  to  the  beginning 
of  straight  horizontal  lines?  How  to  the  end  of  them? 
On  which  side  of  oblique  straight  lines  is  initial  r 
drawn?  On  which  side  of  them  is  final  r  turned? 
Why  are  initial  r  and  1  written  on  the  upper  side  of 
straight  lines?  Why  are  final  r  and  1  written  on  the 
under  side  of  straight  lines? 


18 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


K 


K) 


LESSON  IV. 

COMBINING   THE    DIGRAPHS    Sh,    Ch   AND   Wh   WITH 
OTHER    CHARACTERS. 

1.  Prefix  sh  to  the  other  characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS.- 

Shn,     shd,     shs,     shth,       slif,      slib,       shx,       shy,  shv,    shz, 

Dhw,  she,  shch,    shl,    shp,        shg.  * 

2.  Prefix  ch  to  other  characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Chn,       chm,    chs,     cht,     chf,         chc,     chv,  chw,  chp,    chg, 

^3—     >5 V      -^    ^ -.  ^^"^^T-^^^  ^r7    ^  ^ 

chy,   chz,  c'hb,     ehx,    chch,    chsh,     chug. 

3.  Prefix  wh  to  other  characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Whn,    whm,      whs,      wht,     whp,    whg,      whcli, 
c^ —    c^ (^        <^        cfy       cL-        ^ 


whf, 


whl. 


whc,    whv,  whb,     whx, 


why,      whz,    whiig. 


4.  Affix  the  enlarged  circle  to  other  characters^  turning 
it  on  the  inner  side  of  curves  and  surface  characters  and 
under  side  of  straight  lines  for  sh  or  ch.  The  enlarged 
circle  is  joined,  directly  for  either  sh  or  ch.  The  en- 
larged circle  is  never  used  beginning  a  word  for  ch,  sh, 
but  the  alphabetic  forms  are  used. 


COMBINING   CHARACTERS.  19 

V 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Bsh,     beh,     csh,     cch,     dsh,     dcli,     fsh,       fch,        gsli,    lish, 

hch,      jsh,      Ish,      Icli,    iiisli,     mch,    nsh,     ncli,     qush,  i-.sli,  reh  1 

-t)    --^     ^      ^ D    ^   -0^(^00 

ssh,     sell,    tch,  Ysh,   Ych,    wsh,     wch,    thrsh,  thch. 

'^    EEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

lu  what  direction  is  tlie  tick  beginning  tlie  cliaracter 
sh.  drawn?  In  what  direction  is  the  tick  in  the  character 
ch  drawn?  In  what  direction  is  the  tick  in  the  character 
wh  drawn?  On  which  side  of  the  tick  is  the  circle 
turned  in  sh  when  it  is  followed  hj  p  or  c?  On  which 
side  of  the  tick  may  the  circle  in  ch  be  turned  when 
followed  by  t?  How  is  the  enlarged  circle  attached  for 
sh?     How  is  the  enlarged  circle  attached  for  ch? 

LESSON  V.  ^^ 

COMBINING   THE    HOOKS    WITH    OTHER    CHARACTERS. 

1.  Prefix  p  and  g  to  other  characters,  nniting  them 
angularly  with  all  characters  except  with  each  other  and 
with  r,  1,  and  sh,  ch. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Pa,     pi,    po,    pe,    pu,     ga,     gi,      go,      ge,      gu,     piu,     pn, 

pth,     pf,     pd,     ps,    pt,    gn,     gm,     gs,    gth,   gt,    gf,      pc,    pv. 


20 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


pw,     ge,     gv,     g\v,     pb,      px,     py,    pz,    gb,    gx,    gy,    gz,  gs; 

pi,     pg,    pr,    gl,    gp,    gr,  gsh. 

^    /Z/  ^    (y  cy?     cP  (S^ 

2.  Affix  g  and  p,  writing  them  as  hooks  on  the  char- 
acters preceding  them,  turning  p  on  the  upper  and  g 
on  the  under  side  of  horizontal  and  backward-oblique 
characters. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


/ 


-^C^i 


Bp,  bg,     np,    wg,     nip,     ing,  xp,    xg,     dp,     dg,      sp,       sg, 


thp,   thg,     fp,        fg,    ep,  og,  up,     iig,    yp,     yg,   zp,     zg. 

3.  Attach  g  angularly  for  soft  g,  as  in  nudge, 
bridge,  fudge,  and  as  a  hook  for  hard  g,  as  in  bag, 
big,  fig.  If  a  word  begins  with  soft  g,  as  in  gain, 
gentle,  use  j  instead  of  g.  The  following  combinations 
illustrate  the  writing  of  both  hard  and  soft  g. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

iig,     ug,      ng,     ng,      thg,     thg, 


tg,     mg,    mg,  pg,  pg,  gem,  gentle. 

4.    Following  upward   c,  k,  V,  "w,  a,   i,  and   o,  p 

and  g  are  alv/aj's  turned  under,  p  as  a  hook,  and   g, 
whether  hard  or  soft,  joined  angularly. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Cp,     eg,   vp,   vg,   wp,    wg,      op,     og,     ap,     ag,      ip,      ig. 


\ 

COMBINING    CHAKACTEIiS.  31 

5.  Following  the  above  characters  when  they  are 
written  downwards  g  is  a  hook  when  hard;,  and  angularly 
joined  when  soft,  whert^as  p  is  joined  angularly. 

ILLLSTKATIOXS. 

Qg>    qg.   ciP.   ^g'     "-'s,  ^'P.  ^"P.  '^g.  ^^g'  wp.wp.  ag'  ^S'  ap, 

ig,  ig,    ip,  ip,  og,  og,  op,  op,  tg,  tp. 


6.  See  if  you  can  write  the  combinations  under  the 
six  J) receding  paragraphs,  writing  from  the  keys  without 
referring  to  the  illustrations.  If  you  cannot,  practice  on 
those  you  fail  on,  until  you  can  write  them  without  hesi- 
tancy. Review  and  practice  all  the  combinations  repeat- 
edly until  they  are  mastered.  Read  and  copy  the  follow- 
ing pages  of  combinations  repeatedly. 

7.  The  five  following  pages  of  combinations  are  given 
to  afford  you  ample  practice  in  combining  the  characters 
before  attempting  words,  that  you  may  be  the  better 
prepared  for  practicing  words.  They  are  photographic 
reproductions  of  similar  pages  written  rapidly  as  coj^ies 
for  the  student,  and  should  be  rapidly  practiced,  each 
combination  being  written  many  times,  to  acquire  the 
ability  to  write  them  at  once  correctly  and  rapidly. 

8.  In  practicing  them  sit  erectly,  rest  the  arm  lightly 
on  the  table,  hold  the  pen  loosely  in  the  fingers,  and 
write  by  a  combined  movement  of  arm,  hand  and  fingers, 
in  a  free-hand  way. 


33  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAISTD. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    COMBIXATIO>y"S. 


-7 


% 


ILLUSTRATIVE    COMBINATION'S. 


23 


"^V 


V_ 


r 


6^--^  /  o^  y  (y  CS>  lt  o^ — -^  o/  a 

6—  V^  o ^  ay  J  cr-^^ir-^  o 

/  en  7  C    cr     o 9*   cr — ^  cr-N  "^  cr^ 


24 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


-7 


~^- 


-fA-^ 


'^ 


--^/ 


ILLUSTRATIVE    COMBHSTATIONS.  25 


'^ 


/ 


J^. 


O 


^. 


/ 


26 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


/>^A7  /  J   6     ^ 


^ 


^ 


"~^ 


~^~^ 


^V;  "^  "^"^ 


-r 
2 


MOVEMENT   EXEECISES. 


27 


28  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

LESSON   VI. 

SHADING   TO    EXPRESS   LETTERS. 

1.  Initial  h, — The  h  is  a  whispered  letter,  always 
followed  by  a  vowel,  and  the  vocal  organs  are  always 
placed  for  the  vowel  following  the  h  before  the  h.  is 
uttered.  Its  effect  is  to  add  force  to  the  vowel  following 
it;  therefore,  the  vowel  characters  are  strengthened  at  the 
top  by  beginning  them  with  a  shade  to  express  the  j^re- 
ceding  h.  The  shade  for  h.  must  be  confined  to  the 
beginning  of  the  vowels,  leaving  them  unshaded  at  the 
end. 

Write  the  five  vowels  so  as  to  express  the  h  preceding, 
thus: 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Ha,      he,      hi,    ho,     hu,         hav,     bhav,  bhest,     bhed,      adher, 

r  K.  J  /  -^   c^  vX,- 

inhei",  bbold,    bhekl,      bhaf,      bhind. 


2.    JDlphthOfiffs, — The  diphthongs  au,  ou,  oi,  eu, 

and  oo,  are  represented  by  writing  the  vowel  characters 
heavy,  using  the  a  for  au,  the  u  for  ou,  the  e  for  eu, 
the  i  for  oi  and  the  o  foi"  oo. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Awl,    aught,    aws,    awfl,  bawl,      saw,     thaw,     caw,  gnaw(naw), 

^    /    ^    ^  ~'i  ~7  -f  -^ -r 

out,     our,     ours,     owl,     ounce,     dower,      douse,     down,      fowl, 
>      ^       >       ^ 


COALESCEXTS. 


39 


new,     few,       dew,      hew,    sewer,     newer,     newt,   oil,      oint, 

oyster,    soil,     boil,     foist,      toil,      boys,        joys,     ooze,   soon, 
noon,     moon,       boon,      coon,     loon. 

3.  Coalescent  r.— The  letter  r  is  a  coalescent 
letter,  that  is,  a  letter  that  combines  with  other  letters  to 
form  a  sound  which  is  pronounced  by  a  single  impulse  of 
the  voice.  Because  of  this  coalescent  nature  of  r,  other 
letters  are  shaded  to  express  an  r  following  them,  that 
the  united  sound  of  the  two  letters  may  be  represented  by 
a  single  character.  All  the  characters  except  d,  g,  and 
h  are  shaded  at  the  end  for  the  r  following.  The  d,  g, 
and  h  are  shaded  at  the  beginning  to  express  a  follow- 
ing r,  because  it  is  easier  to  shade  them  thus.  In  writing 
the  following  characters  be  careful  to  shade  them  properly. 
The  r  coalesces  only  with  b,  c,  d,  f,  g,  p,  t,  th,  sh, 
sc,  sp,  St  and  the  vowels,  but  all  characters  may  be 
shaded  to  express  a  following  r. 


Ar, 


or, 
/ 


er. 


nr,   pr,     qr, 


sr. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

ur,    br,   cr,    dr,     fr.     gr, 

tr,    nr,      vr,      wr,    xr, 


sbr, 


whr,    thr,    ngr, 


hr,   jr,    Ir, 
yr,    zr,     elu\ 
frthr,    brthr,      prfr,     trtr,   grpr,  trpr. 


/^ 


30  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

EEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

What  letters  are  shaded  to  express  h  preceding? 
Why  are  the  vowels  shaded  to  express  h  ?  Why  are  not 
consonants  shaded  to  express  h.  preceding?  How  are  the 
diphthongs  represented?  What  represents  au;  what  ou; 
what  oi;  what  eu;  what  oo?  Why  are  letters  sliaded 
to  express  a  following  r?  What  distinguishes  au  from 
haP     What  distinguishes  au  from  ar? 

LESSON  VII. 

THE    COALESCENT   L   AND   W. 

1.  Coalescent  I, — A  coalescent  1  is  expressed  by 
making  the  preceding  letter  minute. 

2.  The  letter  1  coalesces  with  the  letters  b,  c,  d,  f,  g, 
p,  s,  and  sp.  To  express  these  letters  with  the  following 
coalescent  1,  make  the  letter  before  the  1  minute;  except 
C  and  f,  making  bl,  dl,  gl,  pi,  sl,  spl.  For  cl  a 
minute  hook  is  used  turned  on  the  under  side  of  the 
letter  which  follows  it;  and  for  fl  a  minute  1  is  used. 

3.  The  coalescent  dl  does  not  occur  at  the  beginning, 
but  only  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  as  in 
ladle,  ladles. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

pi,     sl,     spl,     blc,    bis,     blv,      bif, 


COALESCENTS. 


31 


ybl,  zbl,  abl,   ibl,    obi,      ebl,    ubl,      elm,     els,     civ,     cic,  clp, 
fig,     clb,     elf,      clth,     mdl,     pdl,      sd!,       fdl,      ddl,    cdl,    fly, 
fix,      flm,    fld,     fls,     rafl,      sfl,    bfl,  wfl,   nfl,  gld,     gls,     glm, 


glnt,      glv,      git,  iigl,     bgl,     vgl,     wgl,       pld,     pis,  pin,      pic. 


pig,      plj,  dpi,     mpl,     npl,      gspl,     cpl,     Ipl. 

4.  Coalescent  tv. — Tlie  letter  "w  coalesces  with  t, 
th,  d,  s,  and  g.  To  express  "w  following  these  letters 
their  curve  is  deepened.  The  tw  and  thw  are  alike, 
but  are  never  confounded  with  each  other,  because  the 
words  in  which  they  occur  are  so  unlike;  thus,  thwart, 
thwack,  could  not  be  read .  twart,  twack,  nor  could 
tw^ice,  tw^ine  be  read  thw^ice,  thwine. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

twl,       twc,     twlv,    twls, 

thwrts,    dwl,      dwiidl,      dwls,     dwlt,  gwii,     swra, 


Twn,       tws,       twt. 


thwc,    thwrt, 


swl,      swt. 


EEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

With  what  letters  does  1  coalesce?  "What  principle  is 
used  to  express  coalescent  1?  What  two  letters  are  excep- 
tions?    What   is   used   for   coalescent  fl,  si,  elF     With 


32  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

what  letters  does  w  coalesce?  What  principle  is  em- 
ployed to  express  coalescent  wP  Why  may  thw  and 
tw  be  expressed  by  the  same  character? 


LESSON  VIII. 

COALESCEKT   S. 

1.  S  coalesces  with  c,  k,  q,  p,  ph,  1,  m,  n,  t,  and 
■w,  making  sc,  sk,  sq,  sp,  sph,  si,  sm,  sn,  st,  sw; 

the  sc  and  sk  are  written  alike^  and  sph  is  equal  to  sf. 

2.  SCf  sk, — These  combinations  represent  the  same 
sound  and  are  therefore  written  by  the  same  sign,  a  small 
semi-ellipse,  which  always  turns  to  the  right,  opening  to 
the  left.  Where  it  occurs  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  the 
character  which  represents  it  is  joined  angularly  with  the 
character  following  it,  except  1  and  r ;  but  when  it  occurs 
at  the  end  of  a  word,  it  is  joined  angularly  to  the  letter 
which  precedes  it;  when  occurring  in  the  middle  of  a 
word,  it  is  joined  angularly  to  both  the  letter  preceding 
and  following  it. 

ILLUSTRATION'S. 

Scm,  sent,    scmp,      scfl,     scth,  scd,  scl,     scr,     scrl,     scrm, 

:! 2 ,    -2 >     ~> ^:=3    '^ — -    2 .     ^  55        c^  Zi 

scrp,     scrch,     bsk,     brsk,     bskng,     bsks,     bskt,   csk,    csks,  dsk, 
dsknt,   dsklr,     dskrjmnt,     frsk,     frsks,     Isk,    rnsk,    mskt,     tsk, 
tsks,  tskng,  whskrs. 


COALESCENTS.  33 

3.  Sq, — This  combination  is  represented  by  the  same 
character  as  that  which  is  used  for  sc,  except  that  it  is 
made  hirger  than  for  sc.  The  combination  always  in- 
cludes the  u,  which  follows  q,  making  squ. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Sql,      sqls,     sqld,      sqrm,    sqrras,    sqmsh,      sqd,      sqds,    sqk, 

sqks,        sqkd,    sqbl. 

4.  Sp, — This  combination,  when  initial,  is  repre- 
sented by  a  hook  which  is  written  on  the  ujDper  side  of 
the  following  letter  and  joined  to  it  without  an  angle. 
When  the  combination  occurs  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end 
of  a  word,  it  is  represented  by  the  p  joined  angularly, 
making  the  beginning  of  it  longer  for  the  straight  S. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Spd,    spn,      sps,        spk,   spl,      sprn,      sprng,      spkn,     spks, 


speh,    sprnz,     sprd,    crsp,  rspr,      dspr,     prspr,      grsp,   Isp, 

dsps,  nspr. 

5.  St, — To  represent  this  coalescent  the  two  ticks  are 
used. 

Remark, — When  t,  d,  or  th,  follows  st,  the  t  is 
lengthened  to  express  the  t,  d  following,  and  is  made 
still  longer  for  a  following  td,  tt,  tth. 


34  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Stn,     stm,     sts,  stp,      stc,  std,    stt,     stj.     slg,     strp,     strn, 

yl ^ >^    -^  ^Z-^""^  ^    ^  .'■i^  yO      -/^     't- — 

strf,       strc,   stl,    st!s,  stng,    strng,    strnj,  strch,  strchs. 

^ --^^-"^^      ^    .^_-,  ...L-^  ,iU_^       ^        ^ 

6.  Hpll, — This  combination  has  the  sound  of  sf, 
therefore  a  retraced  s  is  used  to  represent  it,  the  re- 
tracing standing  for  f.  This  retracing  may  also  be  used 
for  f  or  v  following  any  letter  which  can  be  easily  re- 
traced. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Sphnx,      sphr,     sphrd,     sphi's,     sf-v,    niv,    cv,    wv,    dv, 


vv,    nv,     f\%      f vr,     cvr,  wvr,  nvr. 


7.  SI. — When  this  combination  occurs  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  word  it  is  represented  by  the  straight  s,  but 
when  it  occurs  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  it 
is  represented  by  the  straight  s  and  1  combined.  When 
initial  sl  is  followed  by  t,  both  the  S  and  1  are  written, 
making  the  combination  sl  to  prevent  its  being  con- 
founded with  St ;  as  otherwise  slat  and  stay  would  be 
written  alike. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


sis,     sit,  sits,    sltd,     sltrn,  slsh,       sib,      slbs,        slf,        slv. 


COALESCENTS. 


35 


8.    Snif  Sfl, — These  combinations  are  written  alike, 
the  s  being  lengthened  to  express  the  following  m  or  n. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Sml,  smr,  snl,  snr,  snth,  snp, 


snt,  sng. 


bsm, 


fsn, 


rsn, 


Isu, 


tsn. 


Q 


9.    Stv, — This  combination  is  represented  by  deepen- 
ing the  curve  of  the  horizontal  s. 

ILLUSTRATIONS, 
Swl,       swiu,     swt,    swsh,    swch,      swp,       swv,   swr,     swrm, 

swrn,      swrs,      swrd,       swk,      swhi,    swltr,     swshs,      swshng, 
swells,    swchng,     swpr,     swps,    swpng,      swth.        swths. 


KEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

With  what  letters  does  s  coalesce?  Eepeat  the  com- 
binations which  they  make.  What  character  is  used  for 
sc,  sk?  How  is  it  joined  to  otJier  characters?  What 
character  is  used  for  sq?  What  character  is  used  for  sp 
and  how  is  it  joined  to  others?  What  is  used  for  coal- 
escent  st?  What  is  the  sound  of  sph?  How  is  it 
written?    What  is  used  for  si  initial,  what  when  final? 


36 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


How  is  si  initial  written  before  t?  What  modification 
of  s  is  nsed  for  sn,  sm?  What  modification  of  s  for 
sw? 

The  following  illustrations  should  be  repeatedly  read 
and  written  as  a  review.  Every  combination  contains 
one  or  more  small  characters,  which  combined  with  longer 
or  larger  characters  afford  excellent  exercises  for  practical 
drill  on  the  different  sizes.  They  should  be  written  by  a 
quick,  free  stroke,  the  writer  striving  for  excellence  in 
outline. 

REVIEW   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


e^  e  o  6  ^  '^  ^ 


CHAPTER  III. 


LESSON  IX. 

PHONOGRAPHY. 

1.  Phonography  is  the  art  of  writing  by  characters 
representing  sounds,  omitting  all  silent  letters.  To  write 
phonetically  lessens  the  number  of  letters  used  in  writing 
to  such  an  extent  that  it  is  one  of  the  most  important 
principles  used  in  shorthand,  and  is  employed  in  all 
systems  of  shorthand. 

2.  It  is  impossible,  however,  to  write  all  the  sounds 
heard  in  speech  as  rapidly  as  they  can  be  uttered.  There 
is,  therefore,  no  system  that  provides  for  writing  or  re- 
porting all  the  sounds  heard  in  words,  but  only  enough  of 
them  are  written  to  clearly  indicate  the  intended  word, 
many  mere  suggestive  outlines  of  words  being  written; 
as  famn  may  clearly  represent  famine,  sumn  may 
stand  for  summon,  thot  for  thouglit,  fremn  for 
freeman,  etc. 

3.  To  determine  the  letters  that  may  be  safely  used  to 
represent  any  given  word,  pronounce  it  distinctly,  but 
as  briefly  as  may  be,  and  write  the  letters  heard  in 
the  pronunciation.  In  pronunciation  do  not  dwell  too 
much  on  the  vowels  in  the  final  syllables  of  a  word,  as 
many  such  vowels  may  safely  be  omitted.  It  should  be 
noted,  however,  that  a  final  accented  vowel  or  diphthong 


38  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

must  be  written,  as  in  the  words  obey,  annoy,  with- 
out. 

4.  The  letter  th  has  two  sounds;  as,  in  think  and 
thine,  but  the  shorthand  student  will  find  it  practical  to 
represent  both  these  sounds  by  one  character, 

5.  In  accordance  with  the  alphabet  by  the  SiDelling 
Reform  Association  the  c  character  is  used  for  all  letters 
having  the  sound  of  k;  i.e.,  for  k,  hard  c,  ck  and  hard 
ch,  as  in  kill,  come,  cord,  back,  character,  chord, 
Christ. 

6.  When  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  c  from  k  as  in 
initials,  place  a  dot  under  the  character  to  make  it  an 
alphabetic  k,  as  in  the  name  C.  K.  Jones,  in  which  the 
dot  is  placed  under  the  second  character,  or  in  the  name 
K.  K.  AdamSj  in  which  a  dot  is  jilaced  under  each 
initial. 

7.  For  the  soft  c  as  in  face,  cease,  trace,  juice, 
and  lucid,  write  s;  writing  fas,  ses,  tras,  jus,  lusd. 

8.  The  letter  g  has  two  sounds;  viz.,  its  pure  Anglo- 
Saxon  sound  called  hard  g,  as  in  get,  give,  gone,  big, 
sag,  and  its  soft  sound,  as  in  gem,  genius,  lounge. 
When  g  beginning  a  word  has  the  hard  sound  write  the 
g  character,  when  it  is  soft  write  j;  when  soft  g  occurs 
in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word  use  j  or  the  angu- 
larly joined  g,  whichever  is  the  easiest  to  write,  as  de- 
scribed in  the  previous  chapter.  Lesson  IV. 

9.  The  characters  q  and  x,  while  not  strictly  phon- 
etic, are  valuable  phonetic  expressions  of  the  compound 
sounds  which  they  represent;  viz.,  kw  and  ks.  The 
letter  q  being  always  followed  by  u,  the  u  may  be 
omitted  and  the  q  be  used  to  represent  the  compound  qu. 


PHOifOGRAPHY.  39 

10.  When  two  vowels  represent  one  sound,  as  in  aid, 
each,  either,  use  only  the  vowel  which  is  heard  in  pro- 
nunciation, writing  these  words  ad,  ech,  ethr.  The 
proper  diphthongs  are  represented  by  the  vowel  charac- 
ters made  heavy.  In  common  orthography  each  vowel 
sound  is  variously  represented,  but  in  shorthand  only  one 
representation  of  each  vowel  is  used;  thus  u  only  is  used 
for  the  several  sounds  of  u. 

11.  The  S  and  z  in  common  orthography  are  so 
interchangeably  used  that  the  writer  need  not  be  very 
particular  to  distinguish  them,  and  the  straight  s  makes 
a  very  practical  representative  of  either  s  or  z. 

12.  As  each  of  the  consonants  b,  d,  f,  h,  j,  1,  m, 
Q,  p,  r,  s,  t,  V,  w,  y,  and  z  has  but  a  single  sound, 
no  instructions  concerning  them  are  necessary. 

13.  The  following  list  of  words  with  their  phonetic 
spelling  so  thoroughly  illustrates  the  j^honetic  method 
that  the  average  student  will,  by  study  of  it,  acquire  a 
practical  idea  of  its  method  of  abbreviation. 

LIST   OF   WORDS   SPELLED    ORTIIOGRAPHICALLY    AND 
PHONETICALLY. 


Canaan,  Cann 

either,  ethr 

buy,  by 

Aaron,  Arn 

neither,  nethr 

beau,  bo 

aid,  ad 

feeflf,  fef 

beauty,  buty 

ail,  al 

neuter,  nutr 

gorgeous,  gorjs 

aim,  am 

pewter,  putr 

eye,  i 

mail,  mal 

juice,  jus 

lieu,  lu 

sail,  sal 

Jews,  Juz 

religious,  reljs 

gaol,  jal 

field,  feld 

eai',  er 

may,  ma 

yield,  yeld 

east,  est 

say,  sa 

oats,  ots 

though,  tho 

gay,  ga 

Croesus,  Cress 

boat,  bot 

each,  ech 

soul,  sol 

coat,  cot 

40  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


eat,  et 

persuade,  perswd 

cough,  cof 

see,  se 

Iowa,  loa 

view,  vu 

thee,  the 

aerial,  aerl 

through,  thru 

three,  thre 

curious,  curys 

enough,  enf 

who,  hu 

gem,  jem 

gentle,  jentl 

QUESTIONS  FOR  EEVIEW. 

What  is  phonography?  What  abbreviation  in  spelling 
is  necessary  in  shorthand?  Why  is  it  necessary?  How 
can  you  determine  the  sounds  necessary  to  use  in  repre- 
senting a  word?  What  can  you  say  of  th?  What  of  the 
letters  c  and  k?  How  is  the  soft  c  represented?  What 
of  the  letters  g  and  j?  When  two  vowels .  rejsresent  one 
sound  how  do  you  write  them?  What  use  is  made  of  the 
straight  s?  How  many  sounds  each  do  most  of  the  con- 
sonants represent?  What  consonants  have  more  than  one 
sound?  How  is  c  rendered  phonetic?  How  is  g  ren- 
dered phonetic?  What  compound  does  q  represent? 
What  two  letters  does  x  represent?  Why  is  it  unneces- 
sary in  shorthand  to  write  u  when  it  follows  q?  How  is 
k  distinguished  from  c?  In  what  cases  is  it  necessary 
to  use  the  dot?  Why  is  it  generally  unnecessary  to  dis- 
tinguish k  from  c  in  writing? 


CHAPTER  IT. 


EXPEDIENTS   OF  ABBEEVIATION. 

LESSON  X. 

1.  The  Position-alphabet. — You  have  learned 

a  distinct  single  character  for  eacli  letter  of  the  alphabet; 
how  to  combine  the  characters,  and  how  to  express  all  the 
coalescents  of  the  language. 

2.  You  have  now  to  learn  how  to  express  each  letter 
of  the  alphabet  by  position;  that  is,  by  a  definite  position 
with  reference  to  the  horizontal  line  of  writing. 

3.  Most  words  begin  with  a  consonant  or  coalescents 
followed  by  a  vowel;  as,  make,  stand;  others  begin 
with  a  vowel  or  diphthong  followed  by  a  consonant;  as, 
ask,  out ;  while  a  few  begin  with  two  vowels  followed 
by  a  consonant;  as,  aerial,  iota. 

4.  The  first  character  of  every  word  is 
written  in  one  of  the  following  positions: 

1.  Above  the  line.  2.  On  the  line.  3.  Across  the 
line.  4.  Just  below  the  line.  5.  Farther  below  the 
line. 

Thus  we  have  five  positions  with  reference  to  the  line 
on  which  we  are  writing.  The  following  arrangement  of 
numerals  will  illustrate  the  jiositions: 

1 

2 

4 
5 


43  eclectic  shokthai^d. 

Rule  1. 

5.  Vowel  "  positions, —Imtisd  conso- 
nants are  written  in  the 

1st   position   for   a  following     n,  au,  aw 
2d  "  "         •    "  e,  e*tr^' 

—3d " " " i,  y,  oi,  oy— 

4tli  "  ''  "  0,  ou,  ow' 

5tli  "  "  "  u,  00,  00. 

Thus,  b  in  the  1st  position  is — ba  or  baw;  in  the  2d — 
be  or  bew;  in  the  3d— bi  or  by  or  boy;  in  the  4th— bo  or 
bow;  in  the  5th — bu  or  boo. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Nay    gnaw,    knee     new,     nigh,     no      know      now,     nu      noo. 


may  maw,  me    mew,      my,       mo    mov:,     moo    mu,     ta,       u 


tea,     tie,     to    toe,    too,    fa,        tee     few,    fie,    foe,    fii,     foo,  say 

saw,      see,       sigh,     so     sow     sew,     sue,      hay      hjxw,    he     hew> 

a           o 
-__^.  ^ ^^ ! ^         « 

~ ■• 

high,     ho      hoe    how,     hue      who,     ray       raw,      re,    rye     wry, 

-^    ^   -   -    .   V  "~    ' — "" 


row    roe,  rue,    lay    law     la,      lee     lieu,  lie     lye,      lo    low,  loo, 


^       ^^      '^       ^      ^     .         . 
# r^ -j—^ 


VOWEL-POSITIONS. 


43 


pa      pay     paw,    pea     pew,     pie,     poh,     pooh,    gay,     guy,  go, 

-^        ^  ^.  ,  <-^ 

, -2. 2 ^ ^ 

sliiiy      psliaw,      she,       shy,    show,     shoo        slioe,     chose,  chew, 

^^ — !>       ^      ^      T" 

chin,  chose,  whey,     why      who,       they,     thee      the,      thy,     tho 

o^  ■ — ■        


'^W 


-^>- 


"sr 


though,    through,       three      threw,       day,     dew,      die,    do, due, 
, ^ — ^         ^A         ^^      •^*-        _     _^^ 

bah    bay    bey,     be,      by     buy,    bo     bow,  boo,    xal,     xert,   xil, 

^     ^     ^      ^      ^-     -^    ^      V^     ^~^   ^^^ 

iu!t,  yea,       ye      yew,       you,  za,      zeal,      zone,  caw,    key,    cue, 

kill    coil,     CO    cow,   coo,      way,    we,    wi,      woe,    woo,       view. 


vie, vote,  vow,   vu,        vail     vale    veil,  veal,    vile,      vowel. 


LESSOIV^  XL 

VOWEL   SOUXDS. 

1.  The  five  vowel  characters  in  the  shorthand  alphabet 
rejjresent  all  the  sounds  of  the  vowels.  Each  vowel 
character,  therefore,  re^jrescnts  both  a  long  and  a  short 
vowel.  Each  position,  also,  as  already  shown,  represents 
the  long  and  the  short  vom'cI  sound,  and  a  diphthong. 


44  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

2.  It  is  sometimes  desirable  to  indicate  precisely  which 
sound  of  the  vowel  is  expressed  in  writing  a  consonant  on 
position.  To  do  this,  a  dot,  or  horizontal  dash,  is  placed 
over  the  character  written  on  position  to  indicate  the  long 
vowel,  an  oblique  dash  al)0ve  for  the  Italian  a,  a  dot  under 
the  character  for  the  diphthong  sound,  and  the  character 
unmarked  indicates  the  short  vowel  sound.  It  is  neces- 
sary to  use  a  dash  or  two  dots  under  c  to  mark  a  fol- 
lowing diphthong,  that  it  may  not  be  confounded  with 
the  k  dot.  The  dot  and  dash  thus  employed  are  termed 
diacritical  marks. 

3.  If  you  write  fL  on  tlie  first  position,  it  expresses 
the  words  fail,  fall;  in  order  to  distinguish  these,  the 
dot  is  placed  over  it  for  fail,  the  dot  is  placed  under  it 
for  fall. 

If  you  write  fl  on  the  third  i30sition,  it  expresses 
fill,  file,  or  foil;  to  distinguish  these  words  the  dot  is 
placed  over  fl  to  give  it  the  long  sound,  making  the 
word  file;  unmarked,  it  is  fill;  and  a  dot  under  it 
makes  foil. 

4.  The  following  illustrations  will  fully  enable  you  to 
understand  the  sounds: 

VOWEL   SOUNDS    ILLUSTKATED. 


VOWEL. 

SHORT  SOUND. 

LONG  SOUND. 

DIPHTHONG. 

r  a 

at  sat 

ale  may  they 

awl    maul    paw 

J  i 

it  pin 

ice  tie  by- 

oil  voice  boy 

/     o 

on  not 

own  vote  no 

out  sound  now 

V     e 

end    met 

elate  seat  free 

ewe  neuter  few 

\    u 

u[)  but 

use  mule  sue 

ooze  took  coo 

5.    If 

you  pronounce  each  word  in 

the  above  table, 

dwelling 

on  the  sound  indicated  by  the  black  letter,  or 

VOWEL-POSITIONS.  45 

letters^    you    will    learn    to   distinguish    the    difference 
between  the  sounds  of  each  vowel. 

6.  The  words  in  the  table  show  that  the  short 
vowel  sounds  do  not  end  syllables,  but,  that  a  vowel 
ending  a  syllable,  unless  it  be  silent,  represents  a  long 
sound  or  a  diphthong.  Remembering  this  you  Avill 
readily  be  able  to  pronounce  words  of  one  syllable  end- 
ing vrith  a  vowel,  when  written  on  position,  giving 
the  vowel  not  the  short,  but  the  long,  or  the  diph- 
thong sound;  thus,  s  on  1st  position  is  not  sa,  but 
say  or  saw;  on  2d  position  it  is  see  or  sew;  on  3d 
position    it   is   sigh;  on  4th  position  it  is  so  or  sow. 

7.  The  short  vowel  always  takes  a  consonant  after 
it;  as,  in  at,  glad,  let,  send,  it,  this,  on,  not,  up, 
luck. 

8.  It  is  seldom  necessary  to  use  the  diacritical  dots, 
except  in  some  j^roper  names;  but  that  you  may  become 
familiar  Avith  them,  read  and  copy  the  following  illus- 
trations. Be  cftreful  to  write  words  of  the  2d  and  4th 
positions  close  to  the  line,  and  words  in  the  1st  and  5th 
points  but  little  further  from  it. 

ILLUSTRATION'S. 
Flay,         Haw,    lail.       fall,        fa,      fat,      fate,       mate,      mat, 

meet,      meat,       met,       knee,       knew,      fee,      few,      fill,     file. 


foil,     foal.      foul,       full,       fool,       gone,     gown,      bit,     bite. 


46  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND, 

boys,       buys,        by,      boy,     cap,      cape,      draw,     dray,     pay, 

-^^-C ^-t: X ^^^ '- '- 

paw,     pa,  neigh,     nap,     gnaw,       sit,       sight,    sill,    soil,     sun, 

soon,       sup,     soop,      take,     tack,     talk,      bake,      back,     balk, 

lane,    lawn,     lean,     lent,       bile,     bill,      boil,  far,       lair,     fare, 

^i:: :=^     "^^      >^:,     -^       -.o"       '    '       ^    "       ^' 

paper,    pauper,     throe,    threw,    don,    doAvn,    not,    note,      knot, 

no    know,    now,      mad,       made,      Maud,     sell,      seal,  Sewell, 
copse,     copes,       Saul,     sale,      sail,     cat,     caught. 

; : iL - 

9.  Carefully  write  the  following  easy  lesson  :  Make 
a  dot  on  the  line  for  the  word  I,  just  above  it  for  the, 
and  just  below  it  for  O  or  Oh  or  owe. 

WRITING    LESSON". 

Se  me  rit  this.  Will  you  try  to  red  this?  Let  me  her  yu  red. 
Yes,  yu  red  wel.  So  duz  yur  bruthr  Jon.  How  few  can  red  wel. 
I  ma  tak  them  with  me.  Giv  me  tim  to  do  this  wel,  wil  yu  not? 
Let  me  se  yu  try  to  rit  my  nam.  The  da  wil  soon  be  gon.  The  nit 
wil  soon  be  her.  I  wish  yu  wud  not  do  so,  why  wil  yu  not  stop? 
Do  yu  not  fel  lik  going  to-da?  Why  wil  yu  not  sta  til  nit?  Giv 
them  to  me.  Se  this  brit  boy,  how  cool  he  looks.  Sho  me  how  to 
do  this.  Wher  do  yu  liv?  Wil  yur  dog  bit?  My  fathr  was  too 
sic  to  go  to  mil  this  cold  da.     How  soon  ma  we  se  yu  with  yur  boy? 


REVIEW.  47 

This  wil  do  yu  no  good.  So  we  must  giv  them  to  yu,  mi;st  we?  Set 
the  lamp  by  this  book.  Wil  yu  giv  me  tira  to  do  this  work  wel? 
Tak  this  nif  to  cut  that  string.  Did  yu  by  this  book  for  me?  Wil 
the  fir  burn?  Run,  boy,  run  for  yur  lif.  Se  how  fast  he  duz  run. 
Wil  yu  not  lev  them  for  me,  tha  look  !ik  miu?  Do  yu  not  think  tha 
may  be  min  ?  How  fin  tha  look.  He  must  not  let  the  thre  dogs  go. 
Dogs  wil  bit  bad  boys,  so  yu  must  be  good.  Can  yu  pa  your  note 
now?  No,  not  now.  I  say  I  saw  the  se.  I  sed  I  will  seal  this 
book,  not  sell  it.  Has  he  sen  you  ?  No,  he  has  not  sen  me,  but  he 
has  sen  my  fathr.  Se  the  whit  sno  fal.  Get  yur  sled;  let's  hav  sum 
fun.  The  sno  duz  not  pac  wel  for  bals.  Wintr  wil  soon  be  her. 
Spring  wil  cum  latr.  Did  tha  go  hom  to-da?  No,  but  tha  went  hom 
last  nit.  Wil  he  be  her  then  ?  No,  he  can  not  get  her  by  that  tira. 
Plez  hand  me  that  new  book.  Thank  him  for  me,  wil  you  not. 
Send  that  boy  to  his  mothr.  Se  how  fast  yu  can  rit  this.  Do  not 
rit  to  fast;  yu  will  not  mak  the  words  wel.  Mac  them  with  grat 
car.  Can  yu  now  red  what  yu  hav  ritn?  Be  carfl  to  mac  yur 
carctrs  the  rit  lenth.  Yur  words  when  ritn  rit  wil  look  qit  wel. 
When  yu  mac  the  words  wel  tha  wil  be  plan  to  red.  Now  red  what 
yu  hav  ritn  with  so  much  car. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

What  is  Rule  1?  What  sounds  has  each  position?  For 
what  purpose  are  the  diacritical  marks  employed?  What 
indicates  the  short  sound?  What  indicates  the  long 
sound?  What  mark  indicates  the  diphthong  sound? 
What  care  must  be  taken  in  indicating  a  diphthong  after 
C?  What  sounds  has  a?  Vriiac  sounds  has  e?  What 
sounds  has  o?  What  sounds  has  i?  What  sounds  has  u? 
Do  short  vowels  end  syllables?  What  can  you  say  of  a 
syllable  ending  with  a  vowel?  What  always  follows  a 
short  vowel?  W^hat  advantage  can  you  derive  from  the 
above  considerations  in  reading  shorthand?  Can  you 
clearly  distinguish  the  different  sounds  of  each  vowel? 


48  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

LESSON  XII. 

EULE   2. 

1.     Consonant  -  positions,  —  Initial 

vowels    are    written     nearly    perpendicularly 
downwards  in  the 

1st    position    for   a   following       p  or  b 
2d  "  "  "  s  or  z 

—3d " " " m  or  n— 

4th  "  "  "  f  or  V 

5th  "  "  "  c,  k  or  g. 

Thus,  a  written  downward  in  the  1st  position  expresses 
ap  or  ab;  in  the  2d  as  or  az;  in  the  3d  am  or  an;  in 
the  4th  af  or  av;  in  the  5th  ac,  ak  or  ag. 

2.  Remark. — The  sound  of  qu  is  kw,  therefore  a 
on  the  5th  position  for  ac,  ak,  with  a  w  attached  to  it 
expresses  acw,  akw,  aqu;  e.g.,  acquainted  is  written 
by  placing  a  on  the  c  position  and  adding  wntd.  To 
write  equal,  place  e  on  c  position  and  add  to  it  "wl,  or 
the  "W  may  in  this  word  be  omitted,  writing  ecl. 

3.  Hemark, — The  sound  of  x  is  ks,  therefore  to 
write  ax,  place  a  on  5th  position  for  ac  and  add  to  it  s, 
making  acs^  or  ax;  for  ox  write  o  on  5th  position  for 
ok  and  add  s,  thus  making  oks  or  ox. 

4.  Remark, — A  thorough  mastery  of  these  conso- 
nant positions  is  absolutely  indispensable.  It  may  seem 
to  the  beginner  and  to  the  casual  observer  that  to  repre- 
sent both  consonants  and  vowels  by  the  same  position 
would  be  confusing  in  practice.  This,  however,  is  not  the 
case  in  any  degree,   because  a  consonant  written  on 


CONSONANT-POSITIONS. 


49 


position  always  takes  the  position- vowel  after  it,  and 
a  vowel  written  on  the  position  alwaj's  takes  the  posi- 
tion-consonant after  it.  Write  the  following  illustra- 
tive words,  being  careful  to  place  words  of  the  second  and 
fourth  positions  close  to  the  line. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Ap,    apt,    apl,    aprt,     appear  (apr),        apis,    as,       ask,  astr, 


/^     /      /"       / 


r 


^   r  ^  r 


an,   am,   ant,        ankr,     amn,  aftr,  avr,  afr,     avrt,      ac,    ago, 

■^'  >     '"  ^  f  ^  /   J    r  ^ 

agu,    agn,     ax,       axs,     opn,     on,  omn,  ov,     ovr,    ofr,     ok, 

I- 


■7^^^ 


<      ^       ^      ^  ■  -       /       /        /       / 

oks,   oksn,     okr,    is,     in,    if,     ic,     ease  (es),        evr,    and,      eg, 

I   ^    /'  ''  ^   j'  ^    ^    . 

egs,      equal  (ekwl  or  ekl),        up,     upr,     us,      uses  (uss),   unci, 

^     ^     ^     V V^ 

hope,     hopes,      hose,     hom,    hov,     happT  (omit }-),       has^_^,^v, 


hugs,  ^b^Vy,    haraer,       hemr. 


50 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 


LESSON  XIII. 

Rule  3. 

1.   Consonaat-posltioiis    contin- 

HCd, — Initial  vowels  a,  i  and  o  are  written 
very  slant  upwards,  and  e  and  u  very  slant 
downwards,  in  the 

1st    position  to  indicate  a  following      w 
2d  "  "  "  1 

_3d " _" " — r— 


4th 
5th 


"  "  "        t,  d  or  th 

"  "  "        ch,  j  or  h. 

Thus,  a  written  slant  upwards  in  the  2d.  i^osition  is 
al,  ale  or  all ;  in  tlio  3d  position  ar,  are,  air,  heir ; 
in  the  4th  position  at,  ad,  add;  in  the  5th  position 
ah,  aj-age. 

2.  Hernark. — It  will  help  the  student  in  pronoun- 
cing words  written  by  a  vowel  on  position,  to  remember 
that  the  voAvel  beginning  a  syllable  of  two  letters  is 
always  short. 

ILLUSTRATIO]SrS. 
Aw,       awa,  awr,       awk,    awrd,    al,       ala,     als,     aln,     aim, 


.^::1. 


ale,    aldr,      alv,     alo,    ar,     ara,    ars,      ardr,       aro,     aii,  area, 


-7'^ 7^ 

ard,       arsn,     argu,    at,   ad,      ad;?,    ado,  adl,    adr,      adrs,    aj, 


92-£V 


,^ 


ajs,   ah,     alid,      ahm,     ajut,      aha,    il,  ilns,     ils,     ir,      Irlnd, 


COKSONANT-POSITIOKS.  51 

Irsh,     irdin,  it,  its,      itiii,     ich,   iclis,       old,     oldr,     oldn,  ordr, 


^ 


"^     ^     -^         J^  ^ 
ordrs,  ot,       od,    olh,     othr,     othrs,      oh,       eb,       ebs,    ebd,   el, 


els,    Ella,      elk,     elin,    eldr,      elf,     er,    era,  em,  erst,     ermn, 


ertli,    error  (en-),   ers,     errs,     erl,    et,    ev,    ets,    evs,   eg,    egs, 


ej,     ejs,     ell,     ech,      us,    iil,       ulna,     urn,     urtli,    Ural,  urgnt, 


utr,    udr,      uthr.    uthrs,    uh. 


3.  Iteniavh* — Sometimes  a  character  or  characters 
written  on  position  express  more  than  one  word;  as,  o 
upward  on  4th.  position  writes  oat,  odd,  oath;  o 
downward  on  4th  position  writes  of,  off;  a  npward  oo 
4th  position  writes  at,  add ;  a  written  downward  on  3d 
position  is  a,  an,  am,  aim;  a  written  upward  on  3d 
position  is  are,  air,  heir.  Although  several  Aowels 
may  thus  be  represented  by  the  same  sign,  and  more 
than  one  word  written,  the  context  will  generally  help 
the  reader  to  determine,  "with  little  or  no  trouble,  the 
intended  Avord,  as  the  following  illustrations  will  show. 
Take  the  first  one:  It  is  very  odd;  it  would  not  be  read, 
It  is  very  oat,  nor.  It  is  very  oath,  although  the  words 
odd,  oat,  oath  are  written  alike.  A  few  woi-ds  in  the 
followiug  exercise  are  not  written  as  briefiy  as  they  will 
be  tiuallv,  when  more  rules  have  been  given. 


52  ECLECTIC    SHOETHAND. 

ILLUSTKATIONS. 
It  is  very  odd.  I  would  uot  give  an  oat  for  it.       Stand  up  and 


^7 
take  the  oath.  When  will  you  come  over  ?     I  made  hira  an  offer. 

^ -  --  "'^--V.^y  "       '  ''  y — 

What  are  you  at  P      I  ate  an  apple.  How  much  am  I     to    add  to 

'■^    V_  ^       ^  ^    ^ o__^    (^    ' ^     ^    / 

it?     In  an  hour.  In  a  minute.     I  am  sure.  Ami  sure?      What 

^n  J  f    ^,  .// ,  ...    ,  /^       •'   r  '  ^      '■ — ^ 

is  your  aim  ?    Her  name  is  Ann.     We  are  here.     The  air  is  cold. 

■"^^v     r      "     °  '^   f     "  -^.^    O "      '  ,^    '^^^,^' 

Let  us  have    some  fresh  air.  Give  him  an  apple.     I  am  not  able 

^  ^  f  ^ '^,--.^>  c  '  :    r^  ^ 

for  I  have  no  apple.    Give  each  one.      Do  not  go  near  the  edge. 


5.  The  following  are  all  the  words  which  the  vowels 
make  when  written  on  the  five  positions  withoiit  addi- 
tional letters:  Ape,  ab,  as,  an,  am,  a,  aim,  ache,  awe,  all, 
ale,  ail,  are,  air,  heir,  at,  add,  age  (aj),  ah,  is,  in,  if,  ill, 
ire,  it,  itch,  owes,  on,  own,  off,  of,  oak,  or,  oar,  ore,  odd, 
oat,  oath,  oh,  ebb,  ease,  eve,  eg,  ell,  eel,  ear,  ere,  eat, 
edge,  each,  eh,  up,  us,  use,  your  (ur),  ul  (you  will),  uv 
(you  have).  These  words  are  written  as  follows.  Write 
them  many  times;  they  are  an  excellent  exercise  in  writ- 
ing the  vowels  on  position.  Be  careful  to  write  words  on 
the  2d  and  4th  positions  close  to  the  line. 


COXSONAXT-POSITIONS.  53 

ILLUSTKATIOXS. 


/    f 


LESSOR  XIV. 

COMPLETE   POSITION-ALPHABET. 

1.  The  following  table  shows  the  entire  position- 
alphabet,  both  vowels  and  consonants,  the  use  of  which 
the  student  must  not  only  understand,  but  must  practice 
until  he  can  place  any  vowel  in  position  to  express  any 
consonant  and  any  consonant  in  position  to  express 
any  vowel,  without  hesitancy  or  error.  To  acquire  this 
proficiency  write  tlie  following  letters  as  here  arranged 
many  times  over: 

1  a  au  aw  p  b  w 

2  e  ucr  bw  s  z  sh  1 


3 i  01  oy m  n r 

4  o  ou  ow  f  V  t  d  th 

5  u  00  c  k  g  qu  X        ch  j  h 

2.  Write  the  two  following  exercises,  and  submit  tc 
your  teacher  for  correction.  When  you  can  write  them 
correctly,  rejDeat  them  until  very  familiar  with  them. 

WEITING   EXERCISE. 

Ma,  me,  my,  mo,  rau,  sa,  se,  si,  so,  su,  da,  de,  di,  do,  dii,  fu, 
fo,  fi,  fe,  fa,  ti,  te,  to,  ta,  tu,  ge,  go,  gi,  ga,  gu,  pu,  pa,  po,  pi, 
pe,  wa,  wo,  we,  wu,  wi,  ba,  be,  bo,  bii,  bi,  la,  li,  hi,  le,  lo,  tho, 
the,  thy,  thu,  tba,  va,  vu,  vi,  ve,  vo,  ca,  cu,  ci,  co,  ce,  ya,  ye,  yo, 


54  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

yu,  yi,  hu,  ho,  hi,  he,  ha,  ja,  jo,  je,  ji,  ju,  she,  sho,  shi,  sha, 
shu,  cha,  che,  chi,  cho,  chu,  ra,  re,  ri,  ro,  ru,  ab,  ap,  as,  az,  an. 
am,  af,  av,  ac,  ag,  acw,  acs,  op,  ob,  os,  oz,  cm,  on,  of,  ov,  oc,  og, 
ocw,  CCS,  aw,  al,  ar,  at,  ad,  ath,  ach,  aj,  ah,  oh,  ow,  ol,  or,  ot,  od, 
oth,  och,  oj,  oh,  ip,  ib,  is,  iz,  im,  in,  if,  iv,  ic,  ig,  icw,  ics,  il,  ir,  it, 
id,  ith,  ich,  ij,  ih,  ep,  eb,  es,  ez,  em,  en,  ef,  ev,  el,  eg,  ecw,  ecs,  ew, 
el,  er,  et,  ed,  eth,  ech,  ej,  eh,  up,  iib,  us,  uz,  um,  un,  uf,  uv,  uc,  ug, 
ul,  ur,  ut,  ud,  uth,  ueh,  uj,  uh. 

WRITING    EXERCISE. 

Is  it  not  odd?  It  is  very  odd.  If  it  is  all  up  it  is  time  to 
open  it.  Do  you  ask  if  we  are  all  on  time?  There  are  a  few  of 
them  on  hand  yet.  I  do  not  own  one  of  them.  Are  you  not 
afraid?  Will  all  of  you  go  away  (awa)?  Are  you  all  aware  (awr) 
of  its  force  (fors)?  What  is  its  age?  Ah,  indeed!  does  its  tooth 
ache  (ac)?  Go  ahead  (ahd)  I  am  after  you.  1  saw  it  on  the  edge 
(ej)  of  an  open  tank.  Did  you  only  see  it,  or  did  each  of  you  see  it? 
Each  one  of  us  both  saw  it  and  felt  it.  Every  one  of  us  were  there. 
If  it  is  ever  over.  I  now  aver  it  is  a  great  farce.  It  is  equal  to  one 
or  more  of  them.  Is  it  asleep  or  awake?  Will  it  eat  (et)  an  egg 
(eg)?  Are  you  often  there?  Is  there  no  one  equal  to  it?  It  is  all 
eaten  up.  I  am  aware  of  it,  and  it  ought  to  be  open.  It  is  very 
odd  (od)  if  it  is  true.     Is  it  now  time  to  feed  it  its  oats? 


LESSON  XV. 

EULE    4. 

1.  Writing  diphthongs  on  posi- 
tion,— To  write  words  beginning  with  a 
diphthong,  phxce  the  diphthong  in  the  position 
of  the  consonant  after  it. 

3.  Remat*k. — The  diphthongs  are  ahvays  written 
downward  because  they  are  heavy  characters;  they,  how- 
ever, begin  few  words  which  soon  become  legible  from 
familiarity  with  them. 


DIPHTHONGS  ON   POSITION. 


55 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 
Autm,      awfi,    aught,    ought,       auction,*        aubrn,     audt, 

auginnt,  augr,      augst,        awkrd,       aura,       ausps,       austere, 


L .   ^       C        (~^ 

authntc,  authr,    autcrt,       autmtc,  autpsy,t      autmnl,  auxlry.t 
out,         ouns,     our,      ours,      oursl,      oust,      out,     outr,    outst, 


^ 


-=^v^ 


outlt,        outgo,   outsl,       outwrk,    outdr,      outdo,      outcrp,   outft, 


outlaw,      outla,       outln,    outlp,      outlv,      outlc,       outcri,    outrj, 

7^   ^"   >s-  ^"  -<^'^'^'^'>^^ 

outrch,        outrt,     outrn,    outshn,     outwt,     outro,     outing,§   oil. 
oilng,    oils,    oild,    oilus,||  oint,    oints,   ointing,        ointmnt,  ewe, 

9 

em6j owor^   owry,  oolit7-o0.j.,    uuaj,    ooaing, oozd,    oogy> 

■»    ^  ^  ^  '  ''  '  ^   ^ 

3.  Itentark. — You  will  notice  that  in  all  the  fore- 
going illustrations  of  position-writing  the  characters 
written  on  the  2d  and  4th  positions  are  placerl  on  the 

♦  See  tion  tick,  Remark,  Lesson  XXII.    §  See  ing,  Lesson  XIX  (k). 
t  See  sy,  Lesson  XXIV.  II  See  ns,  Lesson  XIX. 

JSee  minute  y.  Lesson  XIX  (h). 


56  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

line,  and  that  those  on  the  1st  and  5th  positions  are  only 
a  little  farther  away  from  the  line.  This  is  important. 
You  will  be  inclined  to  write  too  far  above  and  below  the 
line,  while  it  is  evident  that  if  you  place  words  on  the  2d 
and  4th  jjositions  close  to  the  line,  those  which  are  writ- 
ten on  the  1st  and  5th  positions  need  not  be  far  from  it. 
4.  Meinavk. — The  few  words  beginning  with  two 
vowels,  both  of  which  have  a  distinct  sound  in  pronunci- 
ation; as,  iota,  Iowa,  are  begun  by  placing  a  dot  on  the 
position  of  the  first  vowel  and  attaching  to  it  the  second 
vowel  character,  thus  expressing  both  vowels. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Aerial,      iota,    Iowa,   aerolite,       aorta,        iambus,  oasis. 


EEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

What  is  Rule  2?  What  is  Rule  3?  What  vowels 
may  be  written  both  upwards  and  downwards?  What  are 
the  two  ways  of  writing  e  and  u  ?  What  consonants  are 
expressed  on  each  position  by  writing  a,  i,  o  downwards 
and  e  and  u  nearly  perpendicular?  What  consonants 
are  expressed  by  writing  a,  i,  o  upwards  and  e  and  u 
very  slanting?  CojDy  the  entire  position  alphabet,  both 
vowels  and  consonants,  until  you  are  thoroughly  familiar 
with  them.  How  are  the  diphthong  characters  written 
on  position?  In  case  a  character  2)laced  on  position 
expresses  more  than  one  word,  how  are  the  words  ex- 
pressed by  it  determined?  Are  you  perfect  in  the  prac- 
tical use  of  the  position-alphabet? 


COALESCEIfTS    0]S'  POSITION. 


57 


LESSON   XVI. 


KULE   5. 

1.  Writing  Coalescents  on  Posi- 
tion,— Write  all  characters  representing  co- 
alescent  consonants  on  position  to  express  a 
following  vowel;  thns  the  character  for  coales- 
cent  sp  is  written  on  the  3d  position  for  spy, 
the  minute  p  on  the  1st  position  for  play, 
straight  s  on  4th  position  for  slovr. 

JEte^navlc. — lu  the  following  illustrations,  each  short- 
hand equivalent  being  followed  by  its  word,  the  ruling  is 
omitted,  but  each  word  is  written  with  reference  to  posi- 
tion ;  and  to  help  you  to  determine  the  position  on  which 
it  is  written,  the  position  letter  of  each  word  is  in  full- 
faced  type;  thus,  in  the  word  bray  of  the  following 
illustrations  the  shaded  b  for  br  must  be  written  on  the 
a  position ;  in  order  to  indicate  this,  the  letter  a  is  full- 
faced  type;  in  bar,  b  must  be  written  on  the  a  position, 
and  a  is  full-faced.  You  will  therefore  write  all  words 
on  the  position  indicated  by  the  full-faced  letter  in  them. 

2.    iLLUSTKATioNS  OF  coALESCENT  r.     (See  p.  29.) 


58 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHASTD. 


crow 
core 
cruise 
curse 
dray 
dare 
dear 
diear 
droll 
doors 
droop 
during 
fray- 
far 
frame 
farm 
free 
fear 
fry- 
fire 
from 
form 
fruit 
furred 
gray 
gar 
grew 
geared 
grow 
gore 
grip 
gird 
pray 
par 


(3— 


•— ^ 


praise 
parse 

pry 

pyre 
prop 
pour 

prue 
pure 
prune 
purse 
tray 
tar 
trace 
tars 
tree 
tear 
trees 
tears 
try- 
tire 
tries 
tires 
tried 
tired 
train 
turn 
truck 
turk 
three 
there 
thrift 
thirst 
throw 
thrill 


thorn 
through 
thorough 
thrum 
Thursday 
shred 
shears 
shrew 
shear 
] 


C  spray 

G  v^^^      spar 
C  ysj^      spiy 
(i,      V     y  spire 
C.       S    S)  spree 
Q)  ^  spear 

>%-  S'?j  scrapes 
3-'     ^  ^  scars 
scre-w 
score 
stray 
star 
strays 
stars 
stre-w- 
stir 
strap 
starred 
stride 
stirred 
strode 
stored 
stroke 
stork 
strung 


-tr--' 


-tr-^ 


3.     ILLUSTRATIONS   OF   COALESCENT  1.       (See  p.    30.) 


Blow 

bowl 
blaze 
balls 


bless 
bells 
bliss 
bills 


block 
bulk 
bleed 
build 


COALESCENTS  ON   POSITION. 


59 


60  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

•~^  beagle  -t^  plus  ^    ^  solemn 

3  mangle  ^  pulls  ^ slum 

^         — >  single  <z. plaid  ^ ^  sluice 

i. — 5  tingle  '^ — '      palliil  <5  slash 

'■ 5  tangle  'Z- -        plead  ^o  slush 

^  play  -^ —      pealed  ^^  sleep 

•^  pail  -2- -        plod  -^  slip 

^  plea  ^ — '       polled  -^7  slope 

■^  peel  -'  slay  ^  sloop 

^  ply  ~- — ^==^      sail  ^  slat 

^  pile  '^ "     slays  '1*'  slit 

<^-  place  -— -cz — 'sails  ^  slot 

^  pails  .-^-^        sled  ^  slut 

'x  please  -- — 'S---  sealed  -^  slag 

^  peals  ' '       slide  ^^^  slug 

-?'  plies  '^-^^  soiled  --^  slily 

^  pills  /         '     slim  '-^  slowly 

ILLUSTRATION'S   OF   COALESCENT  S.      (See  p.  32.) 

Spy 


satan  '>^  scrape  .^__-^       silica 

steam  ^  screech 


COALESCENTS  OX  POSITION". 


61 


p' 


5.     ILLUSTRATIONS   OF   COALESCENT  W. 

.^_;^  Dwell 

^-e^  dowell 

^  dwelling 

v_5»- — "  dwarf 

s__p-^ dw  arls 

/~v  twice 

^-~^ — »  twit 

^-—y'''''^  tweak 

^~\-_^  tweed 

-— v__  between 

■^  twitch 

/— V — «  twitter 

,'->^.^tf>  twaddle 

,— N„^^"  thwack 


KEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 
How  is  r  coalescent  distinguished  from  r  uncoales- 
cent?     How  is  1  coalescent  distingtiished  from  1  uncoal- 
escent?    How  is  coalescent  w  represented?    What  letters 


62 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 


coalesce  with  r  ?  What'  letters  coalesce  with  1  ?  What 
letters  coalesce  with  "W  ?  What  letters  coalesce  with  s  ? 
What  is  the  difference  between  the  sign  for  sc  and  sq  ? 
How  are  si  initial  and  si  final  expressed?  How  is  the 
word  slowly  written?  How  is  si  written  before  t? 
How  is  sph  represented?     What  is  retracing  used  for? 


LESSON  XVII. 
Rule  6. 

1.   Lengthening  of  Characters,— 

(a)  Write  the  long  characters  and  p,  g,  an<l 
1   longer    to    express    a    following    m    or    n. 

(b)  Write  the  same  characters  still  longer  to 
express  a  following  mm,  mn,  nm,  or  nn. 

2.  Hemavk. — Do  not  widen  the  lengthened  p,  g, 
lest  they  be  confounded  with  the  enlarged  characters 
which  are  employed  to  add  t,  d.  The  1  is  lengthened 
to  add  m,  n,  by  drawing  it  in  an  extended  curve  across 
the  letter  to  which  it  is  attached,  the  size  of  the  loop  is 
not  changed  to  add  m,  n,  but  it  is  lengthened  to  add  t, 
d.     (See  Rule  7.) 

ILLUSTEATIONS. 

Man 

mam 

men 

mine 

moan 

moon 

— ■ mum 

sane 

"^ same 


ENLAEGING  SUKFACE  CHARACTEES. 


63 


pani 

pen 

pine 

penman 

pump 

prince 

gain 

game 

grain 

green 

ground 

engine 

engineer 

imagine 

fallen 

column 

solemn 

sullen 

melon 

million 

vellum 

premonish 

premonition 

premonitory 

gammon 

pennon 

permanent 

pi'ominent 

unooraraon 


Rule  7. 


3.  Enlarging  Surface  Charac^ 
ters. — (a)  Enlarge  a  surface  character  to 
express  a  following  t,  d,  or  th.  (b)  Make  it 
still  larger  to  add  tt,  td,  dd,  dt,  or  tth.     T 

or  d  is  added  to  st  by  lengthening  the  t.     The 
letter  t  final  is  lengthened  for  tt,  td. 


0     ECLECTIC   SHORTHAIfD. 


ILLUSTKATIOlSrS. 
(a) 
•^  Pat  O  heat  Q-— -^     retrieve 

^  pad  O  heath  O  retreat 

-^  path  O  hit  Q  retrace 


■^  pet  O  hide  ><-■     7    retract 

^  pedal  O  hid  C2— _.  retrench 

^  pit  O  hod  ^P^  ^had 

^  pied  O  hot  >^  shade 

/-^  pot  O  hut  JP  slied 

^  pod  O  hoot  ^  sheet 

'^  put  Q -^  rats  >/  shied 

^  pudding  ^^^ rates  ^  shot 

^  gate  Q ^  rots  ^  shod 

/^  '  gad  Q^^---  I'ods  JP  shut 

y.  goth  Q^__^  roads  (?  should 

Q,  get  Q ^  ruts  Q  rash 

(y  gxude  X^  sliort  O  rich 

ty  God  -^  sheared  O  rush 

C/  got  ^  shared  "(2?  '^hat 

C/  good  G  hard  Ns^  cheat 

(y  gut  O  harder  q/  what 

O  cheered  O  heard  q/  wheat 

^  chart  Q  herd  (y  wliite 

P  shirt  O  liired  o  who'd 

^  great  O  hoard  — -^  which 

Cy  grade  O  hurt  /  state 

C^  guard  ^  late  /  stayed 

CP  gaiter  ^<^=^~^  lath  /  stead 

6P  gather  U  let  /"  stewed 

C9  greater  ^  light  ;/  stowed 

C/  greet  <^  lot  -/  stood 

Cy  greed  ^  lute  ^  stud 

6/  gird  ^^=— ^  lad  /^  prate 

C^  girth  (^ '^ —  led  yy  part 

O  had  ^  ^=:>-^  lied  /^  pared 

C?  hat  ^  "^ —  load  ^  patter 

O  hate  (^^5'' — ^  ^'''^h  /^  prater 

O  hath  (2. —  retain  '-^  peered 

O  head  ^^J"  retake  /^  pitter 


;J^^ou^xtii>^ 


n 
n 

o 
o 
o 
o 
o 
u 
u 
u 
(y 
u 

% 
n 
n 
n 

n 


SHORTENING    SHORT   CHARACTERS. 


65 


port 
poured 
|)Orter 
Ijutter 

Hated 

hateth 

heated 

hearted 

hoarded 

guided 

guideth 

greeted 

greeteth 

guarded 

regarded 

regardeth 

patted 

petted 

pitted 

pitieth 

puttied 

parted 

parteth 

potted 


-y 

-^ 
:^ 

o 
o 


adapt 
adopt 
impute 
impaired 

(b) 

pitied 

chatted 

chatteth 

cheated 

cheateth 

chided 

sheeted 

shouted 

shouteth 

shrouded 

wished 

wisheth 

washed 

washeth 

cashed 

threshed 

mashed 

ditched 

reached 

rushed 


J-y  impart 

j^  import 

/q  logethet 

CJ-^  gathered 


notched 
churched 
whited 
stated 
studied 
strutted 
marred 
'  married 
goaded 
gutted 
grated 
graded 
gilded 
salted 
folded 
malted 
multitude 
wilted 
vaulted 
exalted 


LESSON  XVIII. 
Rule  8. 

1.  Shortening  Short  Characters. 

— (a)  Shorten  the  short  characters,  making 
them  half  their  length,  to  express  a  following 
t,  d,  or  th.  (b)  Make  them  minute,  mere 
ticks,  to  express  a  follow! no-  m  or  n, -a+KHvite»- 


66 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


RemaTh, — The  letters  t  and  s  having  the  form  of 
a  minute  o,  it  is  evident  that  the  o  character  cannot  be 
made  minute  for  on,  om. 

jRemark, — The  straight  t  and  s,  being  minute, 
cannot  be  shortened,  but  the  t  is  lengthened  for  tt,  td, 
and  s,  when  final  or  medial,  is  lengthened  for  ss,  ses, 
sis,  when  following  characters  with  which  the  minute  z 
for  ss  does  not  easily  unite,  as  f,  c,  m,  n. 

Hemark. — The  straight  t  is  always  used  at  the 
beginning  of  a  word,  and  the  curved  t  is  used  only  after 
a  downward  character  and  in  other  cases  where  the 
straight  t  would  not  unite  readily. 

Jiemarli, — Making  a  character  minute  causes  it  to 
express  only  one  thing,  which  may  be  either  of  those 
specified;  thus,  n  made  minute  may  be  nn,  nm,  nly, 
or  ning,  but  cannot  be  nmly.  To  write  nmly,  the  n 
should  be  made  minute,  and  the  minute  1  added  for  ly. 


\ 


"b 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

(a) 

fiat 

^ 

bother 

, 

did 

bad 

/.. 

obtain 



died 

bath      . 

^_ 

edged 

. , 

dot 

bet 

^ 

imbed 

. 

dod 

bed 

drubbed 

, 

dote 

bit 

f 

apt 

^ 

doth 

bid 

c- 

assayed 



duty 

brat 

/-^ 

allied 

— ^-— _ 

__  duds 

brad 

/^ 

allayed 

. 

nat 

batter 

,^ 

arrayed 

— 

neighed  (a) 

boat 

. 

date 

neat 

bought 

,_^ 

dad 

need 

both 

^_^ 

dead 

_^ 

neater 

but 

. , 

debt 

(o 

actor 

bud 

■^ 

death 

/ 

occurred 

boater 

^-P 

debtor 

4 

imbred 

SHORTENING   SHORT  CHARACTERS. 


67 


A 

obeyed 

r 

ant 

/ 

abroad 

^ 

under 

/^ 

art 

f 

aboard 

knead 

K 

east 

t 

assert 

— 

nit 

^ 

eased 

(> 

aster 

— 

night 

Vo 

easter 

i 

astir 

— 

knight 

Vt 

eastern 

( 

act 

— 

iiod 

N. 

effort 

( 

accord 

not 

\ 

nabbed 

/ 

accrued 



nut 

( 

and 

< 

agreed 

— 

nude 

K 

end 

/- 

aged  (j) 

.^— - 

that 

Vd 

enter 

> 

upward 

^^ 

threat 

f 

afraid 

{ 

abate 

^"O 

theater 

/ 

afford 

( 

abed 

thought 

i 

after 

^ 

await 

^-^ 

throat 

( 

about 

^VN 

interest 

, 

thud 

( 

afoot 

^y^ 

"^  without 

iJewiarA^.— The  word  not  in  the  foregoing  list  is 
written  with  t  instead  of  by  an  application  of  the  fore- 
going rule,  because  of  the  words  now,  no,  and  know, 
with  which,  unless  it  should  be  carefully  shortened,  it 

would  conflict. 

(b) 
^  din  "^ 


Ban 
ben 

bane 

been  (i) 

bean 

bone 

bun 

boon 

dan 

damn 

dame 

drain 

drawn 

den 

deem 

dream 


aine 

dim 

dime 

don 

down 

drone 

dun 

dum 

drum 

than 

then 

them 

thin 

thine 

thumb 


throne 

thrown 

thi-um 

nan 

name 

nine 

non 

known 

numb 

nun 

assent 

account 

amen 

upon 

even 

event 


68 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


^ 


again 

against 

maddening 

crumble 

sudden 

nibble 

humble 

tremble 

widen 

deaden 

maiden 

meted 

matted 

seated 

sated 

sighted 

suited 

sorted 

fitted 

fatted 

waited 

wanted 

counted 


threatening 

sweetening 

resting 

fruiting 

meeting 

seating 

counting 

heaven 

alone 

arm 

arms 

scented 

fainted 

counted 

feasted 

muttered 

catered 

watered 

centered 

cantered 

face 

faces 

force 


^ 


army 

atom 

atone 

iron 

irony 

item 

items 

attend 

around 

oven 

forces 

these 

thesis 

freeze 

freezes 

crease 

creases 

farce 

fares 

cares 

caresses 

farces 


Rule  9. 

3.  Di^ninlshing  Surface  Charac- 
ter s» — Write  gj  p,  h,  r,  sh,  ch,  and  vrhj 

i.e.^  all  the  surface  characters  except  1,  minute 
to  express  a  following  1.  They  are  also  made 
minute,  when  final,  to  add  1,  ly,  fl,  fly,  ing, 
ingly,  ling.  Write  1  minute  for  initial  fl  and 
for  final  fl,  fly,  ly,  ling,  and  lingly.         „ 


DIMIJSriSHING   SUEFACE   CHAEACTEKS. 


69 


EAXXONS^ 


usually 

useful 

badly 

baffle 

bodily 

daily 

deadly 

dreadful 

dumpling 

mindful 

sinful-ly 

awful-ly 

tinkling 

suckling 

careful 

bungling 

inkling 

youthful 

thrilling 

sadly 

kindly 

kindling 

meanly 

mainly 

manly 

singly 

singling 

difficult 

difficulty 

sickly 

thoughtful 


For  what  purpose  are  the  short  characters  shortened? 
How  long  are  they  made?  For  what  purpose  are  they 
made  minute?    Why  is  not  o  made  minute  for  the  same 


70 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


purpose?  What  is  said  of  straight  t  and  s?  When  is 
the  straight  t  nsed  and  when  the  curved  t?  Why  is 
not  the  word  not  represented  by  the  shortened  n?  How 
is  not  written?  What  is  Eule  9?  For  what  is  1  made 
minute?  What  do  the  minute  characters  add  when 
final?  For  what  are  the  long  characters  lengthened ?  For 
what  are  they  superlengthened?  What  surface  characters 
are  also  lengthened  and  superlengthened?  How  is  1 
lengthened  to  add  m,  n?  For  what  are  surface 
characters  enlarged?  What  distinction  is  made  between 
lengthened  and  enlarged  surface  characters?  Why  can- 
not the  long  characters  be  shortened?  Why  cannot 
short  characters  be  lengthened?  How  are  the  surface 
characters  modified?  Why  may  surface  characters  be 
enlarged,  superenlarged,  and  diminished,  while  linear 
characters  can  only  be  either  enlarged  or  diminished? 

Practice  the  following  exercise  until  you  can  preserve 
the  relative  sizes  when  written  rapidly. 

EXERCISE    ON"    RELATIVE   SIZES. 


WRITIIfG   CHARACTERS   IRREGULARLY.  71 

LESSON  XIX. 

EULE    10. 

Writing  Characters  Irregularly. 

— The  surface  characters  and  the  straight  t 
are  joined  irreguhirly  to  other  characters,  and 
the  y  and  z  characters  are  made  minute,  and 
the  oblique  characters  are  so  written  as  to 
express  other  following  letters. 

(a)  The  loop  is  written  on  the  irregidar  side  of  other 
characters  for  sd  and  st,  also  making  sed,  sit,  set,  etc., 
and  is  shaded  for  r,  thus  making  ster,  sder,  etc. ;  it  is 
made  minute  for  ds  and  ts,  also  making  das,  des,  tice, 
etc. ;  is  lengthened  to  add  t  or  d,  making  std,  stt,  sdd, 
sted,  sided,  etc.,  and  shaded  to  add  r,  making  strd, 
sdrd,  as  in  mastered,  considered.  The  minute  loop 
is  also  shaded  to  add  r,  making  rds,  rts.  Both  the  full 
and  the  minute  loop  are  written  detached,  horizontally, 
for  sd  and  ds  and  the  included  vowel,  the  full-sized  loop 
making  sad,  said,  seed,  side,  sowed,  sod,  sued, 
and  the  minute  loop  making  days,  dues,  dews,  dies, 
dice,  dose,  does,  doze. 

(b)  The  circle  is  written  on  the  irregular  side  of  char- 
acters, medial  or  final,  for  pr,  br,  is  diminished  to  add 
1,  is  enlarged  to  add  t  or  d,  and  is  shaded  to  add  r,  as  in 
superior  (suprr). 

(c)  The  t  is  written  after  short  andsiij:fe(5e  char- 
acters forst7'i54«*igthenedJiiJ^  making  std, 
The  vertical  t.J»---1:ir^ly7^5fl,-.^j4_tal  tally,  trifle, 
still ;  lengthened  for  t,  d,  as  told/trailBdrStyled. 


72  ECLECTIC    SHOKTHA]S"D. 

RemarU. — T  after  short  characters  is  expressed  by 
shortening  them,  and  after  surface  characters  by  en- 
larging them;  therefore,  the  t  may  be  used  safely  after 
these  characters  for  st;  but  after  long  letters,  after  short- 
ened short  letters,  and  after  enlarged  or  diminished  sur- 
face characters  t  cannot  be  used  for  st,  because  it  is  often 
necessary  to  use  the  character  in  these  connections  for  t, 
as  in  imminent,  plate,  glut,  fleet,  netted. 

(d)  Sp  when  medial  or  final  is  represented  by  an 
angularly  joined  p.  When  the  sp  follows  a  character 
which  is  written  downward,  the  first  part  of  the  p  is 
lengthened  to  exjoress  the  straight  s,  thus  making  the  sp, 
as  in  the  following  words,  viz. :  inspires,  overspread, 
unsparing,  prospers,  perspires. 

(e)  P  is  written  inclined  backward  for  pp,  pb,  and 
g  is  written  similarly  for  gg,  gj.  Both  are  made  minute 
to  add  1,  enlarged  to  add  t  or  d,  lengthened  to  add  m, 
n ;  and  shaded  to  express  an  included  r,  as  in  prop, 
porp,  prep,  purps  (purpose),  praps  (perhaps), 
grog,  gangrene. 

(f)  Any  character  except  the  circle  is  retraced  to  add 
f  or  V;  the  retracing  is  lengthened  to  add  t  or  d,  and 
shortened  to  add  1,  as  iu  saved,  several. 

(g)  Write  Z  very  minute  for  ss  with  the  included 
vowel,  making  ses,  sis,  etc.  When  the  minute  z  does 
not  attach  well,  as  after  c,  f,  m,  n,  the  s  tick  may  be 
lengthened  for  ss,  ses,  sis,  ces,  etc. 

(h)  Write  y  very  minute  for  final  y  having  the  sound 
of  short  i,  as  in  many,  any,  and  minute  n  for  mn. 

(i)  The  combinations  pcli,  psh,  with  the  included 
vowel,  as  in  peach,  pitch,  push,  are  represented  by  a 


WKITIXG   CHAEACTEKS   IKREGULAKLY.  73 

horizontal  p  similar  to  the  character  for  sp,  differing  from 
it  by  being  united  angularly  to  the  following  character, 
while  sp  unites  with  a  following  character  without  form- 
ing an  angle.  The  character  for  pch  is  only  used  at  the 
beginning  of  a  word,  and  is  written  on  position  for  the 
included  vowel,  as  in  patches.  In  such  words  as  im- 
peaches, approach,  approaches,  the  prefixes  im, 
ap  are  omitted. 

Meniark, — When  sp  and  pch  are  used  without  a 
following  consonant  on  the  3d  and  5th  positions,  they 
make  the  Avords  spy,  pitch,  spue  and  push,  but  the 
signification  of  these  words  and  the  context  in  whicli  they 
occur  are  so  unlike  that  there  can  be  no  practical  diffi- 
culty in  distinguishing  tlieni. 

(j)  Ns,  ms,  when  final  or  medial  are  expressed  by  a 
horizontal  semi-ellipse,  opening  to  the  right  and  joined 
angularly  to  the  j^receding  character,  to  express  the  ter- 
minations ance,  ence,  ense,  etc.  This  character  is 
enlarged  to  express  t  or  d  occurring  between  the  n  and 
s,  thus  making  nds,  nts;  is  diminished  for  1,  making 
nsl,  ncl;  is  written  on  the  ujDper  side  of  another  char- 
acter to  exj)ress  a  following  s,  thus  making  nces,  uses, 
and  is  shaded  for  r,  making  nsr,  nkr,  ntrs,  ndrs, 
as  in  censor,  centers,  canceller. 

For  ms  initial  write  a  minute  hook  like  the  sk  hook 
on  the  vowel  position,  and  attach  the  following  character 
angularly;  as,  in  mistake,  write  the  hook  on  1  position 
for  mis  and  add  the  tk;  for  mast  write  it  on  a 
position.     Sk  is  made  minute  for  a  following  1. 

(k)  A  dot  is  used  on  the  3d  position  for  I,  eye,  aye; 
on  the  2d  position  for  the,  thee ;  on  4th  position  for  O, 


74  ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 

oh,  owe.  The  dot  is  used  near  the  end  of  the  word  for 
ng,  mg  and  the  word  thing,  also  ingly,  ingness, 
inger,  inging.  Ings  is  represented  hy  s  tick,  written 
in  the  place  of  the  dot,  thus  indicating  the  plural. 

Remark. — The  dot  might  be  written  on  the  1st 
position  for  the  word  a,  an,  but  it  is  liable  in  rapid 
writing  to  be  confounded  with  the  dot  for  the,  therefore 
the  word  an  is  also  used  for  a,  no  ambiguity  resulting 
therefrom,  since  the  letter  following  it  always  indicates 
which  of  the  two  is  intended,  the  following  consonant 
making  it  a,  and  a  vowel  following  making  it  an, 

(1)  AYrite  forward  obliques  downwards,  and  backward 
obliques  nearly  upright  to  express  a  following  s,  Z  or  sh. 

Remark. — Inasmuch  as  q  is  always  written  down- 
wards, initial  c  is  not  written  downwards,  but  c  medial 
or  final  may  be,  as  in  because,  takes,  makes, 
thanksgiving.  This  rule  (1)  does  not  apply  to  initial 
vowels,  which  according  to  Rule  2,  are  written  on  2d  posi- 
tion to  express  a  following  s,  but  it  applies  to  vowels  when 
they  occur  in  the  midst  or  at  the  end  of  .words;  as  in 
abase,  erase,  arose,  in  which  case  they  are  written 
downwards  to  express  a  following  s.  They  may  be  also 
shortened  for  an  added  t,  d,  as  in  abused,  induced;  or 
made  minute  for  a  followiiig  m,  n,  making  ism,  as  in 
sciolism,  patriotism,  pantheism,  etc. 

(m)  B  final  is  sometimes  represented  by  p  hook,  and 
0,  k  final  by  g  hook,  especially  if  followed  by  t,  d  or  1 
coalescent,  as  in  the  words  make,  fact,  sickle,  fickle. 

(n)  Because  of  the  difficulty  which  some  exjierience  in 
shading  the  c  character  for  cr  initial,  a  hook  is  used 
when  it  can  be  conveniently  turned  on  the  under  side  of  a 


WRITIXG    CHARACTERS    IRREGULARLY. 


75 


.-^ 


follovang  cliaracter,  written  large  enougli  to  distinguish 
it  from  the  cl  hook.  Before  surface  characters  and 
t  it  is  better  to  use  the  shaded  c,  as  in  the  Avords  crape, 
creep,  crag,  crash,  crouch,  crawl,  crate. 

(o)  After  w,  npward  o,  and  other  characters  with 
which  th  does  not  unite  easily,  use  d  for  th,  and  for  the 
word  the;  also  make  it  minute  for  then,  them,  as  in 
the  phrases  with  them,  one  of  them. 


Cast 

caused 

cost 

caressed 

castor 

waste 

waist 

wasted 

w^st 

western 

vast 

vest 

vested 

vised 

seized 

ceased 

sized 

soused 

fast 

fasted 

frost 

frosted 

foster 

fostered 

fester 

must 

mast 


76 


ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAXD. 


fiU^ 


beads 

buds 

breeds 

broods 

braids 

deeds 

cuds 

needs 

Express 

export 

expert 

exported 

neighbor  (a) 

neighborhood 


^^ 


Inspire 
trespass 
unspariiif 
crisp 

Pap 

pipe 

pope 

pup 

paper 

pepper 

piper 

popper 

l)rops 

people 


nods 
nodes 
threads 
bards 
bends 
Ijinds 
bounds 
days 
(b) 
neighborly 
iiumljer 
numbei's 
number 
saber 
sober 


O 
O 

o 


cuspidore 
prosper 
perspire 
lisjos 

gage 

gouge 

grudge 

gangrene 

gurgle 

giggle 

engage 

engaged 

begrudge 

luggage 


WRITING   CHABACTERS   IRREGULARLY. 


77 


^ 


\ 

C 
C 

c 

G 

c 

G 
C 
G> 
C 

Co 


Save 

saved 

wave 

waves 

waver 

wavered 

cove 

cover 

Size 

siss 

seas 

saws 

seize 

sows 

sues 

passes 

Many 

■  sunny 
glory 
honey 

Patch 

parch 

preach 

preacher 

pitch 

pitcher 

poach 

poacher 

push 

pusher 

Dense 
dance 
dunce 
fins 


(f) 
covered 
caved 
cavil 
devil 
se  veral 
novel 
bevel 
weevil 

(g) 
pieces 
poses 
pussies 
praises 
ceases 
sizes 
thesis 
scissors 

(h) 
greasy 
lowery 
petty 
dressy 

(i) 
patched 
patches 
patching 
preached 
pieaches 
preacher- 
pitched 
pitches 
pitchers 
pitching 

(i) 

fence 
fines 
foams 
sense 


never 
sever 
favor 
tever 
server 
" — * — ^  deceiver 
'^ — Y'     preserver 
o' — Y^     persevere 


C. 

c 


determine 
inhuman 
implement 
supplement 

approach 
approached 
approaches 
approach- 
able 
piished 
pushes 
pushing 
impeach 
i  mpeaches 


78 


ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 


/^ 


^ 


I 


suras 

means 

mince 

moans 

moons 

bans 

beans 

bones 

bins 

boons 

booms 

brains 

crams 

crimes 

crumbs 

di-ains 

dreams 

drones 

drums 

tans 

inistak{i 

mask 

misstate 

mosses 

massive 

misinfer 

musket 

The 
I 

eyes 
eyeing 
0,  Oh,  owe 

owing 

Was 
wise 
woes 
wars 


r 


\ 


tames 

times 

terms 

tones 

tuns 

tunes 

pains 

pans 

pins 

pines 

puns 

prunes 

immense 

intense 

immense- 

ness 
intense- 

ne-'s 
faints 
saints 

misplace 

muses 

massacre 

miscarry 

misnomer 

misconnt 

moslem 

(k) 
knowing- 
aiding 
things 
brings 
knowingly 
feelingly 

(1) 
wires 
worse 
waste 
west 


^-C 


■i 


sends 

sounds 

taunts 

daunts 

winds 

binds 

bounds 

bends 

tinsel 

pencil 

utensil 

senses 

dances 

fences 

bounces 

evince 

evinces 

events 

evinced 

senseless 

mislead 

niissent 

l\re3srs 

misprint 

misuse 

mistakes 

misi'ule 


!owmg 


singmg 
singer 
nothing- 
ness 
nothing 

wisdom 
wisely 
vase 
vies 


EEVIEW. 


79 


I 

\ 

V 


voice 

views 

vows 

varies 

viz 

vast 

visit 

virus 

base 

bees 

boys 

bows 

buss 

basket 

brisket 

Sack 

sick 

suck 

suckle 

nack 

knock 

knocked 

Cram 

crane 

crease 

cries 

creed 

crock 


brush 
yes 
years 
yes  sir 
yours 
exist 
exhausts 
abase 
abyss 
assess 
assays 
asses 
amass 
amiss 
am.use 
(m) 
fact 
factor 
in  fact 
fickle 
cable 
fable 
nipple 

(n) 
crack 
creek 
crave 
create 
creation 
cross 


^ 
-^ 

^ 


L 


t 


avast 

agrees 

allays 

aloes 

allies 

arrays 

arise 

arrows 

arose 

abuse 

idea 

ideas 

it  is 

erase 

erases 

nibble 

bramble 

quake 

quick 

quickly 

asks 

amiable 


creep 
crops 
crash 
crush 
crag 
y^  crate 


REVIEW   QUESTIONS. 


What  do  the  loop  and  the  minute  loop  whcu  written 
on  the  irregular  side  of  other  characters  represent?  For 
what  are  they  written  disconnectedly?  For  what  is  the 
circle  written  on  the  irregular  side  of  other  characters 
final  or  medial?    For  what  is  t  used  following  short  and 


80  ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 

surface  characters?  Why  may  not  t  be  used  for  st 
after  shortened  and  diminished  characters?  How  is  st 
medial  and  final  represented?  For  what  are  p  and  g 
inclined  backwards?  What  use  is  made  of  retracing? 
How  may  retracing  be  modified,  and  for  what?  What 
use  is  made  of  minute  z  ?  When  is  the  lengthened  s 
tick  to  be  preferred?  For  what  is  it  used?  For  what  is 
the  minute  y  used?  How  is  the  combination  pch, 
psh  with  the  included  vowel. expressed?  How  are  ns, 
ms,  exjDressed  when  medial  and  final  ?  What  modifications 
are  made  of  this  character?  How  is  ms  initial  repre- 
sented? For  what  purposes  is  the  dot  used?  What 
letters  are  written  downwards  for  a  following  s?  What 
is  said  of  c  and  q  in  this  connection?  What  of  initial 
vowels?  What  is  said  of  the  use  of  p  for  b,  and  g  for 
c,  k?  Explain  the  cr  hook.  Will  not  this  long  lesson 
require  considerable  study? 


LESSON  XX. 
Rule  11. 

1.  Writing  Initial  JET, — (a)  When 
initial  h  is  followed  by  a  vowel  which  is  to  be 
written  downward  to  express  the  consonant 
following  it,  write  the  vowel  on  the  position  of 
the  following  consonant,  shading  the  upper 
part  of  the  vowel  character,  reading  first  the 
h,  then  the  vowel,  and  last  the  position  conso- 
nant. 


WRITING   INITIAL  H. 


81 


2.  (b)  When  initial  h,  with  the  following 
vowel  or  diphthong,  makes  a  word ;  as,  he, 
how,  or  if  r  follows;  as,  her,  higher  (hir), 
or  when  it  is  followed  by  a  vowel  to  be  written 
upward ;  as,  hat,  hide,  hall,  hole,  use  the  h. 


ILLUSTRATIONS, 
(a) 
homes 


82 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


^, 

hedge 

O 

he 

<^ 

hodge 

o 

hew 

o 

hay 

c 

hies 

o 

haw 

o 

high 

/ 

o 
o 


hoe 
him 

who  (hu) 
hue 


LESSON  XXI. 


EEVIEW    OF   HOOKS   AND    CIRCLES. 

1.    The  Initial  Hooks. — These  are  p,  g,  pch, 
sc,  sq,  sp,  cl,  cr,  ms.     The  p,  g,  sc,  sq,  pch  and 

ms  are  joined  angularly  to  most  following  characters,  and 
sp,  cl,  and  cr  are  joined  to  following  characters  without 
an  angle.  P  and  g  are  joined  to  each  other  and  to  r 
and  1  without  an  ano-le. 


Pass 

gas 

skies 

squeeze 

misses 

pack 

gav/k 

skoke 

squeak 

mosque 

pave 

gave 

peg 

gap 

gall 

pail 

gear 

peer 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

squalled 

pulled 

scab 

squib 

misbelieve 

mistake 

mustaches 

mischance 

)iiisprove 

span 

claim 

crara 

space 

class 

cross 

spade 

clod 

clad 


C    \_     cried 
6^^__      speak 
C     —      click 
O  creak 

(y^'^  spoke 
^  clock 
O  croak 

L  creator 

Cq  splash 

rO      ^^  clash 
C^/^crash 
C^/^^  crush 
creep 
crop 
crag 
cram  p 
cringe 
crimp 


C 


2.   Final  Hooks. — The  final  hooks  are  p,  g,  ns, 
ms,  sp,  and  sc.     The  p  and  g  are,  when  more  easy  to 


THE    INITIAL   HOOKS. 


83 


write,  used  for  their  cognates  b  and  c,  especially  when 
followed  by  1,  making  bl  and  cl,  also  pi  for  bl. 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 

sag 

sage 

cap 

cable 

fable 

fagged 

fact 

fickle 

keep 

keg 

cope 

cog 

cup 

cudgel 

kept 

caged 

wept 

wedged 

wipe 

basked 

basket 

bonds 

bi'usk 

binds 

brisk 

tans 

task 

tins 

phthisic 

tunes 

tusk 

fines 

frisk 

cans 

cask 


J, 


wig 

vapid 

vague 

viper 

vigor 

caper 

wager 

lap 

las: 


84 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAXD. 


prosecute 

pints 

points 

piscatorial 

grounds 

grotesque 


^ 


t 


whines 

whisk 

wliisker 

whisper 

immense 

almost 


inspire 

inscribe 

lines 

lisp 

despise 

despair 


3.  The  T  Jif  and  I. — The  distinction  between  h 
and  circle  r  is  the  method  of  joining  them  to  other  char- 
acters, the  h  joining  with  other  characters  in  an  angle, 
and  th,e  r  joining  in  a  continued  line.  The  r  and  1  are 
always  joined  to  the  regular  side  of  other  characters. 

4.  The  ref/iilar  side  of  curves  is  the  inner  or 
concave  side.  The  upper  side  is  the  regular  side  begin- 
ning straight  lines,  and  the  under  side  is  the  regular 
side  ending  them. 

5.  The  circle  is  joined  continuously  to  the  irregular 
side  of  other  characters,  when  initial  for  re,  and  when 
medial  or  final  for  pr,  br.  The  loop  is  written  on  the 
irregular  side  of  other  characters  for  sd,  St,  and  ds,  ts. 
The  enlarged  circle  is  joined  continuously  on  the  regular 
side  of  other  characters  for  sh,  cb,  and  joined  irregularly 
for  hd,  writing  had. 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 


remark 

remorse 

reverse 

rivers 

rover 

robber 

robert 

reviser 

rix 

exercise 

exhort 


exert 

express 

expert 

export 

nabor 

number 

numbers 

numbered 

numberless 

remember 

local 


EEVIEW. 


85 


liar 
lures 


■^ 


REVIEW    ILLUSTEATIONS. 


± ^ 


-f — -^r--    li'^^^ 


i^r 


KEY. 

Put  a  spoon  in  the  flask.  The  fleet-footed  skaters  of  the  skating 
.3lub.  We  prize  the  flag,  the  glorious  stars  and  stripes;  fling  it  to 
the  breeze ;  let  it  float  over  land  and  sea,  in  every  clime  the  beauti- 
ful emblem  of  freedom.  Flying  before  the  screaming,  swirling, 
plunging,  awful  flood,  crossing  himself,  rode  the  strange  horseman, 
flingmg  his  arms  wildly,  crying,  "  Fly,  fly,  to  the  hills  for  your  lives; 
the  flood!  the  flood!  the  flood!"    There  is  no  mistaking  the  florid 


86  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

color  of  that  mustache.  I  do  not  misrepresent  him;  there  is  mis- 
chief in  his  eye,  I  am  sure.  You  will  find  what  you  seek  near  the 
top  of  the  map.  lie  took  the  dog  by  the  nape  of  the  neck,  and 
threw  him  back  on  the  deck,  or  he  would  have  plunged  into  the 
deep  water.  I  remember  how  he  expressed  himself  a  number  of 
times  about  his  neiglibor,  nor  will  I  forget  how  his  neighbor  refused 
his  kind  offers. 

EEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

What  are  the  initial  hooks?  How  is  each  joined  to 
following  characters?  What  is  the  difference  between  sc 
and  sq,  between  cl  and  cr?  What  are  the  final  hooks? 
Which  way  does  g  turn?  For  what  else  is  g  used?  On 
which  side  of  preceding  character  does  final  p  turn? 
Which  is  the  regular  side  of  curves?  Which  of  straight 
lines?  On  which  side  of  characters  are  r  and  1  turned? 
When  written  on  the  irregular  side  what  does  r  represent? 
What  does  1  on  the  irregular  side  represent?  What  does 
minute  1  represent  when  written  on  the  irregular  side? 


CHAPTER  V. 


LESSON   XXII. 

ABBEEVIATIOX   BY   SUFFIXES. 

1.  A  suffix  is  a  letter  or  letters,  a  s^dlable  or  syllables, 
appended  to  the  end  of  a  word  to  vary  or  modify  its 
signification;  thus,  imprison  means  to  confine  in  some 
place;  add  ment  and  it  becomes  imprisonment;  which 
denotes  the  act  of  confining  in  some  place.  Flex  means 
to  bend;  add  to  it  ible  and  it  becomes  flexible,  which 
means  may  be  bent.  Such  terminations  as  ment  and 
ible,  in  the  above  examples,  are  called  suffixes. 

2.  The  suffixes  and  terminations  of  words  in  the 
English  language  are  quite  numerous,  and  for  purposes 
of  stenograj^hy  may  be  naturally  grouped  together  in 
classes  of  similar  formation. 

3.  Suffixes  are  simple  and  compound;  ful  and  ly  are 
simple  suffixes,  and  wlien  united  form  a  compound  suffix, 
fully,  of  which  ful  (written  fl),  may  be  called  the  stem 
of  this  compound  suffix  and  its  class  ful,  fully,  ful- 
ness. The  stem  of  the  suffix  is  used  in  shorthand  to 
represent  any  one  of  the  class. 

4.  The  stems  of  the  following  two  classes  are  fy 
and  sate  (written  st),  fy,  fies,  fled,  fying,  fier, 
sate,  sated,  sates,  sating,  sator,  sative,  cation; 
fy  and  st  being  the  stems  are  the  shorthand  signs  of 
these  two  classes  of  suffixes. 

87 


88  ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 

5.  The  compound  suffixes  being  but  modifications  of 
the  stem  made  to  indicate  some  added  idea  of  time^, 
mode,  person  or  condition  than  that  which  is  indicated 
by  the  stem  alone,  and  thus  used  to  harmonize  the 
word  with  the  sentence  of  which  it  forms  part,  the  last 
part  of  tlie  suffixes  may  be  omitted  in  shorthand,  for, 
the  stem  being  written  and  the  suffix  thus  suggested,  the 
context  will  indicate  the  proper  entire  termination. 

6.  To  illustrate,  take  the  following  sentences:  Is  he 
a  reliable  man?  We  are  reliably  informed  that  he  is 
a  man  of  sterling  reliability.  Write  these  words  by 
the  use  of  the  stem  of  the  prefix  only,  and  they  are:  Is 
he  a  reliabl  man?  I  am  reliabl  informed  that  he 
is  a  man  of  sterling  reliabl.  This  abbreviated  writing 
the  stenographer  would  transcribe  readily  and  correctly. 

EULE  12. 

7.  Terminations,  —  Write  only  the 
stem  of  moditiecl  terminations,  omitting  the 
modifying  final  syllables. 

(a)  If  the  termination  has  an  unaccented  or 
unimportant  vowel,  it  is  represented  by  the  character 
expressing  its  consonant  sounds,  and  is  always 
attached  to  the  preceding  letter:  care-ful,  carfl; 
sim-ple,  simpl;  nim-ble,  nimbi;  ami-able,  ambl; 
loose-ness,  loosns;  voy-age,  voyj;  ad-age,  adj; 
mo-tive,  motv;  miss-ive,  missv;  mono-gram, 
mongrm;  dia-gram,  digrm. 

(b)  If  the  termination  contains  an  accented  vowel, 
the  initial  letter  is   written    disconnectedly   under  the 


TERMINATIONS.  89 

preceding  character,  except  in  the  case  of  phirals,  when 
it  is  written  over  it. 

(c)  There  are  a  few  terminations  which  seem  to 
require  a  special  writing  and  their  stem  is  therefore  writ- 
ten across  the  preceding  character. 

8.  If  suffixes  begin  with  coalescents  they  must  be 
written;  as  gr  for  grate;  if  it  contains  other  consonants 
these  also  must  be  written;  as  frc  for  fraction.  A 
stem  thus  written  indicates  any  one  of  the  terminations 
of  its  class,  the  reader  relying  on  the  context  to  determine 
which  one. 

9.  To  write  a  stem  it  is  only  necessary  to  express  its 
principal  sounds;  as  fl  for  fly,  ful;  nd  for  and,  end, 
ind,  ined,  igned,  und,  ound;  nt  for  ant,  ent,  int; 
st  for  ast,  est,  ist,  ost,  ust;  ft  for  eft,  ift;  drd  for 
dred,  dered,  dured;  try  for  tary,  tory,  tery, 
terry,  tury ;  fr  for  for,  fore ;  bl  for  ble,  able, 
eeble,  ible,  oble,  uble;  mnt  for  ment,  mont, 
mount ;  snt  for  sent,  sont,  sant;  vnt  for  vent, 
vant ;  tnt  for  tant,  tent ;  sn  for  sien,  son,  soon ; 
grs  for  gress,  gars,  gers. 

10.  The  three  following  lists  of  terminations  (a),  (b), 
(c),  are  each  followed  by  illustrations  of  the  method  of 
writing  words  embracing  the  terminations. 

11.  You  must  thoroughly  practice  these  illustrations, 
writing  each  illustrated  outline  for  each  different  word 
which  it  represents,  pronouncing  the  word  as  you  write 
it;  thus,  the  first  illustrated  word  after  list  (b)  is  addi- 
tion, the  outlines  for  which  also  represent  the  various 
forms  which  this  word  takes, — addition,  additions, 
additional,   additionally.    Write  the  outline  addi- 


90  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

tion  four  times,  pronouncing  the  different  words  which 
it  expresses,  as  you  write  them. 

12.  When  you  liave  written  througli  these  illustra- 
tions in  the  manner  indicated,  write  the  illustrative 
words  which  are  included  in  parentheses  in  each  list, 
writing  each  outline  for  the  several  words  which  it 
represents  and  jironouncing  each  as  you  write  it.  By 
thoroughly  pursuing  this  course  you  will  acquire  a  prac- 
tical use  of  the  method  of  suffix  representation. 

13.  Each  class  of  terminations  in  list  (a)  is  to  be 
represented  by  its  stem  written  connected  with  the  pre- 
ceding character. 

(a). — LIST    OF     STEM    SIGJfS    AND    CLASSIFIED    TERMINA- 
TIONS   AVRITTEN    CONNECTEDLY. 

STEM  SIGNS.  TERMINATIONS. 

j  (angular  g) — age,  aged,  ages,  aging,  (adage,  voyage). 

a  (downward  minute) — asm,  asma,  (miasm,  cataplasm,  pleonasm). 

bl— ble,  bly,  bleuess,  bling,  (feeble,  humble). 

bl— able,  ible,  ceble,  oble,  uble,  ably,  &c.,  (movable,  payable,  legi- 
ble, eligible,  enfeeble,  ignoble,  soluble,  affable). 

c — ic,  ac,  (domestic,  romantic,  pneumatic,  demoniac,  bivouac). 

cl — cal,  cally,  calless,  cality,  cle,  (physical,  radical,  versicle,  icicle, 
practical). 

d — ed,  edly,  edness,  (professed,  seized,  caused,  depressed). 

d  (minute) — dy,  ding,  den,  dened,   dening,  dom,   (lady,  kingdom, 
random,  thraldom). 
n — en,  ened,  ens,  ening,  ain,  (thicken,  weaken,  bargain). 

fc — fie,  (terrific,  somnific,  calorific). 

frs — ferous,  (floriferous,  melliferous,  bacciferous,  caloriferous). 

fl — ful,  fully,  fulness,  (armful,  peaceful,  handful,  harmful). 

ft— fit,  feit,  (profit,  forfeit,  surfeit). 

f  —  fied,  fying,  fication,  ficate,  fies,  (certify,  modify,  testify). 

gl — gle,  gly,  gling,  (mingle,-  single,  legal). 

hid — hood,  (manhood,  boyhood,  girlhood). 

1 — ile,  ilely,  (servile,  puerile,  juvenile. 


TERMINATIONS.  91 

i  (downward  minute) — ism,  isms,  (realism,  patriotism,  Judaism). 

dot  (final) — ing,  ingly,  ingness,  inger,  (nothing,  something, anything). 

i  (downwards) — ize,  ized,  izing,  izes,  (realize,  idealize,  moralize). 

sh — ish,  ished,  ishes,  ishly,  ishness,  (radish,  premonish,  impoverish). 

Is — less,  lessly,  lessncss,  (careless,  headless,  thoughtless). 

oi  (shortened)— old,  (avoid,  annoyed,  alloyed,  decoyed). 

us — ous,  ously,  ousness,  (callous,  jealous,  furious). 

ou  (shortened) — out,  oud,  owed,  (without,  about,  allowed,  through- 
out, aloud). 

n  (minute) — ny,  ning,  (penny,  sunny,  funny,  progeny). 

n  (short)— aned,  iued,  igued,  oned,  uned,  (contained,  refined,  impor- 
tuned). 

n  (short) — ant,  ent,  int,  ont,  unt,  (pleasant,  present,  fragrant). 

ns — ance,  ence,  enced,  encing,  (inference,  recompense,  decadence). 

nnt  (minute  nt) — nent,  nents,  (pertinent,  imminent,  eminent). 

cant — ment,  ments,  mental,  &c.,  (augment,  aliment,  sediment). 

ry  (shaded  minute  y) — ary,  ery,  erry,  ory,  (carry,  marry,  flurry). 

rd — ard,  red,  ried,  (wearied,  dotard,  bothered,  mitered). 

shp — ship,  shipped,  ships,  shipping,  (worship,  friendship). 

shn — tion,  sion,  cion,  cian,  eean,  \  See    Remark    below  —  (fashion, 

shs — tious,  cious,  sious,  &c.,  >•      mention,     cautious,     partial, 

shl— tial,  cial,  sial,  &c.,  )       fusion.) 

sm — some,  somely,  (handsome,  loathsome,  quarrelsome). 

str — ster,  (faster,  roster,  duster,  sinister). 

V — ive,  ively,  ivity,  iveness,  (active,  creative). 

yn — ian,  ion,  ien,  (historian,  postillion,  civilian,  miUion). 

U.  Bonavk,— The  syllables,  tion,  cion;  tious, 
cious ;  tial,  cial;  are  all  represented  by  the  same  sign, 
viz. :  a  short  backward,  upward  tick,  joined  angularly  to 
the  preceding  character.  This  tick  is  lengthened  for  a 
following  t,  d,  th,  shortened  for  y,  ly,  and  shaded  for 
r,  er;  any  other  letter  following  it;  as  s,  1,  is  attached. 

Each  of  the  foregoing  classes  of  syllables  has  several 
ways  of  spelling,  as  tion,  cion,  sion,  cean,  the  tick 
being  used  for  all  of  them.  The  sign  is,  however,  used 
only  in  words  of  two  syllables;  these  syllables  being  repre- 
sented otherwise  in  longer  words.     See  Lesson  XXVIII. 


92 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 


ILLUSTRATIONS   OF   SHON". 
Motion,  notion,   nation,  nations,  caution,   cautions,    cautioned, 


fashion,  fashions,  fashioned,  passion,  pension,  partial,  partially, 
^ ^ ^  ^  ^ ^  <? 

socially,  special,  specially,  fashioning,  mentioning,  passionate, 
G O ' ^ >•  ^ 

fusion,  fusions,  portion,  portions,  rational,  rationali^t. 


r        ^  ^^^ 

ILLUSTRATIOXS    OF    CONNECTED    SIGNS,  (a) 


V 


-& 


-=s_ 


-f-- 


7:^ 


^27 


^  .    .  ^ 


^=^ 


^^ 


,i^ 


^,,    .  ^ 


^^  =^ 


-^v- 


3. /■/  ^/ 


..  ^y- 


> 


-5^ 


■^^^ 


L/ 


KEY. 


Very  amiable.  Fingers  fly  nimbly.  The  nimbleness  of  her 
fingers.  So  amiable.  Her  amiability.  Not  desirable.  Its  desira- 
bility. It  is  quite  suitable.  The  question  of  its  suitability.  It  is 
not  legible.    The  legibility  of  the  writing.     It  is  fearful.     Fearfully 


STEM   SIGNS.  93 

mangled.  It  is  not  lawful.  It  is  done  lawf ullj-.  The  lawfulness  of 
the  act.  I  will  certify.  It  is  certified.  His  certificate.  Its  certifica- 
tion. By  certifying.  Do  not  realize.  He  realizes.  Its  realization. 
We  are  now  realizing.  With  feeling.  With  feelings  of.  Very 
feelingly.  He  is  nervous.  His  increasing  nervousness.  Pie 
glanced  around  nervously.  When  shall  we  commence  ?  We 
have  commenced.  When  the  act  commences.  At  the  commence- 
ment. No  detriment.  Very  detrimental.  Good  argument.  Very 
argumentative. 

EEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  suffix?  Illustrate  a  suffix.  How  may  the 
suffixes  be  grouped?  What  are  the  different  kinds  of 
suffixes?  What  is  the  stem  of  a  suffix?  For  what  suffix 
does  ct  stand?  Why  is  it  safe  to  omit  the  last  part  of  a 
suffix  and  write  only  its  stem?  Repeat  the  rule.  Repeat 
case  a,  case  b,  case  c.  What  if  a  stem  begins  with 
coalescents?  Give  tlie  stem  for  each  of  the  classes  of  the 
list.  How  are  the  terminations  of  this  and  the  two 
following  lists  to  be  practiced? 


LESSON  XXIII. 

(b)     LIST   OF   STEM    SIGNS   OF   CLASSIFIED    TERMINATIONS 

WRITTEN     DISCONNECTEDLY. 

* 

VOWELS. 

STEM   SIGXS.  TERMINATIONS. 

*^a  (written  downward) — act,  acts,  acting,  acted,  action,  (enact,  react). 
a  (written  downward) — apt,  apts,  apting,  apted,  aptation,  aptive, 

(adapt,  inapt). 
e — ect,  ects,  ecting,  ected,  ection,  ective,  estie,  (elect,  select,  dialect). 
//^  (minute) — empt,  empts,  empting,  empted,  emption. 

e— ept,  epts,  epted,  cption,  (adept,  transept,  concepts). 
1^  (written  downward) — oke,  okes,  oking,  oked,  ocation,  (provoke). 


94  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

o  (written   downward)— opt,   opts,   opting,    opted,   option,  (adopt, 
eloped). 

1^ — ict,  lets,  icting,  icted,  (predict,  evict). 

^u — uct,    nets,    ucting,    ucted,    uction,    uctive,    (product,    abduct, 
induct), 
u— upt,  upts,  upting,  upted,  uption,    uptive,  uptible,    (interrupt, 

corrupt). 
ew — ews,  ewing,  ewed,  (renewing,  reviews). 
oi— oys,  oying,  oyed,  oyanee,  (annoyance,  decoyed). 
ow — ows,  owing,  owed,  owance,  owable,  (allowing,  avowed). 

CONSONANTS. 

t/"b — bate,  bates,  bating,  bated,  bation,  batement,  bative,  bateable, 
(probate,  libation,  debate). 
b — bite,  bites,  biting,  bition,  bitious,  (ambition,  abide,  prohibit). 
b — bute,  butes,  buted,  buting,  bution,  butive,   (attribute,  retribu- 
tion, distribute). 
«.^br — brade,  brades,  braded,  brading,  brasion,  (abrade,  upbraid.) 
*^>^^cate,   cates,    cated,  eating,  cation,  cative,  eatement,  (indicate, 
abdicate,  educate), 
c— cute,  cutes,  cuted,  cuting,  cution,  cutive,  (execute,  prosecute). 
^  or — crate,  crates,  crating,  crated,  oration,  (execrate,  desecrate). 
or — Crete,  cretal,  creetness,  cretion,  (indiscreet,  discreet,  secrete). 
*^cl— elude,  eludes,  eluding,  eluded,  elusion,  elusive,  chisively,  clusi- 
veness,  (include,  seclude,  preclude), 
clc— calculable,   calculably,  ealculableness,   (incalculable,  incalcul- 
ably). 
cl — culcate,  culcates,  culcating,  culcated,  culcation,  (inculcate). 
d — date,  dates,  dating,  dated,  dative,  (mandate,  sedate,  antedate), 
d— dite,  ditos,  diting,  dited,  dition,  dictive,  (rendition). 
d — duce,  duces,  ducing,  dueed,  duction,  (introduce,  produce). 
dot — duct,  ducts,  ducting,  ducted,  duction,  ductive,  (induct,  pro- 
duct, deduct), 
dct-dict,  diets,  dieting,  dieted,  diction,  dictive,  (edict,  predict). 
0>^t  — fess,  fesses,  fessed,  fessing,  fession,  fessions,  fessional,  (profess, 
confess). 
f — fide,  fides,  fiding,  fided,  ficient,   ficious,  ficial,  (confide,  magni- 
fied, officious). 


STEM   SIGNS.  95 

f— fute,  futes,   fiiting,  futed,   fusion,   fusive.   fusiveness,   fusively, 
(confute,  refute,  infusion). 

fi — filiate,  filiates,  filiating,  filiated,  filiation,  (affiliates). 

fl. — flate,  flates,  flating,  flated,  flation,  (inflate,  afflatus). 

fire— fract,  fraction,  fractor,  fracted,  tracting,  (infraction,  refract). 

flc — fiict,  fiicts,  fiicting,  fiicted,  fliction,  (inflict,  confliction). 

flc — fleet,  fleets,  fleeting,  fleeted,  flection,  (reflect,  deflect). 
^^ — gate,  gates,  gating,  gated,  gation,  gacious,   gitious,  (corrugate, 

gw,  (deepened  g)-gwish,  gwished,  etc.,  (languish,  distinguish). 

h — hesion,  hesive,  hesively,  hesiveness,  (adhesive,  cohesion). 

hr — here,  heres,  hering,  hered,  herent,  (inhei'e,  cohere). 

hrt— herit,  herits,  heriting,  herited,  (inherit). 

hi — hilate,  hilation,  hilating,  hilated,  (annihilate). 
»-3 — ject,  jects,  Jected,  jecting,  jection,  jective,  jectively,  (eject). 

j — ^jest,  jests,  jesting,  jested,  jestion,  (suggest,  digestion). 
«--l — late,   lates,   lated,    lating,   lation,    lative,   latial,    (elate,   dilate, 
collate). 

1 — lide,  lides,  liding,  lided,  lision,  lieious,  lysian,  (collide,  malicious, 
delicious). 

1 — hide,  ludes,   hiding,  hided,    lusion,  lusive,  lusivenuss,   lusively, 
(elude,  delude,  prelude), 
•^m -mate,  mates,  mated,  mating,  mation,  (iirimate,  sublimate,  esti- 
mate). 

m — mote,   moted,    motes,    motion,    motional,    motionally,   motive, 
(promote,  commotion). 

m — mute,  mutes,  muting,  muted,  mutation,  (commute). 

ml — moUient,  molument,  molumental,   inulsion,  (emollient). 

mn — mension,  mensions,  (dimensions). 
t^n — nate,  nates,  nating,  nated,  nation,  native,  nary,  narian,  (donate, 
coordinate). 

nf— nificant,  nificantly,  nificance,  nification,  (significant,  significa- 
tions). 

n--nite,  nites,   niting,    nited,  nition,   nicious,    niciously,    (derniite, 
pernicious). 

n — nute,  nutes,  nuting,  nuted,  (comminute,  diminution). 
#-p — pate,  pates,  pated,  pating,  pation,  passioned,  patient,  pacious, 
patiently,  (capacious,  impatiently,  opacity). 

p— piate,  plates,  plating,  plated,  piation,  (expiate,  appropriate). 

p — pute,  putes,  puting,  putcd,  pation,  pacious,  (repute,  compute, 
occupation). 


96  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

#^pl — plate,  plates,  plating,  plated,  plation,  plative,  (contemplate). 
pi — plete,  pletes,  pleting,  pleted,  pletion,  (replete,  complete). 
plr — plore,  plores,  ploriiig,  plored,  ploration,  (explore,  implores). 
pi — pulsive,    pulsively,    pulsiveness,    pulsion,    (impulsive,    propul- 
sion). 
t^  q — quate,  quately,  quateness,  quation,  quacy,  quai'y,  quaries,  (ade- 
quate, inadequate). 
q — question,  questioned,  questioning,  questionably  (unquestioned). 
r — ride,  rides,  riding,  rided,  risive,  rision,  (deride,  apparition). 
t,^ — rate,   rates,   rating,   rated,    ration,    racious,    raciously,    raeity, 

rocious,  rociously,  (oration,  voracious,  veracity,  ferocious). 
t^s — sate,  sates,  sating,  sated,  sation,  sative,  (condensate,  compensate), 
*-^c — scribe,  scribes,  scribing,  scribed,  scription,  scriptive,  (describe, 

inscription). 
#^sp — spicuity,  spicuous,  (perspicuity,  conspicuous.) 
^'  sh. — itiate,  itiated,  itiation,  itial,  itially,  (initiate,  novitiate). 
^  st — stitute,  stitutes,  stituting,  stituted,  stitution,  (destitute,  institute, 

constitute,  constitution,  institution). 
#^  strT^-struct,    struets,    structing,  structed,  struction,  (obstruct,  des- 
truction). 
*^tr — strate,  strates,  strating,  strated,  stration,    strations,    (demon- 
strate, illustrate). 
•'sw — suade,    suades,  suading,   suaded,  suasion,    suasive,   suasively, 

suage,  (persuade,  dissuade,  assuage). 
*^ — tate,  tates,  tated,  tating,  tation,  tative,  (agitate,  temptation), 
ijll^t— tage,  tageous,  tageously,  tageousness,  (advantage,  vintage). 

t — tute,  tutes,  tuting,  tuted,  tutive,  tution,  (destitution,  restitution). 
^  tr — trate,  trates,  ti'ated,  trating,  tration,  trition,   tritious,  (magis- 

ti'ate,  illustrate,  nutrition,  meretricious). 
£^  th— thusiast,  thuiastic,  thusiastically,  thusiasm,  (enthusiasm). 
/-  V — vate,  vates,  vating,  vated,  vasion,  vasive,  vasively,  vator,  (reno- 
vate, elevate,  invasion,  evasively). 
V — vade,  vades,  vading,  vaded,  (pervade,  evade,  invade), 
vr— vert,  vertes,  verting,  verted,  verses,  versation,  (pervert,  divert). 
vl — volve,    volves,    volved,   volving,    volution,    voluted,    (revolve, 

evolve,  involve,  devolve). 
vn — vent,  vention,  vantage,  vantageous,  &c.,  (invention,  advantage, 
disadvantage). 
t^  w — uate,  uates,  uating,  uated,  nation,  (situate,  perpetuate). 
X — xatious,  xation,  xative,  (vexatious,  relaxation). 


STEM   SIGNS. 
ILLUSTRATIONS,  (b) 


97 


KEY. 

Addition  (a-d),  edition  (e-d),  illusion  (i-1),  allision  (a-1),  elusive 
(e-1),  evasion  (e-v),  ovation  (o-v),  omission  (o-m),  oration  (o-r),  dona- 
tion (d-n),  location  (1-c),  provision  (pro-v),  prevention  (pre-vn), 
seclusion  (se-cl),  secretion  (se-cr),  reduction  (re-dc),  induction  (in-dc), 
abduction,  affliction,  infliction,  deflection,  reflection,  infraction, 
allowed  (al-ou),  detraction,  subtraction,  extraction  (xtracshn), 
instruction,  destruction,  obstruction,  construction,  perversion, 
desertion,  delusion,  delegation,  obligation,  abrogation,  segregation, 
incursion,  impression,  extirpation,  expectation,  extraposition,  temp- 
tation, temptations,  situation,  situations,  excavation,  excavations, 
indication,  indications,  intimation,  intimations,  position,  proposition, 
infatuation,  interpenetration,  extravasation,  exhilaration,  probation, 
prohibition,  elimination,  inauguration,  inundation,  incapacitation, 
infiltration,  illumination,  elucidation,  inarticulation,  alteration, 
alliteration,  persuasion,  dissuade,  advantage,  advantageous,  signify, 
significantly,  significance,  signification. 


98 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


LESSON  XXIA^. 

(c)    LIST   OF    STEil     STGXS   WRITTEN"    ACROSS    PRECEDING 
CHARACTERS. 


STEM  SIGNS. 


TERMINATIONS. 


t — ty,  tily,  tiness,  tive,  tively,  tiveness,  tivity,  (might}',  active,  native). 

tl — (upright  t),  talitVjtuality  (shaded).trality  (raentahty,  neutrality). 

tr  — try,  tary,  tery,  tiry,  tory,   tury,   tuary,   (wintry,  century,  coun- 
try, actuary). 

s — sy,  sily,  siness,  sivo,  sively,  siveness,  sivity,  (fussy,  massive,  impres- 
sive, passivity). 

st — sty,  stily,  stiness,  (yeasty,  dusty,  misty). 

str — stry,  stery,  stries,  steries,  (mystery,  casuistry,  ministry). 

b — bility,  bilities,  (ability,  liability,  inability), 
/^(upward) — alogy,  alogies,  alogically,  (mineralogy,  analogically). 

o  (upward) — ology,  ologies,  ological,  ologically,  ologian,  (theologian) 
'  o  (downward)  -ography,  ographic,  etc.  (geography,  stenography). 
^0  (downward) — osophy,  osophies,  osophically,  I  philosophy,  theosophy). 

g- — graph,  graphic,  graphical,  graphically,  gram,  (lithograph). 

I — logue,  logues,  (monologue,  catalogue,  decalogue). 

t — ityr-ittee,  (oomTntttge,  coittmilnity,  insallily)r 

TLLUSTHATIOXS. 


KEY. 

Motive,  mighty,  city,  duty,  insanity,  county,  country,  century, 
wintry,  ministry,  pleasantry,  desultory,  premonitory,  yeasty,  dusty, 
fussy,  dressy,  aggressive,  illusive,  permissive,  analogy,  apology,  the- 
ology, amiability,  debility,  disability,  desirability,  accessibility, 
lithograph,  hectograph,  monogram,  dialogue,  catalogue,  monologue, 
theosophy,  philosophy,  committee,  infirmity,  community,  humanity, 
inhumanity,  phrenology,  physiology,  geology,  biology,  biography. 


TERMINATIONS.  99 

EXERCISE  IN  TERMIXATIONS. 

Having  become  an  octoge- 
narian, on  the  verge  of  superan- 
nuation, and  having  had  a  gentle 
admo-nition  of  my  incapaci- 
tation for  physical  exer-tion,  but 
in   my  early   edu-cation    having 

-^ • —  made  the  acqui-sition  of  a  dispo- 

^^^i' sition  averse  to  in-action,  without 


— /^ ^^ — ^ — the  least  am-bition  or  aspl-ration 

for  distinc-tion,  personal  aggran- 
di-zation,  or  pecuniary  remune- 
ration, but  for  the  sole  purpose  of 
having  some  occu-pation,  and  for 
my  own  satis-faction  and  gratifi- 
cation, I  conceived  the  no-tion 
of  the  di-rection  of  my  at-tention 
to  the  col-lection,  classifi-cation, 
combi-nation,  congre-gation,  and 


~zo- 


— — -7 -^ — ^ concen-tration  of    words  in  the 

^""""^ — ^^^  ^.^Ce^irn^    English  vo-eabulary  with  t-i-o-n 

'     ^ — — ^ii for  their  termi-nation. 

With  this  expla-nation  of  ray 
in-tention  I  comme-nced  ope- 
ration, with  no  con-ception  of  the 
ve-xation  and  close  appli-cation 
necessary  for  its  com-pletion; 
but  possess-ing  an  innate  obdu- 
ration  against  the  pre-vention  of, 
or  frus-tration  in,  any  laudable 
vo-cation,  I  persevered  in  my 
investi-gation  against  strong  oppo- 
sition, frequent  interr-uption,  and 


100  ECLECTIC    SHOETHAND. 

with  exces-sive  fati-gation,  until 
- — n  J  '    -^ I  brought  the  sub-ject  in  contem- 
plation to  a  suc-cessful  consum- 
mation. 

., — ^., _^ ^^ Finding  the  enume-ration  of 

,.'Ct.^crny    ^-^ b — = —      ^  "'"v.^    t-i-o-n  as  a  termi-nation  far  ex- 

ceed-ing  my  antici-pation,  expec- 


tation, or  calcu-lation,  I  felt  an 
incli -nation  to  submit  for  publi- 
cation, even  at  the  risk  of  my 
repu-tation,  my  singular  and 
unique  pro-duction,  for  the  infor- 
mation, in-strnction  and  edifi- 
cation of  the  rising  gene-ration. 

After  the  for-mation  of  a 
determi-nation  in  favor  of  its 
piibli-cation,  it  became  a  matter 
of  necessi-tation,  in  confor-mation 
to  pre-vail-ing  custom  in  every 
new  lite-rary  compo-sition,  to 
preface  my  publi-cation,  as  an 
intro-duction,  with  a  dedi-cation 
to  some  distin-guished  friend  or 
re-lation. 

It  then  became  a  grave  ques- 
tion to  what  distant  or  near  re- 
lation I  could  make  this  do- 
nation, before  consul-tation,  and 
avoid  the  cau-sation  of  disaf- 
fection,     disappro-bation,      and 

<^il^ ^ perhaps  repro-bation.    After  long 

cogi-tation,  nnich  consul-tation, 
and  serious  re-flection,  I  could 
bring    to    my   recoll-ection   and 


V  7^^ 


TERMINATIONS.  101 


r^ 


~P^^ 


> 


recog-nition  but  one  distant  re- 
lation in  all  cre-ation,  who,  in 
my  esti-mation,  would  entertain 
a  full  appre-ciation  of  this  demon- 
stration of  my  af-fection. 

Therefore,  without  further 
circumlo-eution,  in  conside-ration 
and  eommemo-ration  of  the  fre- 
quent repe-tition,  excla-mation, 
vocife-ration,  and  apt  appli-cation 
of  t-i-o-n  by  my  distant  re-lation, 
L.  B.  C,  in  her  daily  conver- 
sation, when  ob-jects  offen-sive 
come  in  con-taction  with  her 
degus-tation,  ol-factory,  or  other 
acute  sen-sation,  I  can  have  no 
hesi-tation,  and  I  feel  under  great 
obli-gation,  and  it  affords  me 
much  satis-faction  and  gratifi- 
cation to  honor  her  with  the  do- 
nation of  this  dedi-cation  of  the 
following  laborious  eompi-lation, 
trust-ing  it  will  meet  her  entire 
appro-bation  and  highest  com- 
men-dation.  Hoping  that  a 
perusal  of  this  pro-duction  will 
engage  her  at-tention,  afford  her 
in-struction,  excite  her  ani- 
mation, elicit  her  admi-ration, 
produce  exhila-ration,  and  oc- 
casionally a  burst  of  cachi- 
nation,  I  am  as  ever,  without 
aflec-tation,  her  sincere  friend 
and  af-fectionate  re-lation. 


102  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

LESSON  XXV. 

PREFIXES. 

1.  A  prefix  is  a  letter,  a  syllable,  or  a  word  added  to 
the  beginning  of  some  other  word,  to  vary  or  modify  its 
meaning;  thus,  possible,  means  can  he  done,  but  pre- 
fix im,  and  it  becomes  impossible,  and  means  cannot 
be  clone. 

2,  Most  prefixes  are  readily  written  by  the  a23plication 
of  the  rules,  which  you  have  already  learned,  and  the  fol- 
lowing lists  of  words,  which  are  given  especially  for  prac- 
tice on  the  prefixes,  embrace  most  of  the  prefixes  of  the 
language.  They  are  arranged  Avith  reference  to  the 
origin  of  the  prefixes,  the  first  list  comprising  those  of 
Latin  origin,  the  second,  those  of  Greek,  and  the  third, 
those  of  Saxon,  origin.  The  prefix  in  each  word  is 
indicated  by  a  space  between  it  and  the  following  part 
of  the  word.  Some  of  the  longer  prefixes  are  represented 
by  special  signs,  which  are  written  across.  Practice  the 
lists  until  you  can  write  the  words  readily. 

PREFIXES    OF   LATIX    ORIGIN. 


^f,^-^        ab-soive  ^ —  ad-join 

/'^  ab-duce  ^ '  ad-mit 

ab-scond  / o  ad-mire 

ab-stain  /---_  af-fix 

ab-scind  /^> af-firm 

ac-cede  "      f-  af-fiant 

'/  ac-cuse  ^.^-  af-ford 

^  ac-cess  f"^^^  ag-grieve 

/  ac-cord  [f  ag-gressive 

/  ac-eme  /^  ag-gregate 

;"  ac-count  /^  ag-gravate 

ad-dress  '/^  ag-itate 


PEEFIXES. 


103 


V 


Y 


G 

cn 

C 

L 
c  6 


al-lay 

al-lude 

al-most 

al-though 

al-so 

an-cient 

an-nex 

aii-notate 

an-noy 

aa-thers 

an-alyze 

ant-ler 

ant-arctic 

ante-date 

ante-cedent 

ante-lope 

ante-jjast 

ante-i'oom 

anti-dote 

anti-dotal 

anti-pode 

anti-pathy 

anti-thesis 

ap-pend 

ap-pertaiii 

ap-petite 

ap-parent 

ap-p roach 

ap-posite 

ar-ray 

ar-raign 

ar-rogant 

ar-senal 

ar-senic 

as-cend 

as-say 

as-sert 

as-sign 

as-sume 

as-suage 


^^ 


at-las 

at-om 

at-tach 

at-tain 

at-tend 

at-tune 

bene-dict 

bene-fice 

bene- factor 

bene-volent 

bi-ennial 

bi-lateral 

bi-form 

bi-gamy 

bis-sextile 

cent-ennial 

cent-ifolious 

cent-ipede 

cent-uplicate 

cent-urion 

co-hesion 

co-operate 

co-extensive 

cog-nate 

cog-itate 

col-late 

col-lapse 

col-lect 

col-lide 

col-lusive 

cor-rect 

cor-onal 

cor-porate 

cor-rugate 

cor-rupt 

cor-sair 

cor-sage 

de-bark 

de-duce 

de-grade 


104 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 


de-fraud 

de-jected 

de-part 

di-athesis 

di-vert 

di-vest 

di-vide 

dis-able 

dis-arm 

dis-gust 

dis-inter 

dis-miss 

dif-fer 

dif-fuse 

du-bious 

du-cal 

du-plex 

du-plicate 

diio-decirao 

duo-denum 

duo-literal 

ee-centrie 

ec-clesial 

ec-cope 

ec-lectic 

ec-logue 

ef-face 

ef-fect 

ef-fete 

ef-fervesce 

ef-fort 

ef-fulgent 

el-lipsis 

el-liptie 

el-oquent 

el-ytruin 

ein-anate 

em-bark 

em-bargo 

em-bellish 


^ 


em-body 

em-print 

en-able 

en-amel 

en-case 

en-chanted 

en-cumber 

en-ergy 

equi-angular 

equi-distant 

equi-librity 

equi-noctial 

equi-poise 

equi-table 

ex-act 

es-ceed 

ex-claim 

ex-clude 

ex-cept 

ex-pect 

extra-dition 

extra-dotal 

extra-judicial 

extra-official 

extra-ordinary 

extra-vagant 

ig-neous 

ig-niferous 

ig-nipotent 

ig-nite 

ig-nore 

ig-norant 

il-lapse 

il-legal 

il-legible 

il-liberal 

ill-ness 

il-lumine 

im-agine 

im-bank 


PREFIXES. 


105 


^ 


I 


im-becile 

im-brue 

im-itable 

im-itate 

im-mediate 

im-mense 

im-patient 

in-capable 

in-clude 

in-cline 

in-close 

in-sist 

inter-fere 

intro-duce 

non-claim 

non-descript 

non-elect 

non-juring 

non-pareil 

non-resident 

non-suit 

non-sense 

ob-durate 

ob-elisk 

ob-ject 

ob-late 

ob-lique 

ob-literate 

oc-casion 

oc-eurs 

oc-cult 

oc-cupant 

oc-cupy 

Oc-tober 

oc-ulist 

of-fence 

of-fers 

of-iicer 

of-ficious 

oflE-set 


/^-^ 


of-ten 

op-erate 

op-eration 

op-erose 

op-ertaneous 

pan-cratium 

pan-creas 

pan-dect 

pan-dit 

pan-egyric 

pan-ic 

per-ambulate 

per-fection 

per-ennial 

jier-jurer 

per-manent 

per-severe 

per-tinacious 

post-age 

I3ost-fix 

post-humous 

{lost-note 

post-road 

post-ulate 

pre-cede 

pre-concert 

pre-mature 

pre-occupy 

pre-pare 

prim-itive 

prim-ness 

prim-ogenial 

prim-ordial 

prim-rose 

retro-action 

retro-cession 

retro-grade 

retro-spect 

se-cede 

se-clude 


106 


ECLECTIC   SHOETHA^fD. 


'V. 


■ — -o^ 


se-cretary 

se-dace 

se-lect 

se-eure 

se-quester 

se-rious 

semi-brere 

semi-diameter 

semi-form 

sug-gest 

sug-gester 

sug-gestion 

sug-gestiTe 

sug-gUlate 

super-animate 

super-fine 

super-charge 

super-intend 

super-ior 

super-numerarv 

super-sede 

super-stition 

sup-plant 

sup-pie 

sup-plement 

sup-port 

sap-purate 

sup-pose 

supra-costal 

supra-lunar 

supra-mundane 

supra-orbital 

supra-protest 

supra-spinal 

supra-scapular 

sur-feit 

sur-mise 

sur-mount 

sur-pass 

sor-plus 


^<? 


snr-render 
sur-round 
sur-rey 
sus-ceptible 

su5-cetate 

sus-pect 

sus-pend 

sus-picion 

sus-tain 

tri-angular 

rri-bunal 

tri-capsular 

tri-ennial 

tri-fling 

tri-gvlph 

tri-lobite 

ultra-marine 

ultra-montane 

ultra-mundane 

ultra-tropical 

un-bred 

im-certain 

un-ciean 

un-couth 

un-coTer 

un-current 

un-dated 

un-decent 

under-bid 

under-charge 

under-crush 

under-foot 

under-go 

under-graduate 

under-mine 

under-stand 

under-take 

under-neath 

under-size 

under- valaea 


PREFIXES. 


107 


v-. 


uii-a  voidable 
uni-form 


> 


uni-ty 
uni-vcrsal 


-^^ 


PREFIXES   OF   GRLEK    OUKilN. 


ana-baptist 

aiia-lcptic 

ana-loguo 

ana-lysis 

ana-morphosis 

ana-pest 

arch-angel 

arch-bishop 

arch-count 

arch-deacon 

arch-duke 

arch-etype 

astro-latry 

astro-logy 

astro-metry 

astro-scope 

aristo-cracy 

aristo-cratic 

aristo-logy 

apo-gee 

apo-graph 

apo-log\ie 

apo-plectic 

apo-state 

apo-theosis 

apho-rous 

aplio-rize 

apho-rism 

bio-grapher 

bio-logical 

bio-lytic 

bio-tine 

biblio-grapher 

biblio-logy 

biblio-pliilist 

biblio-polist 


^  ^ 


biblio-thecary 

biblio-theke 

cata-baptist 

cata-caustic 

cata-clysni 

cata-coinb 

cata-falque 

cata-graph 

cata-logue 

cata-raet 

cata-plasni 

chiro-grapby 

chiro-logy 

chiro-mancy 

chiro-plast 

chiro-pod 

choro-grapher 

choro-graphy 

chrono-logy 

chrono-meter 

chrono-metry 

cosmo-gony 

cosmo-graphy 

cosmo-logy 

cosrao-politan 

dia-base 

dia-bolical 

dia-costic 

dia-cretic 

dia-dem 

dia-gonal 

dia-leet 

dia-logue 

dia-meter 

deca-logue 

deca-pode 


108 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


^— »<= 


dys-entery 

dys-pepsia 

dys-phoria 

dys-thetic 

dys-phony 

ento-moline 

ento-mology 

epi-gram 

epi-logue 

epi-demic 

epi-lepsy 

epi-taph 

eu-charist 

eu-logy 

eu-peptie 

eu-phonic 

Eu-ropeaii 

eu- trophy 

geo-centric 

geo-desy 

geo-graphy 

geo-logy 

geo-metry 

helio-centric 

helio-chrome 

helio-graph 

helio-meter 

helio-trope 

hetero-clite 

hetero-dox 

hetero-geneous 

hetero-graphy 

hetero-pod 

hepta-glot 

hepta-gon 

hepta-hedron 

homo-centric 

homo-geneous 

homo-logous 

homo-graphic 


^ 


/^ 


J^ 


c^^t^ 


~~^ 


homo-morphous 

hyper-bole 

hyper-borean 

hyper-critical 

hyper-metrical 

hyper-trojihy 

hypo-crisy 

hypo-gastric 

hypo-phosphite 

hypo-statis 

ichthy-ology 

ichthy-ophagy 

ichthy-osis 

i<3hthy-otomy 

lexico-grapher 

lexico-logy 

litho-carp 

litho-graph 

litho-glyph 

litho-mancy 

litho-tomy 

litho-type 

meta-basis 

meta-genic 

meta-lepsis 

meta-morphic 

meta-phoric 

meta-phrase 

meta-physics 

miso-gamist 

miso-gamy 

raiso-gynist 

miso-gyny 

miso-theism 

mytho-grapher 

mytho-logic 

mytho-logist 

mytho-logiie 

mytho-plasm 

mytho-poetic 


PREFIXES. 


109 


"^^ 


ortho-doxy 

ortho-graphy 

ortho-logy 

octa-gon 

octa-hedron 

octa-ndria 

octo-gamy 

octo-gynous 

octo-petalous 

octo-pod 

octo-style 

ornitho-logy 

ornitho-lite 

ornitho-mancy 

ornitho-scope 

osteo-scope 

osteo-geny 

osteo-graphy 

osteo-lite 

osteo-manty 

osteo-plasm 

osteo-tomy 

para-dox 

para-gon 

para-llel 

para-moimt 

para-phrase 

para- site 

penta-chord 

penta-gon 

penta-meter 

penta-teueh 

peri-gee 

pcri-helion 

peri-od 

peri-phery 

philo-math 

philo-logy 

philo-sopher 

philo-pena 


^tr^ 


f^r' 


philo-technic 

phono-graph 

phono-grapher 

phono-graphy 

phono-type 

phono-typj 

phos-phate 

phos-phite 

phos-phoric 

phos-phorous 

physio-gnomy 

physio-logy 

physio -graphy 

poly-glot 

poly-jiode 

poly-syllable 

poly-technic 

proto-col 

proto-martyr 

proto-type 

proto-plasm 

steno-graph 

steno-grapher 

steno-graphy 

stereo-graph 

stereo-meter 

stereo -scope 

stereo-type 

topo-graph 

topo-logy 

theo-cracy 

theo-gony 

theo-logy 

tlieo-pathy 

typo-graphy 

typo-lite 

typo-logy 

zoo-graphy 

2oo-logist 


110 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


PREFIXES   OF   SAXON    ORIGIN". 

all-abandon  — „^^ — ^  out-cast 

all-cheering  -.^^^^ — ?  out-crop 

all-hail  __^  out-fit 

all-important  — ^/  out-growth 

after-clap  — r^ -  out-last 

after-crop  -^g^  out-law 

after-noon  X,^  out-lay 

after-thought  — ^ —  out-line 

after-wards  ~'**^  out-pour 

be-deck  — -j,— ^  out-rageous 

be-fall  — -jj  out-right 

be-fore  "'*'^._-'  out-ward 

be-guile  /-'^  over-act 

be-have  />  over-anxious 

be-half  ,A^  over-arch 

be-held  £_^  over-balance 

be-hoof  ^  over-bear 

be-hind  ^I^__,  over-estimate 

be-wail  L^  over-look 

be-ware  A  over-reach 

by-bidder  Z  over-pay 

by-business  -^  up-bear 

by-gone  ^^^^~^  up-braid 

by-lane  •  "^""^^^ —  up-heave 

by-laws  ""^T^  up-held 

by-path  "N^v  up -holster 

by-road  ""-^^ -,  up-lift 

fore-arm  "">,  up-right 

fore-bode  "^^  up-set 

fore-cast  ^/7  up-side 

fore-close  ^^  with-al 

fore-end  — ^^  with-draw 

fore-father  ^^--'''^y  with-hold 

out-bid  _^^^  with -in 

out-break  ^'^  with-out 

out-burst  ^.--^^  with-stand 


PREFIXES.  Ill 

LESSON  XXVI. 

PREFIXES    REPRESENTED    BY    SPECIAL   SIGNS. 

1.  The  following  list  comprises  but  few  simple 
prefixes;  the  most  of  them  are  compound  prefixes, 
each  of  wliich  would  employ  several  strokes  to  write,  and 
therefore  requires  a  simple  sign. 

2.  These  signs  consist,  in  most  cases,  of  the  first  letter 
or  letters  or  the  first  and  last  letters  of  the  prefix,  and 
are  therefore  easily  remembered. 

3.  In  writing,  the  prefix  sign  is  generally  indicated  by 
drawing  the  following  character  across  it,  or  parallel  with 
it. 

4.  The  signs  for  re  and  dis  are  written  attached  to 
the  irregular  side  of  the  following  character,  which  is 
written  in  position  to  express  the  letter  after  it. 

5.  The  sign  for  com.,  con,  cor  is  written  and  the 
following  character  is  begun  close  at  the  right  of  it. 
When  it  is  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  commit,  com- 
mand, connive,  a  dot  is  written  on  the  vowel  posi- 
tion to  express  com  and  the  vowel,  and  the  following 
character  written  close  after  it,  the  separation  indicating 
that  the  dot  is  preceded  by  the  con  or  com — the  second 
m  in  these  words  is  omitted  because  it  is  not  necessary  to 
the  pronunciation.  If  a  consonant  folloAvs  the  com, 
con,  cor,  as  in  contract,  contrive,  compose,  cor- 
rect, the  consonant  is  written  on  tlie  vowel  position,  and 
the  following  character  written  close  after  it.  For  cor 
or  comr  make  the  dot  heavy.  If  the  consonant  is  fol- 
lowed by  an  m,  n,  r,  1,  t,  d,  which  belongs  in  the  syl- 
lable with  the  prefix  and  can  be  written  continuously 


112 


ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 


with  the  consonant,  it  is  better  to  write  it  thus;  as  in 
comprehend,  comprise,  computable,  competi- 
tive, complicate,  conform.ation,  concentration. 

6.  The  jjroj^er  position  for  a  prefix  sign  is  on  the  line, 
but  it  may  be  written  on  any  position,  except  in  case  a 
character  is  used  for  more  than  one  sign,  as  in  case  of  a, 
i,  and  u,  each  of  which  represents  more  than  one  prefix, 
and  must,  therefore,  be  written  on  its  proper  positions. 

7.  The  teacher  should  insist  that  the  pupils  study  the 
prefixes  and  suffixes  until  they  are  perfectly  familiar  with 
them. 

.  LIST   OF    PREFIXES   AXD    SICxNS. 


Prejix. 

Sign. 

__-_ 

Prefix. 

Sign. 

Accom,  accoun, 

ac 

Mis, 

ms 

o 

Adminis, 

ad 

^' 

Miscon,  misin, 

ms 

3 

Ambi,  amphi, 

am 

i--- 

Noncom-con, 

n 

Author, 

au 

/ 

Omni-nip-nis-ni\ 

om 

T~ 

Com,  con,  coun,  cor 

,  dot 

Preeon, 

P 

n 

Circum, 

sm 

^      ^ 

Quadra-ri-ru 

q 

( 

0 

Concom-cor, 

c 

^„^^ 

Re, 

r 

Dis, 

ds 

Recom-con-cog-cor- 

Discom-con-coun, 

d 

cum-coun. 

circle  r 

o 

Dissatis, 

dst 

-^ 

Self,  con. 

s 

Equi-quiv, 

ec 

^ 

Subeoin-con, 

sp 

.. :; 

Encom,  encoun, 

en 

\- 

Substan, 

su 

r  ~A 

Encour, 

enr 

-v- 

Trans-con, 

t 

/ 

Govern, 

S 

u 

Unac-com-count, 

ung 

-y- 

Hypo-pot, 

M 

J 

Undis, 

us 

_^__ 

Inac, 

inc 

I 

Uncom-con 

un 

\  - 

Indis,  indus, 

is 

J 

Unrecom-con, 

unr 

-V- 

Incom,  incon,  incura,  in 

J 

Unsatis, 

un 

\ 

Irrecon-cog, 

ir 

-A- 

Excom,  cor, 

X 

\ 

Magnan-im, 

m 

PREFIXES. 


113 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


^^ 


/— 
/— 
/ — 


Accom-modate 

accom-modation 

accoun-table 

accoun-ting 

adminis-trate 

adrninis-tration 

adminis-trated 

adminis-tratrix 

adminis-trator 

adminis-trative 

ambi-ent 

ambi-dexter 

amphi-bian 

amphi-bious 

author-ize 

aiithor-ity 

author-ities 

author-ization 

author-izes 

circum-stanee 

circum-stantial 

circum-A'ent 

circiim-ference 

cireum-polar 

concom-itant 

concor-dant 

com-mand 

com -mend 

cora-muned 

com-mit 

com-raingled 

cont-ained 

eonte-nd 

conte-ntion 

contra-ct 

contri-ve 

contor-tion 

contu-sion 


'7-N 


conce-al 

conce-ive 

consi-gn 

consump-tion 

consi-st 

concis-ion 

conees-sion 

consis-tory 

comfor-t 

compa-ny 

compe-nd 

corape-tition 

compat-ible 

compli-ment 

compli-cation 

corapre-ss 

compri-ses 

compul-sory 

compel-s 

compul-sion 

conclii-sion 

conclu-sive 

conclu-ded 

eonclu-des 

confli-ct 

coniiu-ent 

consti-tution 

constru-ct 

eonstri-ct 

congre-gation 

congre-ssional 

corabi-nation 

confu-sion 

consj^i-ciious 

confor-m 

confor-mation 

confir-m 

confir-raatioa 


114 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


^' 


•  c/ 


Vc?-; 


^^^^ 


consum-ination 

conso-lation 

conju-gation 

contem-plation 

conster-nation 

corre-spond 

corru-gate 

corru-pt 

comra-des 

dis-may 

dis-sever 

dis-cover 

dis-puted 

dis-favor 

dis-perse 

dis-annul 

dis-allow 

dis-engage 

dis-course 

dis-like 

disconcer-ted 

discon-tented 

discom- posed 

dissatis-fied 

dissatis-faction 

equi-angular 

equi-poise 

equiv-ocate 

eqiii-distant 

encom-passed 

encom-ium 

encoun-ter 

encour-aged 

govern-mental 

govern -ance 

govern-ess 

govern-s 

govcrn-or 

hypo-chondriac 

hypo-crisy 


i?-T7 


hypoth-ecate 

hypoth-esis 

hypoth-ecator 

hypoth-etic 

inac-curate 

inac-cessible 

indis-tinc; 

indis-creet 

indis-soluble 

indis-crimate 

incon-clusive 

incom-mode 

ineum-brance 

irrecog-nizable 

irrecon-cilable 

magnan-imity 

magnan-imous 

mis-state 

mis-feasance 

miscon-strue 

tniscon-struct 

mism-form 

noncon-formity 

noneom- 

placency 
omnip-otent 
omnip-reseiit 
omnis-cient 
omniv-igant 
omniv-agous 
precon-siderc'd 
precon-forra 
quadri-lateral 
quadri-lineal 
quadri-manous 
re-fuse 
I'e-mind 
re-mand 
re-miss 
re-taia 


REVIEW. 


115 


re-pose 

re-press 

re-pute 

re-linquish 

re-late 

re -f  rain 

re-gard 

re-course 

re-ceipt 

re-resoh'e 

re -retrench 

recom-pense 

recon-sider 

reeom-mend 

self-ish 

self-ishly 

self-ishness 

self-willed 

self-love 

self-control 

self-conscious 

substan-ces 

substan-tive 


—e^ 


>r7 


substan-tially 
trans- fer 
trans-mit 
trans -pose 
trans-port 
trans-late 
transcon- 
tinental 
unac-ceptable 
unac-countable 
undis-mayed 
undis-guised 
undis-puted 
uncon-cerned 
uncom- 
plimentary 
uncon-scious 
unrecon-oiled 
unsatis-fied 
unsatis-factory 
excom-municate 
excom- 
munication 


EEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  prefix?  What  three  classes  of  prefixes  are 
given  in  Lesson  XXV?  How  are  the  prefixes  in  the 
three  lists  written?  What  class  of  prefixes  is  given  in 
Lesson  XXVI?  How  are  they  represented?  What  is 
the  object  of  writing  across  the  signs?  What  signs  are 
disconnected?  Explain  the  writing  of  com,  con. 
What  is  the  proper  place  to  write  a  sign?  What  signs 
are  written  with  reference  to  position?  How  is  re 
written?  How  is  dis  written?  Have  you  mastered  the 
prefix  and  suffix  signs? 


CHAPTER   YI. 


LESSON  XXVII. 


WORDS   OF   FREQUENT   OCCURRENCE. 

The  following  words  are  of  such  frequent  occurrence 
that  you  should  repeatedly  practice  them  during  the 
progress  of  your  study  until  you  can  at  length  write  them 
at  a  rate  of  two  hundred  to  two  hundred  and  fifty  words 
a  minute.  The  written  characters  are  not  word-signs, 
but,  with  few  exceptions,  are  full  expressions  of  the  words 
which  they  represent.  The  few  exceptions,  which  may 
be  called  word-signs,  are  given  in  italics. 


f 

^ 

^ 


IP 


/^ 

( 
( 
( 
i 


A 

as 
an 
am 

aim 

and 

all 

also 

always 

alone 

are 

at 

add 

apt 

abide 

about 

according 


7 

/ 
/ 

i 

i 

( 

4 


account 
acknowl- 
edge 
advise 
abead 
afraid 
afford 
after 
aver 
avert 
again 
against 
age  (aj) 
agent 
agents 
agency 
another 

llG 


arm 
arms 
armed 
around 
arise 
array 
art 
arts 
artist 
army 
ask 

amount 
among 
assure 
amend- 
ment 
any  (en) 


WORDS  OF  FREQUENT  OCCURRENCE. 


IIY 


118 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


"^ 


0 
Ly 

O 

Cy 

o 
0 

(/ 


fall 
fare 
■  farm 
favor 
frame 
feel 
fill 
full 
find 
found 

fly 

fleet 

flight 

flat 

form 

from 

forever 

forward 

forget 

freedom 

frail 

fresh 

frequent 

freely 

fruit 

gay 

ga,ve 

f/ive 

go 

gone 

get 

God 

good 

got 

glad 

glow 

gold 

grow 

grain 

greeu 


U . 


< 
( 

0 

f 

O 

o 

O 

0 


V 


/ 
/ 

o 
o 
o 


c — == 


grave 

great 
ground 
gentle- 
men 
govern 
govern- 
ment 
have 
hand 
has 
hall 

he 
head 
heat 
hide 
held 
heal 
heap 
help 
helm 
him 
his 
hit 
hid 
hot 
hub 
hill 
hole 
hold 
her 
hear 
how 
heaven 
himself 
hereafter 
herein 
hereto- 
fore 


WORDS  OF  FREQUENT  OCCURRENCE. 


119 


A- 

/ 

J 
J 


lionor 
house 
human 
I 

eye 
eyes 
I  am 
improve 
include 
indorse 
invoice 
if 
is 
it 

I  will  (il) 
item 
its 

itself 
join 
jxidye 
judgment 
just 
justice 
juror 
jury 
July 
June 
knell 
knit 
knowl- 
edge 
keep 
kind 
kite 
knock 
knave 
know 
known 
large 
lay 


<^' 


^^ 


"^ 


^  mine 


male 

mail 

mark 

margin 

machine 

magnifi- 
cent 

majesty 

manage 

mankind 

manner 

matter 

mere 

mode 

more 
■  many 

money 

morning 

much 

meaner 

meet 

Mr. 

Mrs. 

motion 

mention 

meaning 

minute 

minor-er 

mount 

multiply 

multitude 

name 

new 

no 

none 
^nor 

now 

not 

nerve 

never 


120 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


suit 
such,  (uch) 


WORDS   OF   FREQUENT   OCCUERElfCE, 


121 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAXD. 


PROPER    KA.MES. 


Aaron 

Abner 

Abraham 

Adam 

Adolphus 

Albert 

Alexander 

Alfred 

Allen 

Alonzo        ^d/^~ 

Alplieus  ^ 


Alvah 

Alvin 

Amos 

Andrew 

Anthony 

Archibald 

Arnold 

August  us 

Aurelius 

Azariah 

Baldwin 


wide 
weighed 
(wa) 
wait 
will 
win 
won 
well 
ivith 
watch 
wash 
worn 

ye 

yes 

yes  sir 

year 

years 

you 

yours 

your- 
selves 

youth 
(uth) 

young 
(ung) 


Barnabas 
7  Basil 
Benedict 
Benjamin 
Benoni 
Bernard 
,Barnard 
Bethuel 
.Boniface 
Byron 
Caleb 


PROPEK    ISTAMES. 


123 


Calvin 

Charles 

Christian     ' 

Christopher 

Clarence 

Claudius 

Clement      ' 

Conrad        ' 

Constant     ' 

Cornelius 
.  Cyrus 

Daniel 

Darius 

David 

Dennis 

Dexter 

Donald 
.Duncan 

Eben 

Edgar 
-Edmund 
^Edward 

Edwin 

Egbert 

Eldred 
^Eli 
'Elias 

Elijali 

Elisha 

Ellis 

Elmer 

Elnathan 

Emanuel 
'Emery 

Emory 

Eneas 

Enos 

Enoch 

Erasmus 


Erastus 
Ernest 
Ethan 
Eugene 
Evan 
Ezra 
Felix 

Ferdinand 
Festus 
Francis 
Frank 
'Franklin 
Frederick 
Garret 
George 
Gerald 
Gerard 
Gilbert 
Giles 
Goddard 
Godfrey 
.Gregory 
Griffith 
Gustaviis 
Guy 

Hannibal 
Harold 
Heman 
Henry 
Herbert 
Herman 
Hirum 
Homer 
Horace 
Horatio 
Hosea 
Howell 
Hubert 
Hugh 


^J??v- 


^^^ 


Hugo 

Humphrey 

Isaac 

Isaiah 

Israel 

Ivan 

Ivory 

Jabez 

Jacob 

Jairus 

James 

Jared 

Jason 

Jasper 

Jeffrey 

Jeremiah 

Jerome 

Jesse 

Job 

Joel 

John 

Jonas 

Jonathan 

Joseph 

Joshua 

Josiah 

Julian 

Julius 

Justin 

Justus 

Laban    . 

Lambert 

Laurence 

Lazarus 

Leander 

Lemuel 

Leonard 

Leopold 

Levi 


124 


ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAXD. 


-^ 


Lewis 

Lionel 

Lorenzo 

Louis 

Lubin 

Lucius 

Luke 

Luther 

Lycurgus 
•  Marcellus 

Mark 

Martin 

Matthew 
^  Maurice 
.Meredith 
'Michael 

Miles 

Morgan 

Moses 

Naaman 

Nahum 

Napoleon 

Nathan 

Neal 

Nicholas 

Noah 

Noel 
-Norman 

Obed 

Octavius 

Oliver 
ll^Orestes 

Orlando 


L 


U^ 


Oscar 
Osmond 
Oswald 
Owen 
Ozias 
Patrick 
Paul 
Paulus 
Peter 
Philander 
Philemon 
Philip 
Phineas 
Quentin 
Ralph 
Randal 
Raphael 
-Raymond 
Reuben 
Richard 
Robert 
Roderick 
Rcdolph 
Roger 
Roland 
Rowland 
Rudolph 
Rufus 
Rupert 
'Sampson 
_Samuel 
'Saul 
'Sigismund 


^"^U 


Silas 
Silvester 
Simeon 
Simon 
Solomon 
Stephen 
Sylvanus 
Thaddeus 
Theobald 
Theodore 
Theophilus 
Theron 
Thomas 
Timothy 
Titus 
Tobias 
Tristam 
Ulysses 
Urban 
Uriah 
Valentine 
Victor 
Vincent 
Vivian  _ 
Walter' 
^Wallace 
Walker 
Washing- 
ton 
Wilbur 
William 
Willis 
Wilson 


NAMES   OF   THE    MONTHS   AND    DAYS    OF   THE    WEEK. 


January 
Febnuiry 
March 
April 


^ 


September 
October 
•  November 
December 


WEITING    EXERCISE. 


126 


"Sunday 
^Monday 
Tuesday 


Wednesday 
Tluirsdiiv 


Friday 
.Satnrdav 


NAMES   OF   THE    UNITED    STATES   AND    TEKIMTORIES. 


Alabama 

Arkansas 

Arizona 

California 

Colorado 

Connecticut 

Delaware 

Dist.  Columbia 

Florida 

Georgia 

Idaho 

Illinois 

Indiana 

Indian  Ter. 

Iowa 

Kansas 

Kentucky 

Louisiana 

Maine 

Maryland 

Massachusetts 

Michigan 

Minnesota 

Missouri 


Montana 

Nebraska 

Nevada 

New  Hampshire 

New  Jersey 

New  Mexico 

New  York 

North  Carolina 

North  Dakota 

Ohio 

Oregon 

Pennsylvania 

Bhode  Island 

South  Carolina 

South  Dakota 

Tennessee 

Texas 

Utah 

Vermont 

Virginia 

Washington 

West  Virginia 

Wisconsin. 

Wyoming 


WRITING   EXERCISE    OF   WORDS    ILLUSTRATING    COMPARA- 
TIVE   SIZES. 

Pay,  play,  pat,  patted,  go,  glow,  got,  goad,  goaded,  pea,  plea, 
pet,  petted,  glue,  gray,  grade,  graded,  great,  grated,  pray,  prate, 
prated,  hay,  hail,  hate,  hated,  high,  hill,  hide,  heated,  hair,  hurl, 
heart,  hearted,  lioar,  hoard,  hoarded,  wheel,  whet,  whetted,  why, 
while,  white,  whited,  shay,  shall,  shade,  shaded,  she,  shell,  sheet, 
sheeted,  show,  shoal,  shot,  shotted,  chew,  chill,  chide,  chided,  cheat, 
cheated,  foal,  foaled,  folded,  full,  fulled,  fell,  felled,  fail,  failed,  sail, 


126  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAND. 

salt,  salted,  seal,  sealed,  soil,  soiled,  mail,  malt,  malted,  meal,  melt, 
melted,  mile,  milled,  mold,  molded,  moulted,  wall,  walled,  well, 
welt,  welted,  will,  wilt,  wilted,  vail,  vault,  vaulted,  veil,  veiled, 
call,  called,  kill,  kilt,  Idlted,  coal,  cold,  cull,  culled,  fur,  furl, 
car,  carl,  careful,  cur,  curls,  bar,  barrel,  sore,  sorrel,  sorrowful, 
war,  warily,  wearily,  mar,  marl,  merely,  merrily,  near,  nearly, 
year,  yearly,  bare,  barely,  raid,  railed,  red,  reeled,  rod,  rolled, 
rude,  ruled,  raise,  rails,  rest,  reels,  rise,  rills,  rose,  rolls,  ruse,  rules, 
ream,  realm,  rent,  relent,  rely,  relied,  relies,  really,  relay,  relate, 
raise,  rails,  raids,  rates,  read,  reads,  ride,  rides,  rod,  rods,  reef,  relief, 
rock,  rollic,  reave,  relieve,  flay,  late,  flee,  lea,  fleet,  let,  fly,  lie,  light, 
flight,  flow,  low,  float,  lot,  flue,  loo,  lute,  flute,  her,  hurl,  hurled, 
stay,  state,  stated,  stow,  stowed,  stew,  stewed,  studied,  stray,  strayed, 
strew,  strewed,  steer,  sterile,  start,  starlit,  fay,  fame,  famine,  fie,  fine, 
foe,  foam,  foeman,  fee,  phenomenon,  phenomena,  eo,  come,  common, 
say,  same,  salmon,  sea,  seen,  seaman,  sue,  sum,  summon,  woe,  win, 
woman,  neigh,  gnat,  name,  knee,  neat,  neigh,  night,  nine,  no,  not, 
known,  new,  nut,  none,  they,  that,  than,  thee,  threat,  them,  then, 
though,  thought,  thumb,  day,  date,  damn,  die,  did,  dim,  dime,  din, 
do,  dot,  don,  due,  dud,  dumb,  bay,  bat,  ban,  bee,  beet,  bean,  by,  bit, 
been,  bow,  bought,  bono,  blow,  boo,  but,  bun,  blue,  tire,  tireless, 
up,  upon,  as,  assert,  ascent,  an,  and,  amen,  ache,  act,  again,  account, 
eve,  eft,  even,  at,  added,  atom,  are,  art,  arm,  ire,  irate,  iron, 
all,  ailed,  alone,  fully,  sally,  silly,  mealy,  slow,  slot,  slowly,  sly, 
slight,  slightly,  dash,  dashed,  ditch,  ditched,  cash,  cashed,  wash, 
washed,  wish,  wished,  witch,  witched,  match,  matched,  fish,  fished, 
fresh,  freshet,  gnash,  gnashed,  notch,  notched,  lash,  lashed,  leach, 
leached,  rush,  rushed,  reach,  reached,  botch,  botched,  crash, 
crashed,  crush,  crushed,  brush,  brushed,  gash,  gashed,  smash, 
smashed,  mash,  mashed,  snatch,  snatched,  smelt,  smelted,  swell, 
swelled,  dwell,  dwelt,  twill,  twilled,  goal,  gold,  gall,  galled,  peel, 
peeled,  poll,  polled,  pull,  pulled,  pall,  palled,  maul,  mauled,  name, 
gnat,  nay,  may,  man,  mammon,  nine,  night,  nigh,  my,  mine,  mini- 
mum, known,  not,  know,  mow,  moon,  damn,  date,  day,  say,  same, 
salmon,  than,  that,  they,  fa,  fame,  famine,  a,  and,  amen,  eve,  eft, 
even,  up,  upward,  upon,  ache,  act,  again,  it,  item,  are,  art,  arm, 
east,  essence,  ape,  apt,  appear,  apart,  sees,  uses,  used,  hope, 
hoped,  ham,  hand,  him,  hint,  hum,  hunt,  heave,  heaved,  heaven. 


OHAPTEB-  YJJ. 


PHEASE-WRITING. 
LESSON  XXVIIL 

1.  In  speaking,  many  phrases  are  uttered  rapidly  and 
in  a  continued  tone,  as  if  by  a  single  impulse  of  the 
voice.  Such  phrases  are  often  written  without  lifting  the 
pen,  the  Avords  being  united,  in  imitation  of  speech. 
The  saving  of  movements  in  lifting  the  pen  from  word 
to  word  is  a  practical  argument  in  favor  of  phrase- 
writing;  moreover,  well-constructed  phrases  are  perfectly 
legible. 

2.  In  this  system,  phrases  are  constructed  by  four 
different  methods. 

FIRST   METHOD    OF   PHRASE    WRITING. 

3.  This  method  comprises  phrases  of  two  words, 
iu  wliich  the  lust  word  is  a  or  an,  the  or  he  or  me, 
I  or  my,  to,  you  ;  as,  for  a,  for  an,  for  the,  for  he, 
for  me  ;  all  such  phrases  are  written  by  adopting  as  a 
word-sign  the  character  which  writes  the  first  word  of 
the  phrase,  which  sign  is  written  on  the  several  positions 
to  denote  the  addition  of  the  words  a  or  an,  the,  I, 
to,  you;  thus  b,  which  is  used  as  a  word-sign  for  by,  is 
written  on  the  first  position  for  by  a,  on  the  second  posi- 
tion for  by  the,  on  the  fifth  position  for  by  you.    D, 


128  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

used  as  a  sign  for  do,  is  written  on  the  first  position  for 
do  a,  on  the  second  position  for  do  the,  on  the  third 
position  for  do  I,  on  the  fourth  position  for  do  to,  and 
on  the  fifth  position  for  do  you.  The  words  by  and 
do  are  called  phrase-words,  the  words  a,  an,  the, 
I,  to,  two,  you,  are  called  position  phrase-words, 
and  the  written  character  is  called  a  phrase-sign. 

4.  The  phrase-words  which  are  represented  by  signs 
and  used  in  this  method  of  phrase-writing  are  given 
in  the  following  columns: 

LIST     OF     PHRASE-WORDS     AND     SIGNS     OF      THE     FIRST 

METHOD. 

—  done  y  is  ^  ship 

-^  don't  ^  just  ~~^  such 

- — &        for  know  '  tell 

,  from  ^  let  ^^  that 

^-^  get,  got  ^-,  mail  . — >  through 

<-'  give  nor  /to 

O'  gone  . ,  not  _,--^  were 

o  how  /^  of  cy  what 

O  had  /  on  cf —  when 

^-^^         have  /^  or  a  where 

^       if  /  over  ^  will 

y  in  /^  paid  p  write 

Practice  these  phrase  signs  until  they  are  very  familiar 
to  you. 

Rule  13. 

5.     Position -phrase    writing, — 

Write  phrase-word  signs  of  the  first  method  on 
the  1,  2,  3,  4  and  5  positions  to  add  the  words 
a  or  an,  the,  I,  to,  you. 


POSITIO^^-PHRASE   WRITIXG. 


129 


6.    Remark, — Except  the  words  before,  if,  have, 

as,  all,  in  the  above  list,  each  sign  clearly  suggests 
the  word  which  it  represents.  If  is  represented  by  f, 
instead  of  i,  because  i  is  used  for  is  and  cannot 
represent  two  signs;  1,  instead  of  a,  is  used  for  all, 
because  upward  a  is  used  for  at;  v  is  used  instead 
of  h  for  have,  because  h  is  used  for  how;  z  is 
used  instead  of  a  for  as,  because  a  is  used  in  writ- 
ing several  words,  viz, :  as,  a,  an,  and,  am,  all, 
are,  at. 

1.  In  the  following  table,  each  group  contains  first 
the  phrase-word,  then  the  position  phrase-words,  and 
last  the  written  phrases.  The  phrases  in  the  first  group 
are  after  a,  after  an,  after  the,  after  I,  after  you. 

TABLE    OF   FIRST   METHOD    PHRASES. 


after 


all 


and 


'  a-an 

c 

a-an 

the 

I 

at 

the 

'  I 

-<r- 

.  you 

.  you 

C 

'  a-an 
the 

.  I 
to 

.  you 

^ 

^ 

before  < 

'  a-an 
the 
I 

.  you 

^ 

'  a-an 

'  a-an 

r 

the 

the 
"  I 

.  you 

f 

but  < 

I 

to 

f 

you 

a-an 

/'^ 

c        ^  ^ 

the 

^ 

l,v    \ 

a-an 
the 

to 
.  you 

^ 

■     \ 

.  you 

a-an 

— -^ 

'  a-an 

the 

— ..,__^^ 

the 

-  I 



can 

I 

to 

-■^^^^-^ 

to 

.  you 

~~"^ 

^  you 

do 


for 


from 


f'lve 


a-an 

the  — 

I  '*— 

to  ■ — 

L  you  ■ — 

f  a-an 

I   the  ' 

to 

I  you  - 

{a-an  "'*" 

the  ;^ 

you  ' 

{a-an  ^ 

the  O 

to  ^ 

you  Ly 

fa-an  <^ 

the  <- 

to  <- 

you  O 


130 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 


f  a-an 
I    the 


had 


\l 


if 


just 


to 
you 


how    ■< 


have 


O 
O 
0 
O 
O 


know    ' 


u-an 

c 

the 

o 

I 

-Or- 

to 

0 

you 

0 

of 


a  an 

the 

I 

to 

you 

f  a-an 
j   the 

you 

a-an 
the 
to 
you 

(  a-an 
I   the 

<   I 
I   to 

I  you 

f  a-an 

j   the 
\   two 

I  you 

a-an 

the 
two 

I  you 

a-an 

the 

I 

two 

you 


f  a-an 

I   the 
]  to-two 

I  you 


/ 

/ 
/ 

/ 


paid 


to 


that 


what 


when 


where  - 


n 


c 
a 


c/ 

d 

of 


KEVIEW  QUESTIONS. 

What  is  phrase-writing  ?  What  fact  in  favor  of 
phrase-writing  ?  How  many  methods  of  phrase-writing 
are  used  in  this  system?  What  phrases  are  written  by 
the  first  method  ?  How  are  they  written  ?  Re^Jeat  the 
list  of  phrase-words  used  in  the  first  method.  Eejieat 
the  rule.     What  phrase-words  of  this  method  are  repre- 


SECOND   METHOD   PHRASE-WRITING.  131 

sented  by  arbitrary  signs  ?  Give  the  rousons  for  each 
arbitrary  sign.  What  is  a  phrase-word  ?  What  is  a 
phrase  position-word  ?  What  is  a  phrase-word  sign  ? 
What  is  a  phrase- sign  ? 

LESSON  XXIX. 

SECOND   METHOD   OF   PHRASE-WRITING, 

1.  This  method  comprises  phrases  of  three  words,  the 
first  and  last  words  being  the  same,  while  the  middle 
word  is  a  preposition  or  conjunction. 

2.  In  these  plirases  the  first  word  is  written  on  its 
proper  position;  the  second  word  is  omitted,  and  the 
third  word  is  written  close  by,  or  attached  to,  the  first,  to 
indicate  the  omission  of  the  middle  word;  as,  by  and  by 
is  expressed  by  writing  b  on  y  position  for  by  and  the 
last  word  written  close  by  it. 

3.  The  connectives  to  and  and  are  generally  indi- 
cated by  uniting  the  first  and  last  word  of  the  phrase, 
while  by  and  after  are  shown  by  writing  the  first  and 
last  words  near  together. 

TABLE    OF    SECOND    METHOD    PHRASES. 

One  by  one  ^^  broader  and  broader 

day  by  day  oO'  higher  and  liigher 

day  to  day  — rr-~o  nearer  and  nearer 

•day  after  day  - — S*— ^  dearer  and  dearer 

over  and  over  «=»— <2 — '  leg^  jmd  less 

ever  and  ever  o"     ''  more  and  more 

forever  and  ever  /^s*  all  in  all 

by  the  by  ^ — ^^_  each  to  each 

by  and  by  -,^_^  out  and  out 

better  and  better  -..^^  hour  by  hour 

brighter  and  brighter     ^^  lower  and  lower 


132  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


time  to  time  ff  again  and  again 

wider  and  wider  jj  item  by  item 

farther  and  farther         /^/°  older  and  older 


KEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

What  kind  of  phrases  are  comprised  in  the  second 
method?  What  is  omitted  in  writing  these  phrases? 
How  are  the  omitted  words  rejoresented?  What  omitted 
word  is  expressed  by  joining  the  first  and  last  words? 
What  omitted  words  are  suggested  by  disconnecting 
the  first  and  last  Avords?  Repeat  the  phrases  of  this 
method. 

LESSON"  XXX. 

THIRD    METHOD    OF    PHRASE-WRITING. 

1.  This  method  consists  in  attaching  the  signs  of  sev- 
eral phrase-words  together. 

2.  For  this  method  of  phrasing,  signs  are  used  to 
represent  the  most  common  words,  these  signs  being  the 
characters  which  are  used  on  position  to  write  the  words; 
thus,  S,  written  on  the  several  j)ositions,  expresses  the 
words  say,  see,  sigh,  so,  sue,  all  of  which,  except 
sigh,  are  frequent  words,  likely  to  occur  in  many 
phrases,  and  s,  as  their  representative,  becomes  a  valu- 
able sign. 

3.  The  words  in  the  following  list,  used  as  phrase- 
words,  are  of  frequent  occurrence  in  common  phrase- 
ology and  are,  therefore,  represented  by  suggestive  signs 
to  be  used  as  phrase-word  signs,  the  sign  in  each  case 
being  the  character  or  characters  which  are  used  posi- 


THIRD   METHOD    PHEASE-WRITING. 


133 


fcionally  in  writing  the  words  for  which  it  is  used  as  a 
phrase-word  sign.  Each  sign  is  used  for  the  common 
words,  which  it  expresses  when  written  on  the  several 
positions,  with  the  exception  of  d,  for  the,  thy, 
though,  d  minute  for  them,  then,  than,  and  dr 
for  there,  which  are  used  only  after  an  ujpward  character 
when  th  would  not  unite  readily,  and  you  must  become 
perfectly  familiar  with  each  sign  and  the  phrase-words 
for  which  it  stands,  because  such  familiarity  is  not  only 
necessary  to  become  a  rapid  writer,  but  is  equally  impor- 
tant in  ready  reading. 

4.  Two  or  more  phrase-word  signs  united  become  a 
phrase-sign, 

5.  Let  the  teacher  thoroughly  drill  the  pupil  on  this 
list  of  words  and  signs,  so  that  he  will  at  sight  of 
the  phrase-sign  recall  the  words  which  the  sign  repre- 
sents. 


LIST   OF   THIRD    METHOD    PHRASE-WORDS    AND    SIGN'S. 


SIGNS.  PHRASE-WORDS. 

a  (up) — a. 

a  (down) — as. 

at  (up) — at. 

at  (down)— about,  apt. 

an  (down) — and,  again. 

an  (up) — a,  am. 

athr — another. 

art  I ,  invvn"* abroad,  aboard, 

ard  S  afraid,  afford. 

atr — after. 

ast-as  it. 

agt — act. 

asg— ask. 

ashn — action. 

b— be,  by,  buy. 


SIGNS.  PHRASE-WORDS. 

bt— bad,  but,  bought. 

br — bear,  bare,  buyer,  bore. 

brt— bright,  brought. 

bst— best. 

bl — blow,  believe,  belief. 

bn — been. 

b  (heavy)  -  business. 

c — could. 

cr — care,  car. 

cl— call,  kill. 

cm-n — came,  can,  come. 

crm — cream,  crime. 

d — dav,  die,  do,  due. 

d — the,  thy,  though. 

dd— did,  dead,  debt. 


134 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


dm-n — deem,  done, 

dm-n — them,  then 

dr — draw,  dry,  drew. 

dr — dare,  dear,  dire. 

drm-n — drawn,  drain. 

dtr — debtor. 

ds  (minute  loop) — days,  does,  dies. 

e — ease,  each. 

et — eat,  east. 

en — even. 

er— ever. 

er — either. 

f — if,  few. 

fr — before,  free. 

fr — far,  fare,  fair,  fear,  fire,  for. 

fm-n — fame,  fine,  fun, 

frg — forgive-gave. 

frm— frame,  from. 

fnr— finer. 

fl— fill,  file,  full,  fall,  fell,  feel. 

fct — fact. 

fctr — factor. 

ft — fat,  feet,  fight,  fought,  foot. 

g— gave,  give,  go. 

gr — grew,  grow. 

gt-d — get,  got,  God,  good. 

grt — great. 

g^-m — gain,  game,  gone. 

gm — grain,  green,  grown. 

h — he,  how,  high,  who. 

ha — has,  happy. 

he— he. 

hi — his. 

hi  (minute  i) — him. 

ho— hope,  home. 

hd — had,  head,  hit,  hot. 

hr — hear,  here,  higher,  her. 

hrd— hard,  heard,  hired. 

hi— hall,  hail,  he'll. 

Jie  (minute  e)— heaven. 


i— I,  eye. 

it  (short  i) — it. 

in  (minute  i) — in. 

ist— is  it? 

j— just,  judge,  gentlemen. 

jr— jury. 

1— all,  will. 

It— late,  let,  light,  lot. 

Id— laid,  led,  lead,  load. 

m — may,  me,  my. 

mk— make. 

mr — mar,  mere,  more,  Mr. 

mm— man,  men,  mean,  mine. 

mnr — manner,  minor,  meaner. 

mshn — motion. 

n — no,  know,  now. 

nt— not. 

nd— and. 

nr — near,  nor,  no  sir. 

nl — knowledge. 

nn   (minute    n)  —  name,    none, 

known. 
nvr — never. 

o  (downwards) — on,  one,  own. 
o  (upwards) — off,  of. 
or  (downwards)— offer,  over. 
or  (upwards) — other. 
out — out. 
our — our. 
p— pay. 

pr — par,  peer,  pour, 
pt-d — pet,  put,  paid, 
pi— play,  plea,  ply. 
pn — pain,  pen. 
q — question, 
qr— queer,  quire, 
r — are,  her,  our,  or,  were, 
s— say,  see,  so,  sue. 
sh — she,  show,  much. 
shd — shade,  shed,  should. 


THIRD    METHOD    PHEASE-WORDS. 


135 


shl — shall,  shell,  shoal. 
shr — share,  shear,  shore,  sure. 
si — slay,  sleigh,  sly,  slow, 
si — sole,  sell. 

sm— same,  seem,  some,  sum. 
sn — sun,  son,  soon,  seen,  sign. 
snr — sinner,  summer. 
snr — snare,  sneer,  snore. 
sr — sir,  sore. 

sd  (loop) — said,  side,  sued,  seed. 
st — stay. 

stl — stale,  steal,  steel,  still,  stole. 
stt — state,  stood,  stout. 
sttd — stated, 
str — stray. 

str — star,  store,  steer,  stear. 
strt — straight,  street,  strut. 
t — to,  too,  two. 
tr — try,  true,  tree. 
tr — tare,  tear,  tier,  tire,  tour. 
th — the,  though, they, thou. 
thr — three,  through. 
thr — there. 

thrt — threat,  thread,  throat. 
thn-m — than,  then,  them,  thin, 
thine,  thumb. 


thnk — think,  thank. 

ths — this,  these,  those,  thus. 

th.t — that,  thought. 

u— up,  you. 

ur — your,  you  are. 

us — us,  use. 

urd — upward. 

V — have. 

vl  (minute  retracing)—- evil. 

vn — vain. 

vs — viz.,  vase,  views,  voice,  vice. 

w — would,  with,  we,  way,  will. 

win — within. 

wn — wan,  wane,  wen,  win,  won, 

one. 
wm — warm,  warn,  worm,  worn, 
pr— pray,  pry. 
ws — was,  wise,  woes. 
wsh — wish. 
xn — examine. 
xmnr — examiner, 
ys— yes. 

yrs — years,  yours. 
ysr — yes  sir. 
z — as,  is. 


6.  Write  the  following  i^hrases  for  your  teacher's  cor- 
rections and  suggestions: 

By  all.  Buy  them.  Be  there  then.  Can  you  come?  Not  now. 
In  time.  In  the  meantime.  In  due  time.  Do  so.  Do  not.  Do 
this.  It  is.  Is  it  ?  Is  it  as?  It  is  a.  Is  it  as  a?  Is  it  a  good  day? 
Is  it  done?  Is  this?  Is  free.  Do  not  fear.  Each  of  you.  Each 
one.  One  more.  But  few.  When  can  you  go?  Let  us  know. 
Let  us  be.  Let  us  have.  Let  us  see.  Let  me  go.  It  is  too  far. 
See  how  near  you  can.  See  how  soon  you  can.  See  here.  It  is 
liere.  See  how.  For  fear  that.  Far  from  that.  Take  them. 
Can't  have.  Set  it  down.  Put  it  down.  Give  me  time.  Give  me 
time  to  think.     I  think  so.     I  think  not.     I  think  that.     I  think 


136  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

you  will.  What  is  it?  What  is  that?  What  is  there?  I  wish  so. 
I  wish  that.  I  saw  him.  I  want  you.  I  want  it.  I  want  that,  I 
want  them.  I  want  these.  As  soon  as.  As  much  as.  As  far  as. 
As  well  as.     As  good  as.     In  a  few  days. 

KEVIEW   QUESTIONS. 

In  what  does  the  3d  method  of  phrase-writing  con- 
sist? What  signs  are  used  for  this  method?  For  what 
words  is  the  character  a  nsed  as  a  sign?  For  w^hat  words 
is  modified  a  used?  For  what  words  is  b  used?  For 
what  words  is  each  alphabetic  character  used?  What  is 
a  phrase-sign?  What  is  a  phrase-word?  What  is  a 
phrase-word  sign?    Eepeat  the  rules  for  phrase-writing. 

FOURTH   METHOD   OF    PHRASE-WRITING. 

1.  This  method  consists:  first,  in  the  combination  of 
two  or  of  the  three  methods  already  explained;  as,  in  the 
phrase  do  you  see  him;  do  you  is  represented  by 
d  on  u  position,  and  the  words  see  him  are  each  repre- 
sented by  signs  of  the  3d  method.  In  the  phrase  by 
the  by,  by  the  is  written  by  b  on  e  position  according 
to  the  first  method,  and  b  attached  for  by,  according 
to  the  3d  method. 

2.  It  consists:  second,  in  combining  with  the  signs  of 
either  or  of  all  of  the  three  methods  suggestive  outlines 
of  words  which  are  not  embraced  in  either  of  the  lists. 
Illustrations  of  such  phrases  abound  in  the  following 
lists. 

3.  The  following  rules  should  be  adhered  to  as  closely 
as  possible  in  the  construction  of  all  phrases. 


KULES  FOR  PHRASING.  137 

KULES  FOR  GENEEAL  PHRASING. 

Rule  I.  All  phrases  are  begun  by  writing 
the  first  word  of  the  phrase  as  if  no  other 
signs  were  to  be  attached  to  it. 

Rule  II.  Unite  only  such  words  as  utter- 
ance and  punctuation  indicate  have  a  natural 
connection;  except  in  very  familiar  phrases; 
as,  Dear  Sir;  Your  letter  of  the. 

Rule  III.  In  phrases  of  fi-equent  occur- 
rence, w^ords  which  are  clearly  indicated  by  the 
context  may  be  safely  omitted;  as,  Your  letter 
of  the  fifth  instant,  may  be  written.  Your  letter 
fifth;  Where  do  you  reside,  may  be  written. 
Where  reside;  What  is  your  name,  age,  resi- 
dence, and  occupation,  may  be  written,  W^hat's 
name  age  resnpshn. 

Rule  IV.  Do  not  write  an  unsuggestive 
isign  of  a  word  in  a  ])hrase ;  rather  lift  the  pen 
and  write  the  doubtful  word  on  its  proper 
position. 

Rule  V.  In  phrasing  the  word  you,  use 
either  the  character  u  or  y,  whichever  makes 
the  better  joining  with  the  preceding  character, 
and  for  the  word  your  use  either  the  shaded 
u  or  y,  depending  on  the  connection.     Also 


138  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

for  the  words  is  and  as,  use  downward  i  and 
a,  or  Zj  whichever  is  more  easily  written. 

Rule  VI.  If  the  significance  of  a  sign  is 
doubtful, — as  the  phrase  I  saw  him  may  be 
read  I  see  him  or  I  say  him, — indicate  the 
vowel  sound  of  the  doubtful  w  ord  by  the  dia- 
critical dot ;  thus  a  dot  under  s,  in  the  phrase 
given,  would  make  it  read  I  saw  him,  Avhile 
a  dot  over  it  makes  it  read  I  say  him. 

4.  The  following  lists  of  phrases,  which  are  given  to 
illustrate  the  art  of  phrase-writing  and  to  prepare  the 
student  for  practical  work,  should  be  thoughtfully,  as 
well  as  rapidly,  practiced. 

5.  Each  phrase  is  first  written  in  full  in  shorthand 
characters,  and  then  phrased,  that  you  may  see  clearly 
the  difference  in  the  two  methods  of  writing.  In  prac- 
ticing, write  both  methods,  devoting  much  more  time 
to  the  phrased  outlines.  In  other  works,  the  phrases 
are  printed  in  Roman  type,  instead  of  being  fully  written 
out  in  shorthand.  Having  thoroughly  studied  the  pre- 
ceding part  of  the  book,  you  ought  to  be  able  easily  to 
read  the  written  phrases,  and,  although  to  some  students 
it  might  seem  easier  if  they  were  given  in  Roman  instead 
of  shorthand  characters,  tlie  advantages  of  this  method 
will,  I  think,  soon  become  apparent  to  you.  If  you  have 
any  trouble  in  reading  the  phrases,  you  will  find  in  this 
method  a  double  benefit. 


After 


PHRASES. 

COMMON"  PHRASES. 


139 


At 


140 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAlfD. 
At  Chief 


V 


"=^ 


•^^    ■— -'    ''f 


^\ 


^T 


^==^^"7" 


ran 


"    "^v^.,-'^ ^ 


-4- 


-^ 


-^ 


ilL 


-^rrz 


-e 


I  I 


M 


Ly 


o' 


S^ 


/^ 


r 


7^ 


7" 


^ 


^-^5^ 


,/-^ 


PHKASES. 


141 


.ZL. 


-~P^._g 


^ 


J- 


-~^J>. 


^ 


S±- 


7 y — "^ ^ 


ST 


-^ 


-y 


"^ 


T^ 


-^     X3^S^ 


"b 


142 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


PHRASES. 


143 


-27=3? 


'.^^ 


144 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


I  should 


PHRASES. 


145 


It 


f     - 


"^=T 


iJ^. 


Keep 


I_ 


^=Z 


"^ 


JL 


Z^ 


^ 


I^ 


Ly' 


-r 


^^ 


j^ 


~^^ 


/  ^ 


-^ 


JL 


^ 


^ 


j_ 


^^ 


^ 


-^ 


^ 


lL^ 


^ 


^^^2:^ 


^ 


y. 


146 


,,^ 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 
Kinds  Many 


-=?:- 


-A- 


-^ 


7^ 


-p' 


X. 


--  /^^ 


^    " --^ 


£:^ 


^^ 


^sS- 


t:^ 


^:?^ 


.£?^ 


.:??' 


J^ 


^iS? 


X 


.^^ 


^.  (^ 


(f<f 


cy 


j^ 


^^^^ 


^ 


-^--- 


^ 


ji^ 


,^?--^-. 


_^_1 


^ 


.^A 


^' 


^A 


/f\^ 


J2^^ 


— w-^^- 


_^_1 


r 


..  A-^ 


•^  r /^    "  ^<^ 


^'  f  i>' — "  /ye/ 


r 


-d- 


"  /-^ 


^ 


"==3 


PHRASES. 


147 


Hay 


No 


Ji^ 


T^ 


r-^ 


^ 


-X. 


:2L 


T 


/     Ly 


--v^ 


o 


J^ 


~T 


=^^^^ 


148 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


No 


Or 


n. 


r 


-1^ 


/ 


"7 


'^-T 

n 


~7^ 


t 


-^^ 


/ 


L. 


T 


-J^ 


T 


"^7 


PHRASES. 


149 


.^^i 


TTT- 


y'^hr 


T 


-^-^ — ''   /2^- 


7  T 


7^ 


^^-7^ 


^Q^ 


T 


/ 


/ 


rrn 


~7'a 


J 


.^I 


/ 

7" 


o 


~E 


(^ 


y 


..^^ 


7^ 


X 

V 


^ 


'-^ 


150 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 


Put 


Said 


Or 


"^-^ 


f 


^ 


^ 


^^       'V 


i2_ 


e — •  ..   C) — 


-^ 


a_=i# 


Q— gg' 


^-^ 


o. — ^ 


y—y "     9^^ 

9     ^_^     '•     2-^ 


9-& 


-t=^ 


T 


^-f- 


^r 


9     ^ri 

-i^ ^ 


-^ 


-g^ 


-x: 


SL 


<a>-.-r<. 


Q^ 


,^'-  ^r^''-    — ^ 


PHRASES. 


151 


Say 


Stand 


153 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


Take 


Usual 


♦o-v 


X    -      .^ 


PHRASES. 


153 


Value 


Why 


O'       '      v^ 


154 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 
Why  Your 


According' 


PHRASES. 

BUSINESS   PHRASES. 


155 
Daily 


-y^ 


■M- 


■f- 


^ 


•^-^  a'>    J'      ^f — =^ 


/^' 


^V 


^^ 


^^,^^^--^9 


//  ^^ 


Cy 


-M. — «- 


-^ 


-,^ 


L c^^ 


^^ 


,4L 


cy- 


^ 


-^T^ 


JL 


-7^ 


/- 


-.^ 


y 


rL 


/  -J  •'  .^ 


-X- 


/^ 


^^^ 


-v<^ 


"^ 


JL- 


^o^'^X. 


^T-r 


JL 


i2_ 


//    ^ 


:\..^ 


i2. 


//     Y?— 


-,4i^ 


^ 


^„^    //' 


B^ 


C  n  D   ^  /  ^ 


>^- 


^ 


.^ 


.r^ 


/' 


.^^ 


^ 


"^^^T" 


-^T- 


-^2L 


156 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 
Deferred  Inclosed 


.'         *^ 


-M- 


r^r^^^ 


^:ZM- 


-£I. 


'^  ^   .   ^- 


PHEASES. 


157 


7^-^ 

y---. 


In 

// 


-^ 


7?.  . 


Please 


-^^-^ 


'-^-^y/i. 


cr 


7-^-^ 


.^L- 


Ji:- 


^^^T 


.j!/L^ 


-/- 


^h-^ 


y- 


j:^ 


-^  o    ^ 


^     \    c //^      . 


l>^ 


^^. 


->^a^^^ 


J^_^_ 


'-'-^~ 


^ 


■^ 


-,^-^ 


-^ 


'■y^^—y^' 


158 


OC-4A- 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 
Please  Very 


-^ 


<? — ?>• 


/tcr~Ti 


-^ 


*>r 


QP-7~r 


Jz. 


.-»^ 


'^^ 


,-^^ 


^=:; 


-.^ 


^  ^-.^  ^. 


/-i^^^  _< 


.5L_ 


.^tf^  ^ — :^  ^-^  ^^-tO 


j/^ 


-^=:^ 


^--g  ^ 


,^a^-^ 


^ 


CP^ 


^■^=x. 


^> 


-t^ 


//  ^tn 


/ 


^/^ 


"'^^z 


c^ 


^ 


-v^ ^ 


c^ 


-^ 


7^ 

7^ 


JZL 


-/^ 


-"^>r 


-,42L 


--^ 


21 


2^ 


_^^ 


f 


-jiZ- 


-^ 


2U 


JE. 


^^^~~&- 


^ 


//  <r~^--^ 


uZ^ 


^ — ft* 


^-^=^ =^»^ 


CT^ 


PHRASES. 


159 


_3v: 


Was 


Yours 


Tn^ 


160 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


Are 


LEGAL   PHRASES. 


Did 


/      <.-^. 


PHRASES. 


161 


Ho-wr 


/  /   ^  / ^^-^-^ — ^ 


-7^ 


%^ 


^_1 IL 


v-^ 


^:l^ 


./V^. 


I  o — J$'fr->^ 


T7- 


163 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 
I  Kno-wr 


PHRASES. 


163 


May 


JSd^ 


Rebutting- 


^ 


O 


•s-^ 
^ 


..9^ 


-i- 


7^ 


-n 


■^ 


of—/ 


7^ 


-7^ 


>' 


164 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


Be-direct 


CHAPTER  YIII. 


GKADED  EEADING  AND  WEITING  EXERCISES. 

The  Old  Oak  Tree, 

— ^^    ,^    ^   ^ i-J^ ^ ^        .^  ^^ 


wV^ 


/ 
-7^ 


-7^-h 


/'    ^    ^ 


^     I^ 


,^=^ 


c 


-& 


// 


"^^'^ 


/ 


-7^-^-^ 


P 


'      ^        ^ 


.j^ 


.eix 


'  ^^" 


■Tzf^ ^^T^ 


^^^ 


■^V^ 


-7^ 


:>  ^^^^ 


/ 


I     e 
—f — & 


-O- 


^ 


^ 


.^iL. 


-^-^ 


C 


165 


-U 


166 


ECLECTIC  SHORTHAND. 


■7^ 


-^^^ 


-f ^ 


Jt^ 


z. 


A^=^ 


-_Zd_ 


JL. 


/O 


•—a 


7^^ 


^  •  V^ 


^  ^  / 


r2_ 


.^ ^ 


.^ii. 


/ c- 


^ 


■^ 


ZL 


/^ 


^^^-^ 


-^ 


-^i- 


"^^^5^ 


■^^-^-»^ 


"=^ 


^v  •>^-'  ?  r  ^ 


//  //  .  ^  J 


-^ 


•  -,  // 


r-z^ 

7   ^  .^^y. 


>  -^/ 


7-rr 


-/£- 


^ 


<^y^^y ' 


V 


Ul. 


> 


"^ 


V 
.^^ 


GRADED    READING   AND   WRITING    EXERCISES.       167 


The  Hose  and  Clay. 


-A 


/    V 


^ 


^  .  J  -^  .    J 


^  I 7" 


-^ 


y 


^f^ 


-M. ry    , 


-& 


T 


~^^ 


^"^  </ 


JL 


^ 


.^^ 


u 


The  One  and  Calf, 


-^ 


/ 


-/^h^ 


~r 


/ 


-7^ 


y_L 


^ 


~l 


-^ 


168 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


j:z 


~^ 


/ 


/  -y 


^ 


~7~^ 


'^ 


The  Old  Dame  arid  31aids, 


u 


•/- 


"Z" 


-{- 


TTy-v- 


■^     <:^ 


,.? ^ 


o 


-f-^ 


^^:^^ 


/  9   ^^    O    . 


I 


^ 


=± 


^^ 


^^ 


^ 


-M- 


9 


c^ 


■^^^ 


The  Bees  and  Snail. 


Y^-^^ 


c^ 


-^-f — ^-^ 


GKADED    EEADING   AXD    WKITIN'G    EXERCISES.       169 


_y 


--^ 


^-^ 


\ 


-^ 


~7 


^^ 


^-0 


_^ 


-^ 


O 


-^ 


// 


^_1 


-7^ 


/  ^  > 


cy 


•-^    r    ^   V 


^'^  r y- 


-Qi- 


.(L 


^ 


~^ 


V 


-^ 


The  Wolf  and  Fo.jb. 


^=^^r-^ 


'  -y  ^^ 


-Z 


<7  o  ^^^ 


^ 


.  ^. 


"TT" 


170 


ECLECTIC    SHOETHAND. 


/      ^      ^^ 


^ 


^ 


-^ 


O 


9--^ 


-6=^ 


.^.    o  // 


-± 


C^^  / 


-A 


O 


r  J)    f 


The  Fly  and  Ant, 


-y^^=^ 


;^ 


^^ 


cT 


y^   ^y 


.a^ 


'/         ^  /'^ 27 

— ...^^ 


^ry     /  // 


K   .  ^ 


^N^ 


7^ 


-^^ — c^- 


>*   ^tp 


tT 


J 
T^^^-. 


/^ 


GRADED    HEADING    AND    WKITING    EXERCISES.       171 


"XT 


/  n^    //J 


Ly 


3—  ■ 


-^-^ 


y^ 


'<r 


cD 


\-      ^'  ^ 


^  ^ 


v^ 


Ly 


The  Hart  and  Vine, 


'Y- 


-^-o- 


-Z_ 


o 


^ 


-^ 


-Q-^ 


-O^ 


9 


-^ — ^ 


o 


/ 


'^ 


iT 


^=^ 


-tr^ 


<- 


^-y 


-  o 


^'lo)  j;,^)ro 


172 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


The  Last  Rose  of  Sunifner, 

^  ^ —         ^ 


"7: 


^ 


"^^ 


J2L 


c^ 


{    ^    ^^ 


^ 


-   ^  / 


y 


..-^n 


y 


-5=^ 


..-^^ ^^ 


o^ 


^ 


.  '^  / 


-^ 


"^r 


/-^ 


.^ y^ 


~r 


The  Girl  and  Chickens. 


-5^-^ 


.-<ii_ 


•    r  ^--^ 


^ 


'  ^-^^ 


Z^ 


K  ^^  r  *—^  ^^^^^J  '^  y  ■p  y ^ 


N. 


GRADED    READING    AJTD    AVRITING    EXERCISES.       173 


-^r-/- 


-y-  - 


V 


T^ 


^2- 


^  -^  -^  y 


^x^'^ 


>» 


^ 


yr- 


T"^ :^ 


.^. 


't.^'-^'^ 


/    ^       g 


.g-^ 


_^ 


^-^^-^^    .•" 


fr-    // 


^ 


O        -^     ty ^ 


^ 


7 


~7~7^ 


■  V  ^ 


A. 


-*s- 


..^. 


-^"-7 


.^^ 


/ 


The  New  Frock, 


-f 


-^-^ 


^'^-.t^S- 


^ 


7^ 


■:^-z7=' 


^ 


^         / 


^ 


174 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 


-4^ 


^       A 

y^;^^-  f. 


f^  "r  ^ 


^^^ 


-^ 


...cz. 


^NiH 


^ 


z 


-^-^ 


/ 


^  / 


^^.-z 


c   ,^ 


UJ- 


^ 


-^ 


^      <■   y^ 


7^ 


z-^    ^^ 


^  ^ 


c/ 


^Sr 


-^^-^ 


"Z 


V- 


^^  f^ 


Bread  and  Butter. 


'^=:^ 


■^/-^ 


^     '   ^   --    • 


JL ^    i.r'  <^ 


'■^   ^    ^^  -T5-    (^  ^^ 


g^  .K-t? 


"^=?^ 


^^^-'-' 


^ 


T     T 


^    ^   ^ 


-cr^ 


^^ 


GRADED    READING    AND   AVKITIN(i    EXERCISES.       175 


J   - 


A^ 


^v^- 
^^/^^ 


-& 


^/-^/  / 


T 


i- 


L 


o 


2-J- 


^  or  <}    ^^-^^ 


-^ 


-V 


j?  (f"    .^^r  . 


L. c_ 


/( ,. 


-^ — 7- 


^ 

v^.      J^ 


'^^ 


-^ 


■^ 


/  r 


■v^ 


A^ 


/  s> 


-^--^ 


7^ 


-?^ 


-1^ 


^  ^^ 


-s*- 


V^A 


^7 /   'i/l^ 


5     2x^~7 
}9-^ '  '     v.,  * 


TT 


-^^ 


T 


-^ 


^ 


<r-6 


3z 


V- 


^'^'^/'^r< 


T-n^ 


-^ 


-d=^ 


"T" 


^ 


-7^-^ 


176 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAN^D. 


Lecture  on  Shirt  Buttons. 


/ 


■^  '>= 


A     ^ 


^ J*" 


-^ 


■::^ 


W'i::;^^ 


.z^ 


-/—r 


V- 


f 


^^V^ 


-yii- 


A. 


.^ 


--^^ 


^ 


-o 


"-^^ 


J=^ 


L- 


TI 


-jU- 


nH^ 


-v^ 


r 


^-^ 


J  ^ 


-^ 


/  -^ 


^A  ^ 


V 


o'         -^ 


-^ 


-4^ 


^— V  ' 


/ 


^ 


'^'  Jr.    J 


c^  Z. 


^y 


^  7 

Y ■  /       ^  ^    / 


5> 


/ 


-t- 


■^ 


GEADED   READIXG   AXD   WRITIXG   EXERCISES.      17"? 


-f- 


^    . —  '   ,^ 


-^ 


//    y 


•^     .-     >> 


^^'/J^ 


9 

o 


~^^ 


-^^ 


9 


-^^-^ 


-^ ^  }^ fc- 


p // 


^ 


-Y-r 


j- 


<^  ,^   ^  J  ^^/ 


^ 


,^ 


9- 


^ 


^   ^     /. 


7 --^^^-^ 


-/^ 


/   ^   ^ 


// 


(  /  {  i   " "^  ^ 


"^ 


\ 


J^ 


-^ 


^ 


.   \ 


^ 


^ 


"X" 


9  '-^  ^  — ■z^^'-f- 


//  . 


j^ 


^^ 


7^ 


'"J        »-     .     -^^v^^/ 


178 


-t 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


JL. 


//    .- 


"^^ 


:z\ 


^ (L. 


ZJ 


JL 


^'    -^  J 


T 


./  y 


"^ 


^ 


ffC/^^rz.^  <-^x-^ 


./    c    /r ,r    . Z^   ~ 


~TZ 


Baby's  Soliloquy, 


"3^ 


^^^ 


>'  ^^_^/  ' 


-7 ^--^ 

cy  y — 


~f- 


/ 


^ 


'^Jh^  - 


-  ^   .,   .  ^  °^ 


<?- 


.^».  //  ^, 


z: 


-^^^ ^ 


-7<^ 


-P.  // 


V-T^ 


/^  ^-1?/,^,^. 


GRADED   READING   AND   AYRITING   EXERCISES.      179 
—1^ g— :; -y — ==^— ^> — 7— — ^'^    •         -       t 


'     ^-^   --^  '  X ^ 


/-/ .  <? 


V 


->- 


-TT' 


^ 


4 


^^-^ 


T 


-^ 


-n^ 


^r 


-'^  ^  ^o^  /.  .  -^ 


r/    , 


/L 


6/' 


Those  Everting  Bells. 


>g^ 


_::^ 


rL 


^—^ 


"^ 


J::^^ CL. 


-^-^v^ 


.  <P 


.X- 


-/^ 


c  —  ^  y 


4- 


-~  "^ -^  ^^^  ..y^ri ?>l<nrc 


180 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


A  Munclred  Years  to  Come, 


-^-^^ 


c/  y 


"^T 


f  •^^ 


L 


-7^ 


^ 


-^ 


-?^ 


7^-fc- 


^ 


V^ 


/     ^^ 


X 


o  — 


U^^^<: 


ry     ..^^ 


'^    ^^ 


A^ 


X 


j:::_ 


-^ 


V 


-^^fcr 


-z^ 


-^ 


/_ 


^^ 


-f-^^==^ 


^    X^ 


i^ 


.^' 


4^ 


y'^JCc-C^.£r,'?-'--l^~&t^^-^--'-^-<-t-'C^ 


•? 


"^^^"Z" 


'^y      '•    / 


•     CD     f -/■ ^ 


,^ 


J^ 


GRADED    READING    AXD    AVRITIXG    EXERCISES:       181 


The  Pilot. 


j^'P  ^v^ 


/. 


"7=r 


Z. ^  C. 


x< 


JEI- 


d 


V    / 


-:=:i 


JL^ 


.-r- 


,-^ 


^  ^  ^ 


.^ 


■^ 


A^ 


-,-ii- 


^-^ 


Tii- 


^-^ 


j.^^   ^^ 


^^  c 


^ 


,6^  ^(    • 


T 


-'-^ — T 


cr S"-^^ 


■<^    /^ 


^^    ^^— /,   -^^  ^^s-^ 


■^/.  A>  ^c^ 


X 


"V. 


'Z^ 


-V2l- 


^ 


^^     .1/ 


// 


'-f-^  ,. 


/ 


-.^^7-^ 


</    ■        .^n 


^  rj>    XX 


I     ■  r^       /?^    O      « 


■TiS- 


//  — p— o 


-g> 


30- 


182 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 


ZT^ 


^/.<    -^^- 


J_ 


i- 


...^JL 


/r  a 


^ 


.tf5- 


^7 


-C 


V 


>^    ^^      y-- ^''  /  '  ^"  iy  "  ^^^^"^  <^<fuj,h 


■^^^^ 


Stream  of  Life, 


^i«^ 


^^^ 


"^7- 


-O D 


^ 


^=0- 


^Hr 


44S 


~?f^ 


y. 


^ 


0  /o 


■T^ 


t5- 


^ 


■g-^      /^ 


-^21. 


7^ 


-P- 


-,.^^— ^ 


^ 


'-%^ 


J^^    //    ' 


^-t5- 


>/     J^r 


-^ ^ 


JL- 


=^V^ 


f-^ 


^ 


^e-- 


^ 


-^ 


^=^ 


,,        7i      f^e?r^-r. 


GRADED    READING   AIS'D    WRITING    EXERCISES.       183 


Advice  to  Young  Men. 

-7^— ^ 


_^ 


^6^'     '^"^ 


./^ 


7^ 


J^ 


A- 


^^ 


^^  ^  "4 


-^ 


■^-^  /■      /^        ?Zrj~nJi'   '/rif-r-^izA^ . 


^ 


Lincoln  the  Shepherd. 


J  ^  ^ 


-Y- 


■^  c  / 

Tt^ 
^  ^ 


^ 


-7" 


//    /C    ^^"—Q 


i-;^^'^ 


^^ 


o       o 


-X- 


Jy 


^ 


184 


ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAKD. 


^-r^^A-.^ 


J  "v  f 


T 


C,  ^"-^ 


.        //  ^  ^^ 


-^^    ^    -^    ^    ^^^     u    "     <'- 


-^__^ 


c^ 


/^ 


cr- 


O 

-e- ^ 


-    -^     V 


ly 


V 


^^.      //  ^ 


_^^ 


"^ 


^^^>^^ 


.-^ 


,^ 


i>\ 


JL. 


\ 


J^ 


{ ^^>   //  o    c  ^ 


^   "-^^  { — 


O- 


7^ 


/^  o 


_0 . y- 


^       o 


^ 


/^ 


-^:^ 


_Z-^ 


-^9^ =:r- 


u« - 


_/^i-^ 


/^  Q 


^^ 


(^^lO 


T 


L^ 


-^ 


^ 
-^ 


.^46( 


Zi. 


/ 


"-^  T:^-^r  ^^-^  . 


y^ 


^^^:- 


o. — ^^y       ^. 


//7M;yy^A^7;^7zm^ 


CHAPTER    IX. 


ADDENDA. 

1.  Omission  of  Woi'ds.—ln  other  systems  of 
jihorthand  it  is  common  to  suggest  that  in  verbatim 
reporting  many  unimportant  words  may  be  omitted,  to 
ne  supplied  in  making  the  transcript.  In  the  earlier 
(editions  of  this  system  the  student  was  informed  that  he 
might  pursue  the  same  course.  I  am,  however,  convinced 
that  it  is  a  bad  practice.  He  who  omits  words  in  writing 
Avill  be  liable  also  to  omit  them  in  transcribing  his  notes, 
and  will  often  render  an  imperfect  transcript.  I  have 
■\'ery  recently  known  a  writer  of  my  system  to  be  selected 
i'rom  among  a  large  number  of  applicants  for  a  valuable 
position  simply  because,  as  the  employer  said,  "You  are 
the  only  one  of  all  that  I  have  tested  who  can  give  me 
back  my  words;  I  find  that  stenographers  are  in  the  habit 
of  leaving  out  all  the  small  words,  while  you  have  put 
them  all  in." 

2.  It  is  bad  theory  to  provide  for  leaving  out  any 
uttered  word  of  a  communication,  and  it  argues  the 
incompleteness  and  inadequacy  of  any  system  that  recom- 
mends it.  It  is  a  much  better  basis  of  stenographic  work 
to  study  and  practice  until  you  can  write  a  dictation 
perfectly;  and  then  if  in  taking  a  very  hurried  discourse 
you  are  obliged  to  omit  words,  regard  it  rather  as  an 

185 


18G  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

indication  that  you  need  more  preparation  for  verbatim  re- 
porting, and  practicing  for  speed,  press  on  to  j^erfection. 

3.  The  provision  whicli  this  system  makes  for  a  brief 
writing  of  all  the  short  phrases  by  single  strokes  makes  it 
unnecessary  to  omit  small  words,  as  it  is  quicker  to  write 
them  than  to  omit  them. 

4.  The  fact  is,  that  there  is  no  word  but  is  at  times 
imijortant;  although  it  may  be  unimportant  in  one  con- 
nection, in  another  its  significance  is  very  material  to  the 
correct  rendering  of  the  sentence,  and  one  who  acquires  a 
habit  ot  omitting  a  word  because  it  is  generally  not  of 
vital  importance,  is  as  likely  to  omit  it  in  the  hurry  of 
rapid  writing,  when  it  is  of  great  importance,  as  when  its 
value  is  slight. 

5.  If  a  word  is  omitted  in  writing  that  must  be 
inserted  in  the  transcript,  the  writer  must  depend  on  his 
memory  of  the  dictation,  or  on  his  judgment  of  the  word 
demanded  by  the  structure  of  the  sentence,  neither  of 
which  is  infallible;  and  there  are  many  cases  in  which 
eitlier  of  two  particles  may  be  inserted  to  supply  an 
ellipsis,  and  when  to  insert  the  wrong  word  would  radi- 
cally change  the  import  of  the  sentence. 

6.  Omission  of  Consonants. — Omit  all  silent 
consonants,  one  when  doubled,  and  any  other,  the  omis- 
sion of  which  does  not  endanger  the  legibility  of  the  word 
from  which  it  is  omitted;  as,  f  from  itself,  myself,  modi- 
fication, gratification  and  identification;  d  from  friend- 
ship and  old;  g  from  distinguished,  length,  etc. 

7.  Omission  of  Voivels. — While  most  systems 
of  shorthand  are  constructed  on  the  principle  of  making 
as  little  use  as  possible  of  vowels,  this  system  is  based  on 


OMISSIOX   OF   VOWELS.  187 

a  different  principle,  and  makes  the  utmost  possible  use 
of  them.  In  utterance  we  give  time  and  stress  to  the 
vowels,  tripping  lightly  over  the  consonants,  while  in 
shorthand,  as  it  is  generally  written,  the  vowels  are  dis- 
carded and  only  the  consonants  expressed. 

8.  The  vowels  being  represented  in  this  system  by 
linear  characters  similar  to  those  which  are  used  for  the 
consonants,  they  are  susceptible  to  the  application  of  the 
same  contractions  as  are  aj)plied  to  the  consonants.  A 
vowel  stroke  is  often  capable  of  receiving  several  contrac- 
tions, while,  if  the  vowel  were  not  written,  the  contrac- 
tions would  be  impossible,  and  it  would  be  necessary  to 
write  a  stroke  for  each  contraction  which  has  been  ex- 
pressed, and  made  possible  only  by  the  use  of  the  vowel. 
By  the  use  of  the  vowel  characters  in  such  cases  we 
secure,  not  only  the  legibility  which  arises  from  the 
expression  of  the  vowel,  but  also  secure  greater  brevity 
than  can  be  possible  by  the  use  only  of  consonants.  The 
outline  not  only  expresses  the  word  in  a  briefer  character, 
but  it  comprises  more  of  the  elements  of  the  uttered 
words. 

9.  If  a  vowel  is  necessary  to  the  pronunciation,  it 
should  generally  be  written,  whether  it  can  take  contrac- 
tions or  not.  If  it  is  the  second  letter  of  a  word,  it  is 
always  expressed  by  the  jiosition  of  the  j^receding  letter, 
which  may  at  the  same  time  be  so  written  as  to  express 
the  contractions  Avhich  Avould  naturally  follow  and  be 
added  to  a  vowel  if  it  were  written;  thus,  in  the  word 
nor,  in  which  the  r  following  the  o  is  naturally  added 
to  it  by  shading,  tlie  n  is  written  on  o  position,  and 
shaded  to  express  the  r  which  follows  the  position  letter. 


188  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAXD. 

10.  If  a  vowel  begins  a  word,  it  is,  as  a  rule,  written, 
being  so  written  on  position  as  to  express  a  following  con- 
sonant. Inflected  vowels  ending  Avords,  esjoecially  short 
words,  should  always  be  written;  as  in  assay,  allay, 
obey,  alloy,  allow,  array,  arrays,  etc. 

11.  Unaccented  vowels  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of 
words  may  generally  be  safely  omitted. 

12.  Omission  of  Short  Initial  Prefixes. — 
These  may  sometimes  be  omitted. 

{a)  Ac,  ag,  oc. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  accord, 
according,  accordingly,  accuse,  acknowledge,  aggressive,  aggravate, 
acquired,  occur,  occasion. 

(6)  Al. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  allow,  allusion, 
almost,  although. 

(c)  Com,  con. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  confuse, 
confer,  confess,  compose,  compute,  comprise,  contempt,  congrega- 
tion. 

{d)  En,  em. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  enjoy,  enjoys, 
enjoying,  enjoin,  encase,  enclose,  entice,  engrave,  employ,  embolden. 

(/)  Ex. — In  words  beginning  with  ex  omit  e,  and  write  x  on 
the  position  of  its  following  vowel. 

{g)  In,  im. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  imply,  implied, 
improve,  improved,  increased,  ingulfed,  inclosed. 

(Ji)  Re. — May  be  omitted  from  such  words  as  reversed,  reviewed, 
revived,  revoked,  report,  reposed,  replied,  reply,  replying,  repealed, 
requii'ed. 

13.  Omission  of  Suffixes. — It  is  customary  in 
other  systems  of  shorthand  to  omit  many  suffixes,  but  this 
system  makes  provision  for  either  writing  or  suggesting 
all  terminations.  A  business  man  said:  "The  two  sten- 
ographers I  have  had  from  your  school  were  the  best  I 
ever  had.  Among  other  things,  I  notice  one  striking 
fact,  they  never  make  mistakes  in  terminations.  I 
have   had   many  stenographers,  but  I  never  had  one 


SHORTHAND    NOTATION.  189 

before  who   was    not    continually   making    mistakes  in 
terminations.'' 

14.  Technical  Terms. — It  sometimes  occurs  in 
writing  that  proper  names,  technical  ^\ords,  or  words  of 
inconvenient  length  are  frequently  repeated.  In  such 
cases,  after  writing  them  once  or  twice,  they  may  be 
represented  by  their  initial  letter,  or  by  a  brief  suggestive 
outline,  or  by  the  principal  elements  of  the  words. 

15.  Negative  Words. — The  writing  of  this  class 
of  words  in  this  system  requires  no  special  instruction, 
because  the  jDrefixes  or  suffixes  which  distinguish  such 
words  are  written  according  to  the  rules  of  the  system; 
thus,  in  illogical,  the  prefix  il  is  exjiressed  by  i  on  the 
1  position.  From  a  slight  examination  of  the  few  follow- 
ing illustrative  words,  in  which  both  the  positive  and 
negative  forms  are  given,  it  will  be  evident  that  the 
means  of  distinction  between  the  two  needs  no  special 
explanation : 

Logical,  illogical;  normal,  abnormal;  annul,  disannul;  constant, 
inconstant;  politic,  impolitic;  thinking,  unthinking;  distinct, 
indistinct;  reconciled,  irreconciled ;  religious,  irreligious;  control- 
lable, uucontrollable:  noble,  ignoble;  able,  disable;  kind,  unkind. 

10.  Shot^thand  Notation, — Many  schemes  have 
been  devised  by  stenographers  for  shorthand  writing  of 
figures  in  stenographic  work,  and  while  many  of  them  are 
ingenious,  none  of  them  are  used  to  any  extent  in  practical 
work,  the  use  of  the  Arabic  notation  being  so  brief  and 
simple  that  most  stenographers  prefer  to  use  it. 

17.  Short  numbers  expressed  by  only  two  figures  may 
be  readily  and  briefly  written  in  shorthand,  but  it  is  to  be 
questioned  whether  it  is  not  better  to  write  them  in  most 
cases  by  the  use  of  the  common  numerals. 


190  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

18.  Proper  Names. — Initials  and  proper  names 
are  correctly  and  easily  written  in  this  system,  while  the 
phonograplier  is  general!}'  embarrassed  by  them.  The 
reason  for  the  difference  between  this  and  other  systems 
in  this  respect  is,  that  the  alphabet  in  this  system  pro- 
vides for  all  the  letters  of  the  alphabet,  while  the  alpha- 
bets of  other  systems  do  not.  If  you  will  begin  practicing 
tlie  writing  of  simple  proper  names  in  shorthand,  and 
then  the  more  complicated  ones,  you  will  soon  find  that 
it  is  possible  to  write  them  legibly,  and  that  by  writing 
them  in  this  manner  you  will  save  much  time. 

19.  Punctuation. — All    the    marks   common    to 
punctuation  may  be  used  in   shorthand,  as  the  stenog- 
rapher understands  their  use;  but  in  shorthand  writing 

tnere  is  no  time  usually  for  adding  the  punctuation, 
except  to  indicate  the  end  of  sentences,  which  should  be 
done  from  the  beginning  in  all  your  shorthand  work,  that 
you  may  form  the  habit  of  doing  it.  Two  parallel  ticks 
seem  to  be  the  best  indication  of  the  period,  since  the 
single  dot  is  used  as  a  word-sign.  In  rapid  writing,  if 
there  is  not  time  for  the  writing  of  the  period  dots  at  the 
end  of  the  sentence,  the  period  may  be  indicated  by  a 
longer  space  between  woi'ds. 

'20.   The  Dash  is  represented  by  a  slight  waved  line. 

21.  Lau(fhter  is  represented  by  the  word  written  in 
shorthand. 

22.  Applause  is  indicated  by  the  writing  of  the 
word  in  shorthand. 

23.  l^mjihasis  is  indicated  as  in  longhand,  by 
drawing  one  or  more  lines  under  the  emphasized  word  or 
words. 


PROOF-READING.  191 

24.  The  Shorthand  Capitals  are  used  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence,  and  in  all  other  cases  in  which 
they  are  necessary. 

25.  Pt'eparinff  Copy  for  the  Printer. — Writ- 
ten or  printed  matter  for  the  printer  is  called  copy.  If  it 
is  written,  it  should  be  done  in  a  plain,  legible  hand;  but 
it  is  better,  if  possible,  to  have  it  done  by  the  machine. 
In  either  case,  the  spelling,  capitalization  and  punctua- 
tion should  be  correctly  done.  Emphatic  words  should 
be  marked  by  drawing  one  line  under  them  for  italics, 
two  lines  to  indicate  small  capitals,  and  three  lines  for 
large  capitals.  The  writing  should  be  done  on  only  one 
side  of  the  paper,  or  if  on  both  sides,  it  should  be  indi- 
cated  at  the  bottom  of  the  first  page  by  the  word  over 
written  at  the  lower  right-hand  corner  of  the  page. 

2G.  Proof •readintj, — The  printed  matter  prepared 
by  the  printer  for  correction  is  called  proof.  In  large 
((uantities  it  is  usually  in  long  sheets  called  galley  proof. 
After  the  galley  proof  has  been  corrected,  it  is  usual  for 
the  printer  to  furnish  other  proofs  for  a  second  and  third 
correction.  If  proof-reading  is  among  your  duties,  and 
most  persons  in  business  are  likely  to  have  more  or  less  of 
it  to  do,  make  yourself  familiar  with  the  following  two 
pages  illustrative  of  proof  reading.  These  pages  present 
and  illustrate  the  use  of  the  technical  marks  in  ordinary 
use  in  correcting  proof,  and  were  pi'epared  for  this  book 
by  a  professional  proof  reader.  These  marks  being 
understood  in  the  printing  office,  reporters  and  others,  in 
correcting  for  the  printer,  should  make  use  of  them. 


SPECIMEN  OF  PROOF-SHEET  MARKED  FOR  CORRECTION. 

,^ .        Mr.  THOMAS.     I  (lo  not  wish,  to  JoresenT  tliat  as  the  view  of    X     h^ 

Q      ihe  gentleman  from  Miss!|issippi  if  it  was  the  view  of  another.   AH 
MvT  I  have  now  to  say  is,  it  was  the  coi-rect  v^wl    And  let  me  say  it^^^^"^   © 
/—f  was  the  correct  view.  Jor  this  reason,  thatjthe  committee  were  fb-       ^^ 
stricted  as  to  evidence,  and  could  not  go  to  the  ceii£re)of  the  evi-    a^  v 
Ad^-C^jj-eferred  to  them  in  the  pending,  contest;  and.  t«*4  no  gentle(men)of    0        '? 
that  committee  influenced  by  any  view  of  the  case  which  he  might 
haveH'rom  ^  having  ^looked  into  the  '^evidence  l^relating  to  ^^  the    C<y  ^ 
Yr    (contest/t^dingt.     In  the  case  Clark  v$.  Giddings,  I  believe  the 


majority  of  the  Committee  on  Elections  thought  Clark  could  be[un~(M/v- 
jSeated  after  he  had   been  admitted  to  a  prima  facie  seat  and  had        irOl'l 
been^wornhhj  

Tiu/n/  m/    ^And  it  turned  out  that  lie  was  afterward  unseated.  J  Perhaps     ^| 

I  am  .about  to  speak  hastily,  but  I  will  say  I  think,  if  I  knew  now       /ItMW  \ 
■\     today  that  Wiltshire,  would  upon  the  hearing  of  his  contested- 

C   -^      ciect^oncase  be  declared  not  elected  to  the  seat,  still  it  would,   (ruTiW^MJUy 

be  the  duty  of  the  Committee  on  Elections  to  report  this  resolu.     -\  l 

C<vlf/     tion,  and  the  duty  of  the  P^ouse  to  admit  him  to  a  seat,  until  the,,^      *    ,  | 

question  of  fact  is  ascertained  and  the  case  decided  upon  its  merits. 


□ 


The  committee  have  nothinjrtlien,  to  do  \vith  that  vieAV  of  it;  that  ys. 

is  a  matter  to  come  up  hereafter.    Is  ther-e  any  objection  to  itbatj     'll        '  \ 
^Now  let  me  go  back  to  what  I  was  about  to  cite,  to  show  t^at  this.    K.^.  ^ 
ff)     {\      certificate  "is  in  proper  form,  or  in  form  ^ords  which  I  do  not  con-  ^ 

\,    '       jsidcr  matei'ial),  tq  the  case  of  Foster  against  Ck^sar.     In,  that  (W-\     e 
case  the  governor  had  issued  a  proclamation  as  to  which  the  com-  s- 


niittee  say  it  is  a  blank  in  reference  to,' the  (^Ts^  district,  and  they^ 
did  not  consider  it. 

\r        U(|)ffin  the  very  face  of  the  certificate  the  (Governor  states  that  \,t/. 
u|  as  the  acting  governor  had  fa  led  to  issue  a  certificate,  for  that 

U^'eason  he  (the  governor)  certifies  ;-'  that  the  fore\going  statement  ■/  ^ 
'\vith  the  explanatory  notes "  is  a  "  full,  true,  and  correct  exhibit 
of  the  votes  polled  for  the  Representative  from  the  third  congres* 
,      sional  district  of  Arkansas,  Mr.  Wauren.  n?  m'] 

xr^     I  yield  fifteen  minute  sto  the  gentleman  from  Tennessee  [Mr.    ' 
>4.  W^     Harrison] . 

'  Cfl'K^     *^i'-  Harrison.    I  want  to  ask  the  chairjnan  [.Mr.  SiAxes]  if  the  ^.v. 


•1 


.  EXPLANATION.  ->^ 

0     also  written  dele;  Lat.  delere,  to  blot  out;  a  technically-shaped  terminal  (J  (d) 
^^'      Lat.  stet,  let  it  stand.    The  dots  under  should  not  be  omitted 
I— I      em*  dash.    An  en*  dash  may  be  more  clearly  expressed  thus  A-/  « 
\r     the  first  two  letters  of  the  word  transpose ;  reverse  the  order  of  woi^s  or  letters 
JVWW/W     make  no  paragraph.    The  line  is  indispensable,  but  this  with -HO   jj    will  be  plaiu 
-1       hyphen.    No  other  mark,  or  remark,  is  necessary  in  the  margin  of  proof 
O     bring  words  or  letters  close  together 
P      em*  quadrat.    An  en*  quadrat  should  be  marked  ^WV 

G)      turn  around.    This  mark  is  different  from  a    O  but  is  frequently  mistaken  for  it 
L     bring  out  to  line,  or  bring  thus  far  to  left.    To  move  to  right  express  thus^ 

a  thin  metal  plate  used  between  lines.t    Surface  :)f  lead  shown  on  opposite  page 
\rA    transpose  space  so  as  to  make  proper  words;  change  one  space  with  another 
V      substitute  perfect  for  imperfect  type 

,«)t-  the  first  letters  of  the  words  wrong  font.    A  font  is  a  series  of  type 
; — r    make  words  or  letters  range,  or  line  properly 

(      push  down  below  type-height  so  as  not  to  appear 
yy     observe  matter  encircled.    This  mark  does  not  necessanly  suggest  errort 

i      correctness  of  matter  encircled  is  questioned 
i/ty^   equalize  space  between  words  or  lines 
0V^    take  over  to  the  beginning  of  the  next  line 
)ff^    use  Italic  type.    Roman  type  should  be  indicated  thus   ^WW 
Ml      make  paragraph. 
Ow/iM-MW  insert  as  copy.    This  means  that  matter  is  omitted,  for  which  see  original  copy 

1\     interrogation-point.    This  reference  should  not  be  confounded  with  the  query  mark 
L  t/     use  lower-case  letters.    The  ordinary  body-type  of  a  book  is  called  lower-case 
JLiVf^    diphthong.    The  kern  over  represents  a  ligaiure,  and  should  always  be  marked  M\^ 
spell  instead  of  using  figures;  or  the  word  or  words  may  be  written  in  the  margin 
^     inverted  comma.    One  of  two  points  being  wrong  (  ',  ),  both  may  be  markeil  v 
Q     take  out,  leaving  no  space.    The  mark  below  the  (7    means  close  up 
^.CtiV;^     use  small  capitals.      One  letter  may  be  marked    i.C'.  or  it  may  be  indicated  thus  W\. 
^jftiW    use  capitals.      One  letter  may  be  written  in  margin,  thus  (I\/\ 

*  An  cm  quadrat  is  a  space  the  thickness  of  the  letter  w  of  the  type  used;  au  en  is  half 

that  thickness,  or  a  space  equal  to  the  letter  n 

I  The  word  lead  is  also  used  as  a  verb,  and  means  to  lead  out,  or  put  leads  between  the  lines 
}  These  marks  should  never  appear  unnoticed  in  m.ar^in  of  proof  returned  to  printers  ;  the 

necessary  correction  should  be  made  or  the  refereuce  marked  oil" 


194  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

LOXG    AND    SHORT   YOAVELS. 

1.  Those  who  may  desire  to  employ  a  m_ore  definite 
expression  of  the  vowel  sounds  will  be  interested  in  the 
following  method: 

LONG   VOWELS. 

/         y        /        V      ■^ 

a  i  o  e  u 

SHORT  VOWELS. 

r  J  /  \^  ^ 

a  i  o  e  u 

2.  This  use  of  the  full  length  vowel  characters  to  rep- 
resent the  long  vowels,  and  the  expression  of  the  short 
vowel  sounds  by  the  same  characters  written  half  length, 
would  make  it  necessary  to  dispense  with  the  application  to 
the  voM'els  of  the  principle  of  diminishing  to  express  an 
added  t,  d,  or  m,  n.  In  so  far,  however,  as  the  initial 
vowels  are  concezmed,  this  is  not  a  very  important  con- 
sideration, because  both  the  t,  d,  and  m,  n,  following 
an  initial  vowel,  are  expressed  by  writing  the  vowel  on 
position. 

3.  This  distinction  would  occasionally  prove  valuable; 
as,  for  instance,  in  writing  the  word  premise,  which 
is  either  a  verb  or  a  noun  dejDendent  on  the  accent  and 
the  sound  of  i,  its  long  sound  being  heard  in  the  verb, 
and  its  short  sound  in  the  word  when  used  as  a  noun. 
In  writing  these  words,  the  i  should  be  written  down- 
ward to  express  the  final  s.  If  it  were  written  long, 
the  characters  would  express  the  verb  pre-mlse',  while  if 
written  short  length,  they  would  express  the  noun 
pr6m'-ise. 


VOWELS. 


195 


4.  The  following  illustrative  exercise  shows  the 
method  of  writing  the  vowels  so  as  to  express  the  dis- 
tinction between  the  long  and  short  vowel  sounds. 

Success  in  Life. 


-y-n       -7- 


"^r 


V, 


6^^ 


K 


J^^    ,    /■-  ?  ^^ 


-N     6) 


(^ 


^^ 


2  ^  1'  a 


/ 


±7 


'^Z 


r  ^   hy 


r 


~r 


-f- 


-u^ 


M- 


T 


f 


''    ^  -^< — e — r 6 — ^ 


~z- 


-.     ^     o 


^ 


196  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


EPITOME   OF   THE   EULES. 

EuLE  1.  Write  initial  consonants  positionally,  to 
express  a  following  vowel. 

EuLE  2.  Write  initial  vowels  downward,  positionally, 
to  express  a  following  consonant. 

EuLE  3.  Write  initial  vowels  very  slanting,  position- 
ally,  to  express  a  following  consonant. 

EuLE  4.  Write  initial  diphthongs  positionally,  to 
express  a  following,  consonant. 

EuLE  5.  Write  coalescent  characters  positionally,  to 
express  a  following  vowel, 

EuLE  6.  AVrite  the  long  characters  and  p,  g,  and  1 
longer  to  express  a  following  m,  n,  and  still  longer  to 
express  another  m,  n. 

EuLE  7.  Enlarge  all  surface  characters  to  express  a 
following  t,  d,  th.,  and  still  larger  to  express  another 
t,  d,  th. 

EuLE  8.  Make  short  characters  half  length  to  express 
a  following  t,  d,  th ;  and  make  them  minute  to  express 
a  following  m,  n. 

EuLE  9.  Make  surface  cliai-acters  minute  to  express  n 
following  1,  ly,  fly,  ing,  ling-;  make  1  minute  for  fl, 
fly,  ly,  ling,  fling. 

EuLE  10.  Write  surface  characters,  straight  t,  y  and 
Z,  and  the  oblique  characters  irregularly  to  express  added 
letters.     See  specifications,  pp.  71-75. 

EuLE  11.  Shade  the  beginning  of  a  vowel  to  express 
a  preceding  h. 

EuLE  12.  Write  only  the  stem  of  modified  termina- 
tions, omitting  the  modifying  final  syllable. 

EuLE  13.  AVrite  phrase-word  signs  of  the  first  method 
on  the  1st,  2d,  3d,  4th,  otli  positions  to  add  the  words  a 
or  an,  the,  I,  to,  you. 


CHAPTER  X. 


THE  AMANUENSIS. 

1.  A  person  who  writes  shorthand  in  an  office  for  a 
business,  or  literar}^  man,  is  called  an  amanuensis.  The 
'.vork  which  he  does  is  that  of  writing  in  shorthand  from 
dictation,  letters,  contracts,  business  papers,  and  various 
memoranda,  or  manuscript  for  sermons,  bills,  jileas, 
J'.peeches,  and  books ;  either  transcribing  them  by  writing 
them  out  in  longhand  or  on  the  writing  machine,  or  filing 
^;hem  for  future  reference.  He  also  frequently  writes  the 
conA^ersations  which  occur  between  his  employer  and 
persons  who  have  called  to  talk  business  with  him. 

3.  The  uses  which  are  thus  made  of  the  amanuensis 
are  not  confined  to  any  particular  kind  of  business,  but 
are  general;  in  banks,  insurance  offices,  commission 
houses,  manufacturers'  offices,  publishing  houses,  railway 
offices,  agencies,  newspaper  offices,  law  offices,  and  the 
studies  of  ministers,  literary  and  scientific  men.  Indeed, 
it  is  almost  impossible  to  enumerate  the  various  dej^art- 
ments  of  activity  in  which  the  amanuensis  and  his  art 
have  become  most  important  agencies  for  facilitating  the 
expression,  transmission  and  recording  of  thought. 

3.  The  chief  part  of  the  commercial  amanuensis's 
work  consists  in  taking  letters  from  dictation.  Tlie  cor- 
respondence of  a  large  business  house  involves  great  labor, 


198  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

Before  the  use  of  shorthand  was  apj)lied  to  it^  every  cor- 
respondent for  a  house  required  a  thorougli  knowledge  of 
the  business,  and  often  a  house  employed  several  corre- 
spondents who  devoted  their  entire  time  to  answering 
letters  hy  means  of  the  pen.  Now,  a  single  correspond- 
ent, aided  by  a  shorthand  clerk  with  his  writing  machine, 
can  easily  do  the  work  which  formerly  required  several 
correspondents.  The  morning  mail  of  a  house  is  received. 
The  correspondent  opens  letter  after  letter,  quietly  dic- 
tates their  answers  to  his  stenographer,  and  often  in  an 
hour's  time  the  replies  to  fifty  or  one  hundred  letters  have 
been  dictated. 

4.  Having  thus  disposed  of  the  morning's  mail,  the 
correspondent  is  at  liberty  to  devote  his  attention  to  other 
important  matters  connected  with  the  business  until  the 
arrival  of  another  mail,  while  the  amanuensis  jiroceeds  to 
transcribe,  in  longhand  or  by  the  writing  machine,  the 
letters  from  his  shorthand  notes,  making  copies  of  such 
as  need  to  be  preserved,  and  prejiaring  all  for  the  mail. 
If  the  time  of  the  amanuensis  is  not  all  occupied  in  doing 
his  regular  shorthand  and  transcribing  work,  he  is  em- 
ployed in  filing  letters,  writing  circulars,  assisting  on  the 
books,  making  bills,  doing  collecting,  attending  to  tele- 
grams, etc.,  by  which  means  he  has  an  excellent  oi">por- 
tunity  of  becoming  acquainted  with  the  various  details  of 
practical  business  life. 

QUALIFICATIONS. 

5.  Chnvactev. — As  a  foundation,  the  amanuensis 
must  be  possessed  of  character,  so  that  he  will  feel  the 
responsibilities  of  his  position,  and  strive  to  make  his  ser- 
vices valuable  to  his  employer,     "  lie  occupies  a  position 


AMANUENSIS   AVORK.  199 

of  trust  and  responsibility,  and  no  professional  or  business 
man  will  wisb  to  employ  as  amanuensis  a  person  in  whom 
he  cannot  repose  perfect  confidence/"'  therefore  he  must 
be  honest  and  faithful.  He  must  be  orderly  in  all  his 
work,  and  j^rompt  in  its  accomplishment,  neat  in  his  per- 
sonal habits,  and  gentlemanly  in  his  deportment.  "^'He 
must  possess  the  ability  to  guard  as  a  sacred  trust  all  the 
knowledge  he  may  acquire  of  his  employer's  affairs." 

C.  JEdiication. — There  are  many  positions  which 
the  amanuensis  of  limited  education  can  fill  acceptably, 
but  such  positions  are  not  to  be  desired,  because  the  Avork 
to  be  done  is  of  a  comparatively  low  order,  and  the  remun- 
eration Avhich  such  positions  afford  is  so  much  less  than 
that  of  first-class  houses,  in  which  the  correspondence  is 
conducted  by  gentlemen  of  education,  intelligence  and 
refinement. 

7.  It  is  true  that  stenographers  of  limited  education 
haA'e  in  many  cases  succeeded  in  rising  in  their  profession, 
but  such  Avere  persons  either  of  superior  mental  powers,  or 
Avere  fortunate  in  securing  unusually  faA^orable  surround- 
ings. 

8.  No  one  can  expect  to  succeed  in  amanuensis  w^ork 
A\'ho  has  not  the  adA'antage  of  a  good  common  English 
education.  He  must  be  able  to  read  intelligently,  and 
to  Avrite  legibly.  He  must  haA'e  a  general  knoAvledge  of 
words  Avhich  only  reading  can  giA'e.  A  liberal  education 
will  not  only  add  efficiency  to  the  stenographer's  serA'ices, 
but  is  a  foundation  from  Avhich  he  may  confidently  expect 
to  rise  to  distinction  in  his  Avork,  or  to  rise  from  it  to  a 
position  of  greater  distinction  aod  profit, 


200  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAJSTD. 

9.  If  you  have  not  the  advantage  of  a  good  education, 
if  you  are  wise,  you  Avill  improve  every  opportunity  to 
increase  your  knowledge  by  conversation,  by  attending 
lectures,  and  especially  by  reading — thoughtful,  thorough 
reading.  If  you  have  not  a  good  knowledge  of  the 
English  language,  let  this  be  your  first  acquisition. 
Learn  to  spell,  to  read,  the  use  and  meaning  of  words, 
and  how  to  jjunctuate. 

10.  Many  jiersons  liave  graduated  from  the  high  school 
or  college  who  cannot  spell  correctly,  and  who  are  ignor- 
ant of  the  fact.  Such  persons  will  soon  discover  their 
deficiency  when  others  begin  to  read  their  transcript.  A 
poor  speller  cannot  fill  a  position  of  any  importance,  for 
no  good  business  man  will  tolerate  poor  spelling,  or  incor- 
rect capitalization  and  punctuation  in  the  transcrij)ts  of 
his  dictated  letters.  Even  though  he  may  not  himself  be 
expert  in  all  these  things,  he  will  soon  notice  the  errors  of 
his  clerk,  and  politely,  or  otherwise,  dispense  with  his 
services. 

11.  The  j)ractical  means  an  employer  has  of  forming  an 
estimate  of  his  amanuensis's  ability  is  in  the  aj^pearance  of 
his  transcripts.  It  does  not  concern  the  employer  what 
system  of  shorthand  his  clerk  writes,  or  whether  he  spent 
a  month  or  twelve  months  in  learning  it;  if  his  tian- 
scripts  come  out  from  the  machine  beautiful,  like  coins 
from  the  mint,  he  congratulates  himself  on  having 
secured  a  skilful  amanuensis. 

12.  From  these  considerations,  it  is  not  only  evident 
that  a  good  education  will  go  far  toward  making  an 
amanuensis  a  valuable  clerk,  but  that  without  an  education 
it  is  almost  impossible  to  become  a  capable  amanuensis. 


AMANUENSIS   WORK.  201 

True  though  this  is,  no  one  should  despair.  The  study 
and  practice  of  shorthand  is  a  whole  education  iu  itself. 
Three  or  six  months  spent  in  its  acquisition  will  go  far 
toward  giving  an  extended  practical  use  and  knowledge 
of  words.  If  the  student  of  shorthand  is  deficient  in  the 
English  brandies,  their  study  and  that  of  shorthand 
should  be  carried  on  together  until  final  success  is  reached. 
Many  persons  of  limited  educational  advantages  and 
acquirements  have,  in  a  comparatively  short  time,  become 
practical  shorthand  writers,  by  making  shorthand  and 
Webster's  Dictionary  their  daily  companions, 

13.  A  student  who  spells  badly  should  at  once  begin  a 
list  of  the  words  which  he  spells  incorrectly,  increasing 
the  list  by  all  discoveries  which  he  makes  of  his  deficien- 
cies in  this  respect,  daily  looking  over  the  list  and  writing 
the  words  correctly,  until  he  has  practically  become  a 
good  speller. 

14.  Shorthand. — An  amanuensis  does  not  generally 
need  to  write  as  rapidly  as  a  court  or  general  reporter, 
but  must  have  a  speed  of  one  hundred  to  one  hundred 
and  fifty  words  a  minute  on  average  business  phraseology. 
He  must  have  an  attentive  ear,  to  catch  all  of  a  dictated 
sentence,  for  it  is  his  duty  to  take  down  every  word  of  it, 
and  any  changes  that  become  necessary  from  imperfect 
dictation  should  be  made  in  the  transcript,  not  in  the 
notes.  He  must  be  able  to  carry  a  sentence  in  the  mind, 
so  that  if  the  dictator  speaks  rapidly  away  from  him,  as 
is  sometimes  done  by  a  man  thoroughly  acquainted  with 
the  subject  of  his  letter,  he  may  retain  the  sentence,  and 
by  increasing  speed,  take  also  the  new  sentence  and  over- 
take the  dictation. 


302  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHANDe 

15.  The  ability  to  read  the  notes  readi.  •  and  correctly 
is  of  equal  importance,  so  that  no  time  may  be  lost  in 
deciphering  them,  and  no  errors  committed  in  their 
transcription.  One  who  writes  so  slowly  that  he  is  fre- 
quently obliged  to  request  the  dictator  to  repeat,  or  who 
reads  so  jDOorly  as  not  to  be  able  to  instantly  read  any 
dictated  sentence  that  may  be  asked  for,  or  Avho  makes 
incorrect  transcrij)ts,even  in  the  more  unimjoortant  parts 
of  the  sjDeech,  will  not  gain  the  confidence  of  an  employer, 
and  will  be  liable  at  any  time  to  be  replaced  by  an  aman- 
uensis who  understands  his  business. 

16.  Penmanship. — Although  the  machine  has 
generally  superseded  the  pen  in  correspondence  in  business 
houses,  still  plain,  strong,  graceful  penmanshij)  will,  in 
many  business  houses,  be  regarded  as  an  important  quali- 
fication of  the  amanuensis.  Therefore,  if  your  penman- 
shiji  is  faulty,  study  to  eliminate  all  unnecessary  strokes, 
to  make  it  plain,  to  make  the  similar  letters  uniform  in 
size,  and  all  uniform  in  slant  and  curvature.  Make  the 
extended  letters  rather  short  than  long.  Make  capitals 
the  same  height  as  extended  letters,  and  very  simple  in 
form. 

17.  The  Writing  MaeJiine.—The  amanuensis 
should  have  a  perfect  acquaintance  with  the  machine 
employed,  that  it  may  be  kept  in  good  working  order,  and 
promptly  put  in  good  order  when  it  fails  to  respond.  He 
must  be  able  to  do  any  kind  of  machine  work  that  may  be 
demanded,  do  it  correctly,  promptly,  neatly  and  rapidly. 
Study  carefully  the  instructions  on  care  of  the  machine. 


AMANUENSIS   WORK.  203 

REGARDING    A    POSITION. 

1.  Do  not  seek  a  position  until  you  are  well  qualified 
to  fill  one. 

2.  Having  good  speed  in  shorthand,  and  ability  to 
read  without  hesitancy,  together  with  adequate  sjoeed  in 
machine  writing,  and  having  practiced  copying  letters, 
especially  business  letters,  until  you  can  type-write  them 
quickly  in  a  faultless  and  elegant  style,  you  may  be  con- 
sidered prepared  to  seek  a  position  in  some  business  office. 

3.  Positions  are  frequently  secured  by  advertising  for 
them  in  the  newspapers,  especially  the  dailies.  In  the 
application  seek  houses  and  firms  doing  a  large  business 
by  correspondence.  Every  kind  of  business  is  carried  on 
more  or  less  in  this  way;  even  large  farmers  and  stock 
breeders  now  require  the  aid  of  the  amanuensis. 

4.  In  presenting  your  application  for  a  position,  do 
not  claim  more  ability  than  you  can  demonstrate  you  are 
the  possessor  of,  but  be  satisfied  to  let  the  character  of 
your  work  speak  for  you. 

5.  In  taking  a  trial  dictation  for  a  position,  do  not 
lose  your  senses,  keep  cool;  it  will  make  you  master  of 
the  position.  Do  your  work  quietly,  without  affectation 
or  ostentation.  For  your  trial,  be  prepared  with  such 
note-book  and  pen  or  pencil  as  you  are  accustomed  to  use, 
that  you  may  not  be  embarrassed  by  the  strangeness  of 
material.  Be  careful  to  sit  near  enough  to  your  dictator 
to  clearly  understand  his  words.  Be  very  attentive  not  to 
lose  a  word.  Should  you  fail  to  understand  any  particu- 
lar word,  do  not  interrujit  the  dictation,  but  leave  a  space 
for  the  word,  and  when  the  dictation  is  done,  immediately 
ask  for  the  lost  words,  reading  back  a  sentence  that  your 


204  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

dictator  may  understand  what  you  seek  for.  Be  careful 
to  indicate  the  close  of  sentences  by  the  period;  it  will 
help  you  in  making  the  transcript. 

6.  If  possible  to  avoid  it,  do  not  interrupt  the  dicta- 
tion, unless  you  find  it  absolutely  outstripping  you,  in 
which  case  promjjtly,  but  deferentially,  request  less 
speed. 

7.  Write  the  address  on  your  notes  in  carefully  written 
longhand,  unless  you  can  write  proper  names  confidently 
in  shorthand,  being  careful  about  the  spelling. 

8.  When  you  have  received  the  dictation,  before 
undertaking  the  transcript,  read  it  carefully  through,  to 
get  the  subject  clearly  in  your  mind,  noting  the  beginning 
and  end  of  sentences  and  of  paragraphs. 

9.  In  beginning  the  transcript,  be  careful  not  to  write 
the  complimentary  address  or  body  of  the  letter  too  close 
to  the  letter-head.  If  it  is  a  short  letter  and  your  pajjer 
is  letter  size,  double  space  the  machine,  and  let  the  letter 
occupy  the  middle  of  the  page,  writing  the  complimen- 
tary address,  after  the  date  is  properly  placed,  some  dis- 
tance below  the  letter-head.  If  the  letter  is  long,  single 
space  the  machine  and  write  a  full  page.  Work  with  a 
confident,  prompt  hand,  careful  to  make  a  success  on  the 
first  sheet.  Be  careful  not  to  soil  the  sheet  with  the 
fingers.  When  completed,  promptly  remove  the  letter 
from  the  machine,  and  present  to  the  dictator  for  his 
inspection. 

10.  If  the  machine  is  not  in  good  order,  does  not 
space  well  or  run  accurately,  or  the  type  is  dirty,  so  that 
the  printing  is  not  clear,  it  wou^ld  be  well  to  remark,  that. 


AMAXUENSIS  WOEK.  205 

with  a  little  attention  to  the  machine,,  to  clean  and  adjnst 
it,  a  mnch  neater  letter  might  be  produced. 

11.  In  seeking  a  position,  aim  to  get  into  a  good 
house;  one  withVhich  it  will  be  a  credit  to  be  connected. 
Accept  the  salary  they  are  willing  to  offer  you  as  a  be- 
ginner, remembering  that,  however  competent  you  may 
consider  yourself,  it  is  an  experiment  on  your  employer's 
part,  and  also  that  it  Avill  take  you  some  time  to  become 
familiar  with  his  methods  of  doing  business.  Then  prove 
by  your  thorough  work,  by  the  faithful  performance  of 
duties,  and  by  using  your  brains  as  well  as  your  fingers, 
that  you  are  worthy  of  your  employer's  confidence,  and 
he  will  then  be  very  glad  to  advance  your  salar}',  either 
voluntarily  or  upon  request,  as  help  that  has  shown  itself 
to  be  valuable  will  not  readily  be  parted  with. 

12.  Having  secured  a  position,  endeavor  to  fill  it.  Do 
the  work  as  though  it  were  your  own,  and  you  meant  to 
bring  it  up  to  the  highest  possible  standard.  Be  on 
time.  Be  interested  in  your  work.  Put  your  machine 
in  good  working  order.  Arrange  your  office  for  conven- 
ience. Have  as  few  appliances  as  possible,  and  these 
always  in  place  and  order.  Have  a  place  for  your  extra 
clothing.  Do  not  make  your  office  a  lounging  place  for 
your  mates.  Be  in  your  office  at  the  proper  time  daily. 
If  you  are  requested  to  work  over-time,  do  it  cheer- 
fully. It  frequently  happens  that  a  very  much  larger 
mail  is  received  on  one  day  than  another,  and  at  such 
times  do  all  you  can  to  facilitate  the  speedy  dispatch  of 
replies.  Let  manliness  characterize  all  your  actions. 
Keep  at  your  hand  a  Student's  Dictionary  and  a  Postal 
Guide;  they  will  help  more  than  they  cost  you.  Be  care- 
ful in  addressing  envelopes  to  do  it  correctly  and  in  a 


206  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

business-like  way.  If  more  letters  are  dictated  than  can 
be  gotten  off  by  the  next  mail,  give  tlie  preference  to 
those  which  are  the  more  imj^ortant,  to  get  them  oif  first. 
Closely  attend  to  any  instructions  you  may  receive,  that 
you  may  be  able  to  conform  to  them  without  failure. 
Keep  a  small  index  book,  with  the  addresses  of  all  of  the 
regular  correspondents  of  the  house,  so  that  you  Avill  not 
be  obliged  to  write  the  full  address  of  all  such  letters  in 
your  notes.  It  will  save  time  for  yourself  and  your 
dictator.  It  is  very  desirable  for  the  letters  to  which 
replies  have  been  dictated  to  be  placed  in  the  hands  of  the 
stenographer,  tliat  he  may  get  the  addresses  accurately. 
Business  men  vary  in  their  methods  of  copying  their 
letters,  and  of  filing  those  they  receive;  hence  the  expe- 
rience which  you  may  have  had  in  this  work  will  not  serve 
you,  and  you  will  need  to  keep  your  eyes  open.  Make  a 
note  of  all  technical  and  difficult  words  and  phrases 
common  to  your  special  line  of  work,  and  immediately 
practice  them  until  you  have  mastered  them. 

13.  Study  the  general  methods  of  the  office  in  which 
you  are,  and  adhere  to  them  closely.  Study  your  dicta- 
tor's ways,  and  try  to  please  him.  Always  be  ready  with 
your  pencil  to  respond  instantly  to  his  calls  to  take  dicta- 
tion; date  your  note-book  each  day.  Be  sure  to  spell  the 
names  of  all  firms  correctly;  never  guess  at  them,  if  you 
are  not  sure  how  to  spell  them,  but  ask  how,  or  refer  to 
the  letters  for  them.  A  mistake  in  the  name  of  a  firm 
may  be  disastrous,  and  cost  your  employer  more  in  one 
letter  than  you  can  earn  in  a  year.  This  is  very  impor- 
tant, because  the  misspelling  of  a  name  may  23revent  a 
letter  reaching  its  destination.     A  wrong  c|uotation  of  a 


AMANUENSIS   WOEK.  307 

fraction  in  a  sentence  would  make  a  difference,  in  some 
transactions,  of  hundreds,  and  even  thousands  of  dollars. 

14.  If,  at  any  time,  you  fail  in  taking  all  your  dictator 
says,  do  not  interrupt  him  while  he  is  dictating,  but 
promptly  at  the  end  of  the  letter  ask  for  instructions, 
and  supply  the  words  you  have  lost.  When  you  fail  to 
take  a  word,  leave  a  space  to  be  filled  when  you  shall 
have  ascertained  the  lost  word  or  phrase.  In  asking  for 
omitted  words,  begin  reading  at  the  beginning  of  the 
sentence,  that  your  dictator  may  more  readily  understand 
what  information  you  seek.  If  the  dictation  is  altogetlier 
too  fast  for  you  at  any  time,  pleasantly  request  your 
dictator  to  speak  more  slowly, 

15.  If  at  any  time  interruption  should  occur  and  stop 
the  dictation,  when  it  is  begun  again,  read  to  your  dicta- 
tor what  he  last  said,  that  he  may  readily  take  up  the 
thread  of  his  thought.  Be  ready  to  write  when  your 
dictator  starts;  do  not  allow  him  to  get  a  long  sentence 
ahead  of  you  while  you  are  getting  your  pencil  and  paper 
ready.  Do  not  allow  your  mind  to  wander,  but  hold 
your  attention  closely  to  the  work  in  aand,  even  though 
your  dictator  may  make  long  pauses.  You  must  be 
absolutely  certain  that  you  are  writing  what  your  dictator 
says,  that  you  may  be  sure  that  you  can  read  it  correctly. 

16.  If  required  to  interline  an  additional  phrase  or 
sentence,  make  a  double  cross  where  the  sentence  is 
to  be  introduced,  writing  the  sentence  which  is  to  be 
added  on  the  opposite  page  of  your  note-book,  beginning 
it  with  a  similar  double  cross,  that  in  transcribing  yov- 
may  recognize  it  as  added  matter  to  be  introduced  • 
this  point. 


208  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. - 

17.  Keep  well  n]^  with  your  work,  and  if  at  any  time 
some  letters  more  important  than  others  have  been  dic- 
tated, be  sure  to  give  these  your  first  attention,  that  you 
may  get  them  off  at  the  earliest  possible  hour.  Should 
you  find  that  you  are  likely  to  get  behind  with  your 
work,  be  sure  to  inform  your  dictator,  that  he  may  make 
such  arrangements  as  he  thinks  best  for  the  accomplish- 
ment of  the  work  in  hand.  If  your  attention  is  called 
especially  to  get  any  particular  letter  written,  or  a  special 
line  of  letters  completed  that  day,  or  for  a  specified  mail, 
do  not  allow  anything  to  interfere  with  your  work  until 
this  is  done.     Delay  may  prove  very  serious. 

18.  Never  betray  any  confidence  which  your  employer 
places  in  you,  nor  give  any  information  connected  with 
the  business  which  you  are  expected  to  retain  confiden- 
tially. As  much  of  the  business  of  the  house  is  done 
by  stenographers,  and  they  will  unavoidably  become 
acquainted  with  important  matters,  if  you  show  yourself 
worthy  of  confidence,  you  will  thereby  increase  the  value 
of  your  services,  and  attach  yourself  to  your  employer's 
interests.  If  you  betray  confidence,  you  will  never  again 
be  trusted. 

19.  Be  neat.  Be  methodical.  Be  orderly.  Be 
prompt.  Be  gentlemanly  or  ladylike.  Keep  up  with 
your  work.  Keep  good  hours.  Study  to  improve  your- 
self in  manners,  in  appearance,  in  address,  in  health,  in 
morals,  in  shorthand,  in  typewriting,  in  your  knowledge 
of  business  in  general.  You  will  thus  increase  your 
efficiency,  and  grow  in  favor  with  your  employers. 


THE   AVRITINCt    MACHINE.  209 

THE   WRITING  MACHINE. 

1.  It  is  not  my  purpose  to  advocate  any  particular 
machine,  but  to  give  a  few  general  instructions  to  guide 
the  learner. 

2.  The  first  thing  is  to  thoroughly  understand  the 
machine,  that  you  may  know  how  to  adjust  and  clean  it, 
and  how  to  put  the  paper  in,  and  regulate  it  so  as  to 
begin  and  end  the  printing  at  your  pleasure.  The  chair 
and  table  should  be  so  adjusted  in  height  that,  in  oper- 
ating, you  will  not  be  obliged  to  lift  the  hands  higher 
than  the  elbows  when  hanging  by  the  side. 

3.  The  second  thing  is  to  learn  the  alphabet  so  thor- 
oughly that  any  letter  can  be  touched  without  the  least 
hesitancy. 

4.  In  practicing  on  the  caligraph,  or  typewriter,  let 
the  left  hand  do  the  work  over  the  left  half  of  the  key- 
board, and  the  right  hand  that  over  the  right  half,  using 
the  first  and  second  fingers  to  do  most  of  the  work, 
touching  the  spacers  of  the  caligraph  with  the  third  and 
fourth  fingers,  and  that  of  the  typewriter  witli  the 
thumbs.  In  practice,  the  arms  should  not  rest,  as  stu- 
dents sometimes  rest  them,  on  the  front  of  the  caligraph. 
After  becoming  perfectly  familiar  with  the  alphabet,  the 
best  finger  exercises  for  elementary  practice  consist  of 
short  words  repeated,  carefully  accustoming  yourself  to 
touch  a  key  on  either  half  of  the  key-board  with  the 
nearest  fingers  of  the  corresponding  hand. 

5.  The  touch  of  the  keys  must  be  firm,  quick  and 
light,  the  fingers  raised  from  a  key  as  quickly  as  touched, 
never  holding  it  down.     Be  very  careful  to  strike  but  a 


210  ECLECTIC    SHOKTHAND. 

single  key  at  a  time.  A  uniform  toucli  is  very  imjDortaiit 
to  handsome  work.  If  some  keys  arc  very  lightly  struck 
and  more  force  applied  to  others,  the  printed  page  will 
surely  show  it,  appearing  clouded  and  unsatisfactory, 
while  a  uniform  touch  will  make  an  even  page.  Be  very 
23articular  to  cultivate  a  uniform  springing  touch.  Strike 
punctuation  keys  lighter  than  letters,  and  thus  avoid  the 
common  fault  of  driving  the  period  and  comma  through 
the  paper.  Drill  on  this  until  no  signs  of  the  punctua- 
tion marks  appear  on  the  back  of  the  page.  Practice 
short  words,  commas  and  periods  over  and  over,  then 
more  and  more  difficult  words.  Practice  familiar  sen- 
tences over  and  over.  Copy  good  literature,  taking  a 
sentence  in  the  mind  at  a  time.  Practice  business  letters 
until  familiar  with  the  location  of  each  part  of  a  letter. 
At  last  practice  much  from  your  sliortliand  notes,  for  this 
will  be  your  final  work,  on  which  you  will  stand  or  fall. 
One  gets  the  ability  to  pick  out  his  notes  by  labor,  guess- 
ing at  this  and  that  word,  until,  finally,  after  much 
study,  the  writing  is  deciphered,  and  he  then  thinks 
himself  ready  to  take  a  position.  But  this  is  very  inade- 
quate preparation  for  an  office;  no  business  man  will 
tolerate  it.  You  must  be  able  to  read  your  notes  pjwnpf J 1/ 
and  with  certainty  before  you  are  fit  for  a  position.  You 
must  be  able  to  sit  down  at  the  machine  with  the  notes 
before  you,  and  transcribe  them  without  hesitancy. 
When  you  can  do  this,  you  may  seek  a  position,  but  not 
a  day  sooner.  You  cannot  acquire  the  ability  to  tran- 
scribe your  notes  without  much  practice.  The  inspector 
of  mails  in  the  Chicago  postoffice  said:  "1  have  had  an 
Eclectic  in  my  office  a  year,  and  have  never  been  obliged 


THE    WETTING   MACHINE.  211 

to  make  a  single  correction  because  of  errors  in  tran- 
scribing her  notes."  This  reputation  I  covet  for  all 
Eclectics.     It  is  to  be  secured  only  by  hard  work,  work, 

WORK. 

G.  The  typewriter  practice  which  I  have  outlined  may 
seem  very  simple,  but  many  of  the  best  operators  have 
been  developed  by  this  process. 

CARE    OF   THE    MACHINE. 

1.  Many  parts  of  the  writing  machine  are  very  deli- 
cately adjusted,  and,  under  the  hands  of  a  rapid  operator, 
are  subject  to  wear  and  strain  every  hour.  In  the  great 
majority  of  machines,  supposed  to  be  entirely  out  of 
working  order,  it  will  be  found  that  the  trouble  can  be 
entirely  removed  by  cleaning  and  adjusting.  Dust  and 
dirt  permitted  to  accumulate  about  the  working  parts  of 
the  machine  interfere  with  its  free,  rapid  and  perfect 
action.  Heavy  oil  applied  to  remedy  the  difficulty  com- 
bines with  the  dirt,  producing  a  gummy  substance,  which 
soon  renders  the  machine  useless. 

2.  An  inexperienced  operator  v/ill  imagine  the  ma- 
chine out  of  adjustment,  and  give  this  screw  a  turn  for- 
ward, and  that  a  turn  backward,  at  random,  until  he 
can  no  longer  operate  the  key-board,  and  then  calls  the 
repairer,  who  simply  cleans  the  machine,  and  it  works 
like  a  new  instrument. 

3.  Neither  benzine  nor  oil  of  any  kind,  unless  it  is  of 
the  very  finest  quality,  and  combined  in  the  proportion 
of  about  two  parts  of  benzine  to  one  of  oil,  should  be 
used  about  a  machine,  and  then  it  should  be  used  only  for 
cleaning  the  machine.  Apply  this  oil  with  a  long-handled 
artist's  bristle-brush,  such  as  can  usually  be  purchased  at 


212  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAKD. 

the  stores  for  fifteen  cents.  Keep  the  oil  clean,  dropping 
it  on  the  brush,  operating  the  machine  during  the  clean 
iug,  to  be  sure  that  all  parts  of  it  have  been  reached. 
The  brush  should  be  frequently  cleaned  by  saturating  it 
with  oil,  and  wiping  both  oil  and  dirt  out  of  it  with  a 
piece  of  cotton  cloth.  There  is  usually  no  reason  for 
loosening  a  screw  or  removing  any  part  of  the  instrument. 
An  accumulation  of  dust  in  oil  on  the  rod  on  which  the 
carriage  slides  right  and  left  will  prevent  prompt  and 
rapid  action.  What  is  true  of  this  is  true  of  all  parts  of 
the  machine.  Dust,  accumulating  in  oil,  left  on  the  deli- 
cate parts,  clogs'  and  jirevents  their  action.  When  the 
carriage  seems  reluctant  to  respond,  look  for  dirt  on  the 
rod  on  which  it  slides.  Cut  this  dirt  off  by  means  ox  the 
comjoound  oil,  and  wipe  the  rod  thoroughly  clean.  In 
the  typewriter,  clean  the  grooved  wheels  which  run  on 
the  rod,  as  well  as  the  axles  on  which  the  wheels  turn. 
Thoroughly  clean  until  the  carriage  will  respond  promptly 
to  the  touch.  Do  not  wind  up  the  mainspring.  It  Avas 
probably  proj)erly  adjusted  when  you  received  it.  Keep 
the  dog  and  tooth  bars  beneath  the  carriage  thoroughly 
clean,  attending  to  it  frequently. 

4.  Want  of  alignment  is  often  supposed  to  be  the 
result  of  the  misplacement  of  a  type  arm,  wdien  dirt  alone 
is  responsible.  ISTo  matter  what  seems  to  be  the  matter 
with  a  machine,  the  chances  are  that  dirt  alone  is  respon- 
sible. It  is  always  safe  to  assume  that  to  be  the  case, 
and  that  a  thorough  cleaning  will  remove  the  difficulty. 
If  you  utterly  fail  by  this  means,  call  for  the  adjuster. 

5.  The  face  of  the  type  should  always  be  kept  per- 
fectly clean.     Many  a  good  machine  has  been  pronounced 


THE   WRITING    MACHINE.  213 

■used  up  when  it  only  needed  the  type  cleaned.  When  in 
constant  use,  the  type  should  be  cleaned  twice  a  day. 
Use  no  liquid  on  the  type,  hold  it  and  brush  it  with  a 
stiff  tooth  or  hand  brush  until  clean.  Whenever  an  e  or 
a  fills  up,  and  makes  a  heavy  or  blurred  impression,  clean 
it  at  once.  While  cleaning  the  type,  use  the  compound 
oil  to  cleanse  the  brush,  rubbing  it  on  an  old  newspajser 
to  thoroughly  remove  the  oil  before  brushing  the  type 
face.  Frequently  clean  out  the  top  of  the  type  bars  all 
around  the  circle  by  thoroughly  brushing  backvv^ard  and 
forward,  with  a  brush  frequently  cleaned  in  the  oil,  being 
careful  to  leave  no  oil  or  dirt  in  the  sj)aces  between  the 
bars. 

6.  Never  undertake  to  move  the  typewriter  carriage 
until  the  lever  by  which  it  is  moved  is  sufficiently  de- 
jjressed  to  raise  the  back  of  the  carriage  out  of  gear,  so 
that  it  will  move  readily  in  either  direction.  One  raking 
of  the  spacing  rack  across  the  face  of  the  spacing  dog  is 
enough  to  put  it  out  of  order.  If  by  such  carelessness 
the  dog  should  get  out  of  order,  it  will  need  to  be 
carefully  readjusted, 

7.  No  one  should  ever  be  allowed  to  put  his  fingers  on 
your  machine,  except  yourself.  Two  minutes  of  an  inex- 
perienced person  at  it  is  often  enough  to  ruin  it.  Persons 
serving  in  an  office  think  that,  having  seen  a  machine  in 
use,  they  can  run  it,  and  attempt  to  do  it,  often  with 
ruinous  results.  A  delicate  lady,  insisting  on  trying  her 
hand  on  a  new  machine,  at  the  first  movement  struck 
three  keys  at  once,  as  some  people  pound  a  piano,  and 
went  on  striking  key  after  key;  and  the  machine  had  to 
be  returned  to  Chicago  for  repairs.  When  your  machine  is 


•414:  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

not  in  use,  keep  it  covered,  and  when  yon  leave  the  oiSce, 
always  lock  the  machine. 

8.  Keep  an  eye  to  the  ribbon,  to  be  sure  that  it  always 
moves,  and  reverse  the  action  before  it  rolls  entirely  to 
one  wheel.  To  prevent  the  curling  of  the  ribbon,  it  is 
best  to  use  the  edges  first,  and  afterward  the  middle  of  it. 

9.  Keep  the  machine  free  from  dust  by  covering  and 
frequently  dusting  it.  Keep  it  free  from  rust  by  daily 
running  over  the  plated  parts  with  a  cloth  moistened 
with  the  composite  oil,  wiping  it  dry.  If  a  letter  flies 
out  of  a  type  bar,  it  can  usually  be  found,  rej)laced,  and 
firmly  pressed  in  by  means  of  a  piece  of  wood. 

CORRESPONDENCE. 

J.  It  is  not  proposed  in  this  work  to  give  a  thorough 
treatise  on  correspondence,  which  necessarily  would  in- 
volve the  study  of  orthography,  grammar  and  rhetoric, 
but  simply  to  provide  a  few  j^ractical  exercises  for  the 
student. 

2.  All  the  following  letters  should  be  written  in  short- 
hand, and  carefully  transcribed  on  the  machine  from  the 
shorthand  notes,  instead  of  from  this  book.  Each  tran- 
script should,  however,  be  carefully  compared  with  the 
copy  in  the  book,  and  should  be  written  until  it  can  be 
reproduced  perfectly  and  quickly.  It  is  a  principle  of 
art,  that  a  few  things  thoroughly  done  are  worth  more, 
educationally  and  practically,  than  mauy  things  done  in 
an  indifferent  way.  Do  not  allow  yourself  to  be  self- 
indulgent,  but  resolutely  determine  not  to  be  satisfied 
until  you  can  take  a  letter  from  dictation,  and  sitting 


lYPE-WRITTEX    LETTERS,  215 

down  to  the  machine,  transcribe  it  perfectly  on  the  first 
piece  of  paper  you  put  in  the  machine.  It  will  take  you 
some  time  to  arrive  at  this  j)oint,  but  it  must  be  done, 
and  if  you  will  work  faithfully  at  it,  you  will  certainly 
accomjjlish  it. 

3.  The  letters,  which  include  bills  and  statements 
of  prices,  are  especially  valuable  for  practice  on  the 
machine,  because  of  the  care  which  they  require  in 
writing. 

4.  These  letters  are  reproductions,  by  the  photo. 
process,  of  double-spaced,  type-written  letters,  reduced  in 
size  to  conform  to  the  pages  of  this  book;  therefore,  in 
copying  them,  a  line  here  Avill  make  a  line  of  regular 
machine  length.  The  paragraphing  here  corresponds  to 
No.  10  of  the  machine. 

5.  In  connection  with  this  work  you  should  make  a 
thorough  study  of  the  business  terms  in  the  Shorthand 
Dictionary. 

TYPK-WKITTEN   LETTERS. 

Dubuque,  la.,  Sept.  Isl,  1889. 
South  Bend  Banking  Co., 

South  Bend,  Ind. 
Gentlemen:  — 

Your  favor  of  the  8th  inst.,  with  application  of  Daniel 
Himt  is  at  hand,  examined,  recommended  and  forwarded  to  Cincinnati 
for  the  approval  of  our  Executive  Committee. 

Herewith  enclosed  find  first  and  second  mortgages,  principal  and 
commission  notes  and  affidavit  of  Ben  Harvey.  Also  Draft  No.  1215 
for  $2500.00  to  close  the  loan.  Before  sending  executed  papers  to  us 
be  sure  that  the  same  are  all  complete,  abstract  perfect,  and  a  policy 
of  insurance  obtained  for  the  insurable  value  of  the  buildings. 

Thanking  you  for  your  past  patronage  and  hoping  to  receive  a 
large  bulk  of  A,  No.  1  Indiana  loans  from  you  soon,  we  remain, 

Very  truly  yours. 


216  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAKD. 

Chi^cago,  111*,  Sept.  14,  1888« 
Mr*  Robert  Miner, 

Fulton.  111. 
Dear  Sir: 

Mr.  Hadley  has  reported  to  me  the  result  of  his  interview  with 
you  respecting  your  claim  against  the  company  for  excavations,  which 
you  state  were  made  outside  of  the  right  of  v;ay. 

Mr.  Hadley  says  that  he  offered  you  $50.00  for  a  deed  to  the 
strip  of  land  25  feet  in  width  and  300  feet  in  length  opposite  the 
cut  where  it  is  claimed  by  you  we  are  at  fault.   while  I  am  of  the 
opinion  that  the  amount  offered  is  much  too  high,  still  for  the  sake 
of  making  an  adjustment  I  will  confirm  and  renew  Mr.  Hadley's  offer, 
which  may  be  considered  final. 

If  this  will  be  satisfactory  we  are  ready  to  close  the  matter 
with  you  on  this  basis;  if  not,  we  do  not  see  that  we  need  to  continue 
the  negotiations.  Yours  truly. 


Brighton,  Staten  Island,  Feb.  19,  1888. 
Dear  Sir: 

I  am  very  sensible  of  the  great  honor,  of  your  invitation  to  the 
annual  banquet  of  the  Chicago  Club,  on  the  23d  inst.,  for  which  1  beg 
to  offer  the  Committee  my  hearty  acknowledgment. 

The  renown  of  that  banquet  and  wide  attention  which  the  speeches 
of  its  orators  command,  make  the  invitation,  at  this  time  of  unusual 
political  interest,  exceedingly  tempting,  and  I  wish  it  were  possible 
to  avail  myself  of  your  courtesy. 

But  my  occupations  and  engagements  already  made  for  the  time 
mentioned,  compel  me  to  lose  the  signal  pleasure  which  you  propose  to 
me,  and  I  can  only  assure  you  of  my  sino3re  regret  and  the  confidence 
that  the  Chicago  Club  by  their  patriotism  and  their  independence  will 
greatly  aid  a  wise,  popular  decision  in  the  impending  national  debate 
this  year.  Very  respectfully. 


^ 


Chicago,  111.,  Jan.  27,  1866. 
Messrs.  Hayward  Bros.  &  Co., 

Bloomington,  111. 
Dear  Sirs: 

We  have  your  favor  of  the  I7th  Inst.,  Justifying  yourselves  for 
constant  claims  upon  us  for  freight  deductions,  about  which  we  wrote 
you  in  our  letter  of  the  12th  inst. 

You  say:   "We  charge  as  quoted  by  your  agent,  and  as  given  us  by 
others.  We  have  several  quotations  on  same  terms."  All  our  quota- 


TYPE-WRITTEN"   LETTERS.  217 

tlons  are  subject  to  change  without  notice,  and  no  agent's  quotation 
is  binding  when  not  accompanying  the  order  which  it  is  intended  to 
govern.   Keither  do  we  agree  to  have  our  bills  to  our  customers  re- 
vised by  the  quotations  of  other  houses.  .  You  are  good  enough  merchants 
to  thoroughly  understand  the  above  position. 

Whenever  you  wish  to  purchase  any  goods  of  us  on  a  quotation  pre- 
viously given  by  our  agent  you  should  mention  that  quotation  with 
your  order.  Very  truly  yours. 


Chicago,  111.,  Jan.  2,  1886. 
T.  H.  Bloom,  Esq., 

Quincy,  111. 
Dear  Sir: 

We  send  you  sample  of  Barb  Wire,  that  we  will  sell  you  In  half  or 
car  lots;  Painted  at  7  cts..  Galvanized  at  8  cts.,  cash  ten  days.  It 
is  a  fully  licensed  wire,  and  a  good  article.  We  have  sold  it  for  two 
years  past,  and  it  is  giving  good  satisfaction. 

A.s  you  did  not  answer  our  telegram  to-day,  that  price  is  off  on 
nails.  Will  sell  you  half  car  nails  at  $3.40  rates,  cash  ten  days. 

All  above  is  F.  0.  B.  oars,  Chicago,  111.  Could  not  ship  for  two 
or  three  weeks,  or  to  suit  if  later.        Yours  truly. 


Messrs.  Hayward  Bros.  &  Co., 

Bloomington,  111. 
Gentlemen : 

Your  postal  card  of  the  24th  inst.  at  hand  ordering  two  Tiger 
Shellers,  and,  in  as  much  as  we  have  no  arrangements  made  with  you 
for  next  season's  sale  of  these  Tiger  Shellers,  we  thought  best  to 
correspond  with  you,  previous  to  making  shipment,  and  say  that  our 
regular  prices  for  Tiger  Shellers  are:  $8.50  with  fan  and  feed  table, 
$8.00  with  fan,  and  $7.50  without  fan  and  feed  table;  these  terms 
contemplate  three  mojiths'  time,  or,  if  cash  is  remitted  within  fif- 
teen days  from  date  of  invoice,  a  discount  of  5  per  cent,  will  be 
allowed  from  these  prices. 

We  are  making  this  year  a  very  superior  One  Hole  Hand  Sheller 
with  wrought  iron  spoked  balance  wheel,  with  every  improvement  that 
a  sheller  of  this  kind  should  have.  Built  with  the  utmost  care  and 
gotten  up  so  it  will  thoroughly  please  farmers,  not  only  for  a  year, 
but  as  long  as  they  can  use  them.  We  are  not  competing  with  the  cheap 
sheller  trade  of  this  country  as  there  would  be  no  money  in  that  kind 
of  business,  but  are  manufacturing  in  our  Tiger  Sheller,  a  sheller 
that  is  first  class,  and  we  must  have  the  prices  we  are  asking  for 
it,  in  order  to  afford  any  reasonable  amount  of  profit.  Of  course. 


218  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

to  ship  an  inferior  sheller,  we  could  sell  at  the  same  prtce  as  other 
parties,  but  we  do  not  care  to  cater  to  that  kind  of  trade,  as  there 
is  no  money  in  the  business,  and  we  are  fully  confident  that  there  is 
a  good  trade  for  that  class  of  shellers,  and  that  farmers  will  not 
hesitate  to  pay  from  $1  to  $2  more  for  them. 

With  this  full  understanding  as  to  prices  and  terms  we  shall  be 
pleased  to  ship  you  any  sheller  that  you  may  desire. 

Yours  truly. 


J.  0.  Woodward,  Esq., 

Hartford,  Conn.: 
Dear  Sir; 

Your  letter  of  the  2d  inst.  with  drafts  to  close  loans  as  fol- 
lows, is  at  hand. 

No.  1500  to  the  order  of  Samuel  Kent,... $1200.00 

No.  1501  »   "    »    »  Eliza  Bent, 850.00 

No.  1502  «   "    "    "  David  Field, 500.00 

Total,  52550.00 

Papers  to  close  the  loan  will  be  sent  out  to-day,  and  completed 
papers  sent  to  you  as  soon  as  they  are  received  at  this  office. 

Herewith  I  hand  you  several  applicati-ons,  all  through  our  old 
and  reliable  correspondent,  E.  B.  Woods,  of  Chaumont,  N.  Y.   I  have 
thoroughly  examined  the  loan  and  think  it  is  a  good  one.   If  the 
committee  do  not  care  to  handle  the  loan  I  v;ill  take  it  myself. 

Business  will  be  brisk  here  this  fall  I  think,  and  we  are  now 
ready  to  Tiandle  a  good  many  loans.   Keep  enough  funds  on  deposit  to 
take  all  the  loans  we  can  get. 

Yours  truly. 


Chicago,  111.,  Jan.  27,  1386.    2:30  P.  M. 
Dear  Sir: 

Wheat  opened  firm  and  slightly  higher,  but  soon  lost  the  advance, 
ruling  dull  for  a  short  time,  and  then  suddenly  started  upward,  sell- 
ing at  88  cts.  for  May,  from  which  point  it  broke  to  87  3/8  for  a 
closing.   Exports  show  some  increase.   The  general  feeling  is  "bull- 
ish", more  from  a  suspicion  that  the  market  is  manipulated  by  a 
strong  "clique"  that  now  propose  to  put  it  up,  rather  than  the  belief 
that  the  Wheat  is  actually  worth  more  than  the  present  prices. 
Receipts  light,  samples  in  good  demand. 

Corn  is  neglected,  but  I  look  for  it  to  very  soon  begin  to 
attract  attention.   Present  prices  are  not  bringing  Corn  to  market 


TYPE-W'RTTTEX   LETTERS.  219 

freely  enough*   Farmers  as  a  rule  want  more  for  their  Com,  and 
feeders  are  paying  more  than  shippers  can  stand.   Should  May  Corn 
go  to  45  cts.  it  would  be  no  surprise,  and  would  still  be  low.   The 
East  will  soon  begin  to  want  more  Corn  and  the  Southern  order  trade 
(for  Thite  Corn)  is  increasing.   Samples  were  a  trifle  firmer  to-day, 
selling  very  readily. 

Oats  show  a  little  change,  remaining  firm,  and  all  samples  sell 
readily.   Very  little  advance  can  be  looked  for  until  Corn  starts 
upward.   The  demand  promises  to  be  good  for  the  balance  of  the  sea- 
son, and  stocks  are  light.   Shippers  buying  more  freely  this  week. 

Rye  and  Barley  dull  and  unchanged. 
-  Timothy  Seed  very  firm  and  1  ct.  higher.   Receipts  fair  and 
dealers  buying  anxiously.   The  spring  trade  which  will  be  active  from 
now  on  is  expected  to  be  heavy.   March  sold  at  31.85  light. 

Flax  easy,  trading  light  and  demand  slow. 

Awaiting  your  valued  favors,  I  am 

Respectfully  yours. 


Chicago,  111.,  April  11,  1889. 
Mr.  F.  H.  Henderson, 

Huron,  Dak. 
Dear  Sir:  '/' 

I  notice  many  of  our  cars  with  U.  P.  single  link  cast  draw-bars 
in  them;  I  cannot  say  at  this  writing  where  they  are  put  in,  but  I 
do  not  want  any  of  our  cars  accepted  from  foreign  lines  equipped  in 
this  manner,  neither  do  I  wish  any  U.  P.  draw-bars  placed  in  our  cars 
by  our  own  men,  unless  it  be  that  they  are  the  only  bars  they  have, 
and  the  car  is  loaded  with  perishable  or  time  freight. 

Please  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  this  and  advise  me,  if  you 
know  where  these  bars  are  being  put  on  our  cars. 

Yours  truly, 


St.  Albans,  Vt.,  Jan.  15,  1884. 
Messrs.  Page  &  Co., 

Boston,  Mass. 
Gentlemen: 

You  will  please  furnish,  on  account  of  this  Company,  the  follow- 
ing articles,  and  send  duplicate  bills  to  the  undersigned  immediately 
upon  shipment.   Payment  will  be  made  upon  receipt  of  invoice  and 
shipping  documents,  or  as  per  contract,  but  no  draft  on  this  Company 
will  be  honored. 


"t  \' 


220  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAKD. 

When  a  particular  pattern  or  quality  is  not  specified,  this  order 
Is  for  goods  of  guaranteed  first  quality  only: — 

2000  tons  steel  rails,  56  lb.,  3  1/2  inch,  Sandsburg  section. 
1500  kegs  best  railroad  spikes,  5  1/2  x  9/16. 
10,000  angle  bars,  to  fit  section  of  rail,  as  above,  and 
40,000  3  1/4  X  3/4  track-bolts,  with  hexagon  nuts. 

Price  of  the  rails  to  be  $42.60  per  gross  ton,  delivered  f.  o.  b. 
Worcester;  spikes,  $2.85  per  100  lbs.;  angle-bars,  $2.40  per  100  lbs., 
and  $2.60  per  100  lbs.  for  track-bolts.   Spikes  to  be  delivered 
f.  o.  b.,  Boston;  angle-bars  and  track-bolts  with  hexagon  nuts  to  be 
delivered  f.  o.  b.,  Wilmington,  Del. 

The  above  order  is  given  on  condition  of  delivery  on  or  before 
April  1st,  next,  by  which  it  is  understood  that  this  Company  is  ex- 
empt from  any  charge  of  packing,  or  any  cost  other  than  the  price  of 
goods. 

Please  acknowledge  receipt  of  order  and  oblige. 

Yours  very  truly. 


Chicago,  111.,  Jan.  18,  1888« 
Steele  &  Fuller, 

Atchison,  Kan., 
Gentlemen: 

Yours  of  the  23d  inst.  duly  received.   We  quote  you  on: 

100  lbs.  6-lb.  Tinned  Rivets 20  cts  per  lb. 

30   "   1  1/4  lb.  Tinned  Rivets 29   "     " 

40   "   1  3/4  X  1/4  Black  Head  Wagon  Rivets,  13   "     " 
20   "   1  1/4  X  1/4    n     "     ..      "     13   " 
10   "   1  1/4  X  1/4    "     •'     "      "     13   " 

45  cts.  discount  for  freight  allowed  to  the  Mississippi  River. 
We  hope  to  receive  your  order. 

Very  truly  yours. 


Chicago,  111.,  Jan.  21,  1882* 
Messrs.  Harwood  Bros.  &  Co., 

Bloomington,  111., 
Dear  Sirs: 

Replying  to  your  inquiries  of  the  18th  inst.,  we  quote  you 
f.  o.  b.  here,  4  months,  or  3  per  «ent.  off  for  cash:  — 


TYPE- WRITTEN  LETTERS.  221 

0.  H.  Crown  Slab  Steel 3  1/2  els.  per  lb. 

Solid  Cast  Steel 4  1/2  "    " 

Crucible  Cast  Steel 5  1/2  "    " 

Iron  Center  Cast  Steel 8  1/2  " 

Spring  Steel 3  3/4  "    " 

1/2  and  S/10  Ground  Harrow-Tooth  Steel  ...4  ° 

N.  S.  N.  Iron ^...4  "   card. 

Yours  truly. 


Chicago,  111.,  Feb.  24,  1886. 
Messrs.  Hummel  Bros.  &  Co., 

Bloomington,  111., 
Dear  Sirs: 

Te  will  sell  you  axes  at  the  following  prices,  delivered  in 
Bloomington,  payable  4  mos.  after  date,  less  ZX   for  cash; 

Manns'  Red  Warrior  Axes,  Red,  Blk.,  or  Bronzed,  89.00  per  doz» 

"     "  Handled   "   "or  ex.  No.  1  handles,  13.00  " 

"     "     "  Red  or  Blk.,  "     "     12.00  •• 

"     "     "    Boys'  Axes 9.00  '■ 

Marshalls'  Axes 17.00  " 

Manns'  Red  Warrior  Double  Bitt  Axes 8.50  " 

Marshalls'          •■     "    "  13.00  " 

Beveled  Single  Bitts,  Extra J .50 

"    Double    "      "   1.00  " 

Silver  Steel  Axes,      "   .50 

Your  orders  are  solicited,  and  shall  have  our  best  attention. 

Yours  truly. 


Atchison,  Kan.,  Nov.  10,  1885. 
M.  Thompson  &  Co., 

Kansas  City,  Mo. 
Gentlemen : 

You  may  ship  us  the  lollowing  Long  Leaf  Yellow  Pine: 

1  Car  7/8x4  1st  and  2d  Clear  Fl'g,  at $25.00 

1  "    "    Standard  Fl'g,  1st  and  2d  Clear,  at  20.00 

1  "  1x4  1st  and  2d  Clear  Sis.  and  "  E,  at 18.00 

Te  will  need  lO  cars  each  for  immediate  shipment,  providing  the 
quality  is  satisfactory.  Ve  want  all  straight  grained  we  can  possibly 


232  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

get  of  the  Ist  and  2d  cleare  Consider  It  should  run  ai  least  76  per 
cent. 

Yours  truly. 


Messrs.  Brown  &  Fisher  Lumber  Co., 

Cberlin,  Kan. 
Gentlemen: 

We  charge  your  account  freight  as  follows: 

Car  1234,  Weight  30,000  lbs 320.00 

"  12354,  "  20,500  "  40.00 

"  5678,  "  24,500  "  45.00 

"  34511,  "  34,500  "  50.00 

"  4551,  "  22,300  "  60.00 

•  4321,  "  54,500  "  60.00 

•  4561,  "  30,000  "  40.00 

Yours  truly. 


Mr.  J.  P«  Williams, 

Bushnell.  111. 
Dear  Sir: 

Your  favor  of  the  15th  containing  remittance  at  hand,  for  which 
accept  our  thanks. 

We  have  no  left-hand  Stitching  Horse  in  stock,  but  we  can  have 
one  made  at  the  factory  if  you  desire. 

We  quote  you  prices  on  Buckles,  etc.,  as  follows: 

X.  C.  "Champion  Trace"  (C  plate)  at $2.00  per  dozen. 

"      "      "    (Japanned)  at. 1.75 

5/8  inch  "Kangaroo,"  at 75  per  gross, 

3/4   "       °     at 85 

7/8    "       "      at 95    " 

3/4  Barrel  Roller,  at 1.25    " 

1     "      "    at 90 

No.   44  Ring  Bitts,    (stiff  or  Joint). 45  per  dozen. 

"50  "        '  "  "         55 

"  17  Half  Snaffle 90    " 

••  20  Full  Snaffle 1.10 

Hoping  to  receive  an  order  from  you  soon,  we  remain 

Yours  truly, 


TYPE-AVRITTEK    LETTERS.  223 

St.  Albans,  Vermont,  Jan.  10,  1884. 
Messrs.  Page  &  Co., 

Boston,  Mass. 
Dear  Sirs: 

Please  quote  us  your  lowest  price  for 

2000  tons,  56  lb.,  3  1/3  inch  Steel  Rail,  Sandsburg  section. 

1500  kegs  5  1/2  x  9/16  best  Railroad  Spikes. 

10,000  Fish  Plates,  angle,  and 

40,000  3  3/4  X  3/4  Track  Bolts,  with  Hexagon  Nuts. 

All  to  be  delivered  by  April  1st,  next. 
An  immediate  reply  will  oblige, 

Yours  truly, 


Dear  Sir: 

Please  express  to  Mr.  V,   H.  Green,  Mobile,  Al8., 

3  No.  45  Lamps. 

2  Large  Shade  Holders. 

2  Large  Sockets  with  Tubes. 

220  Large  Porcelain  Shades. 

1  Lock  Switch  C. 

Bill  at  the  usual  discount  and  send  goods  at  the  earliest  possi- 
ble moment.   Must  have  goods  before  the  20th  without  fail. 

Yours  truly. 


Chicago,  111.,  Sept.  22,  1885. 
Mr.  C.  N.  Diets, 

Omaha,  Neb. 
Dear  Sir: 

We  have  received  your  order  for  1  car  load  of  extra  shingles. 

2  car  loads  of  2  x  4,  12  and  16. 

1  car  load  of  first  common  siding. 

1  car  load  of  inch  B  selects,  surface  on  one  side. 

12  cars  1  1/4  inch,  1/3  clear. 

1/4  car  1  1/2  surfaced  on  one  side. 

You  have  omitted  to  name  the  grade  of  the  1  1/2,  but  to  pxpedite 
shipping  your  order  please  wire  us  at  our  expense  the  grade  required. 

Respectfully  yours. 


224  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAls^D. 

Omaha,  Neb.,  January  22,  1886. 
G*  H«  Crocker,  Esq*, 

F.  A.,  C.  R.  I.  &  P.  Ry.,  Chicago. 
Dear  Sir: 

Returning  all  papers  in  0-C  claim  of  Kelley,  Haus  i  Co., 
Chicago,  |53.90,  would  state  that  you  are  at  liberty  to  charge  this 
company  $46.69,  as  follovrs: 

Charges  Cheyenne  to  Garrison $42.98 

Pro  chgd.  Chicago  to  Cheyenne  76  1/4  per  cent. 15.96 

Should  be  $58.94 

300  at  11.75 $  5.19 

270  at  11.20 3.24 

360  at  $1.06 , , 1.82 

$12.25 

$46.69 


Detroit,  Mich.,  Oct.  25,  1889. 
Messrs*  Elmore  Bros.  &  Co., 

Bloomington,  111. 
Gentlemen: 

Your  card  of  the  24th  at  hand.  We  take  pleasure  in  sending  you 
cuts  of  the  "Palace"  B.  B.,  and  quote  prices  as  follows: 

No.  45 $36.00 

Mo.  50 ' 40.00 

These  are  the  larger  sizes  with  great  heating  capacity,  and 
though  we  are  crowded  with  orders  beyond  measure,  should  make  an 
extra  effort  to  give  you  satisfaction  on  any  orders  you  should  favor 
us  with.  Our  Round  "Peninsular"  B»  B.  is  splendid.  One  customer  in 
Cincinnati  says:  "I  ordered  some  'Graphics,  but  had  I  seen  and 
Jmown  your  Stove  as  I  do  now,  I  would  not  have  bought  any  of  them  at 
all,"  and  continuing,  says:  "The  'Peninsular'  is  the  emperor  and  pope 
of  Base  Burners  in  comparison  with  the  «Garlaiid,'  which  they 
advertise  as  the  prince  of  Base  Burners." 

We  quote    Ho.  25  Firepots  13  1/2.-. $26.95 

"  30     "  14  1/2...=-. 30.45 

"  40     •  15  1/2 33.95 

<•  50    "  16  1/2.. ,...;....  40.95 


TYPE-WRITTEN    LETTERS.  225 

Price  includes  Leg  Base  and  Rail,  and  all  full  Nickeled*  ^  We  solicit 

your  favors.  Terms:  freight  allowed  to  Chicago,  4  months  or  5  per 

cent*  cash. 

Yours  truly. 


Atchison,  Kan.,  10-12-1885. 
TTorthington  &  Pillsbury  Lumber  Co., 

Omaha,  Neb., 
Gentlemen: 

We  have  the  following  cars  on  track,  and  can  offer  to  you  at 
annexed  prices  delivered.  We  consider  that  the  stock  in  all  of  these 
cars  -will  be  fully  up  to  grade,  and  most  of  it  above  grade: 

10  Cars  2x4,  No.l,  D«E,  400  12  ft,  400  14,  700  16,  100  18,  100  20?20. 

5  "  TX6,    "     "   300  14,  300  16,  100  18,  100  20.. 18. 

10  "  2x8,    "     "    300  12,  200  14,  300  16,  50  18,  50  20 21. 

10  •  2x12,  No. 2,  RF,  150  12,  150  14,  150  16 19. 

10  "  2x10,    "     *■   175  12,  175  14,  181  16 18. 

10  "  No.  2,  Bds.  Sis.,  1000  10  ft.,  5000  12,  5000  14 18.5 

10  "  Ho.  3,    "    "   12  and  14  ft. 16. 

5  ••  12,  No.  3,  Bds.  Sis.,  1/4  12,  1/4  14,  1/2  16..... 20. 

5  ■  No.  2,  Fencing  Sis.,  1/3  12,  1/3  14,  1/3  16 19. 

5  "  6,  ••    C.&D.  Pl'g,  1/4  12,  1/4  14,  1/2  16,  1/3  C 25. 

X  "  4,  "    Select  Y.  P.  Fl'g,  12,  14,  16 22. 

5  '  8,  No.  1,  Drop  Siding,  3000  12  ft.,  3000  14,  8000  16 22. 

5  "  8,  No.  1,  Ship  Lap  "    •     "      „   n    »   .  20. 

5  "  10,   "        "       1.     "      n       u    »     .    ..  22. 

5  "  In.  B.  Select  Sis.,  12-14-16  ft. 35. 

10  "  No.  1  Lath 4. 

10  ■  XXX  Shingles  .^„ 3.7 

If  you  can  use  any  of  the  above  cars,  please  let  us  know  at 
once,  so  that  we  can  forward  same  immediately. 

Hoping  you  will  favor  us  witl:,  a  good  order,  »e  remain. 

Yours  truly. 


226  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

EXERCISES  FOR  CORRECTION. 

Correct  the  following  letters  in  spelling,  capitaliza- 
tion, punctuation,  and  paragrapliy,  and.  transcribe  them 
on  the  machine  in  perfect  form: 

EXERCISE    1. 

Chicago  ill  may  14  1889  Mr  J.  W  Lewis  Paxton  111  C  I  St  L  &  C  ear 
8154  arived  here  biled  for  wood  street  body  of  ear  has  bin  so  badly 
recked  that  it  will  have  to  be  rebilt  pleas  advis  us  if  you  no  when 
and  wher  the  car  was  reeked  and  from  what  point  it  was  sent  to 
your  yards  we  have  know  repo»'t  showing  that  car  has  bin  damagd  on 
C  &  N  W  road  yours  truely. 

EXERCISE   2. 

Chicago  ill  april  8th  1889  messrs  Franklin  Me  veigh  &  cO  city 
gentlemen  we  regret  that  we  are  compeled  to  report  that  our 
eforts  to  coleet  this  acount  seem  to  have  proved  a  failure  we  took 
judgment  through  our  atorney  at  m  arinette  eing  the  nearest  point 
wher  we  could  reach  the  debter  we  had  hoped  to  get  something  out 
of  it  by  a  levey  or  a  lein  upon  real  estate  as  we  had  ben  informed 
through  what  we  suposed  to  be  relible  sourses  that  the  party  had 
real  estate  at  florence  wise  it  now  developes  however  that  this  real 
estate  had  been  sold  for  tackses  and  there  is  no  posibility  of  reching 
it  in  that  direcsion  tlicre  is  some  slight  prospect  that  we  may  get 
something  out  of  the  acount  yet  but  the  clame  is  vary  doutful  as  w^e 
have  led  you  into  sum  exponce  thrugh  our  expectasion  to  be 
able  to  realise  we  shall  certainly  leave  no  ston  unturnd  to  get  some- 
thing out  of  the  acount  yours  truly  N  W  Martin 

EXERCISE  3. 

Chicago  111  May  14th  1889  Mr  II  C  wilson  manchester  iowa  dear  sii' 
Replying  to  yours  of  dec  6  giving  comparative  statment  of  oil  and 
waiste  used  at  wood  street  i  must  say  i  am  gratfied  at  the  result  of 
your  eforts  and  beleve  equal  results  can  be  obtaned  at  every  point 
on  the  road  where  this  kind  of  work  is  perforin  yours  truely 


THE   LEGAL  AMAZSTUENSIS.  23"? 


THE  LEGAL  AMANUENSIS. 

1.  The  work  of  the  legal  amanuensis  consists  in  taking 
from  dictation  and  transcribing  various  kinds  of  legal 
papers  and  correspondence. 

2.  Such  is  the  peculiar  character  of  legal  phraseology 
and  the  prescribed  forms  of  legal  papers  that  it  is  necessary 
that  the  student  who  seeks  to  enter  legal  work,  should,  to 
some  extent,  become  familiar  with  both.  For  this  pur- 
pose, make  a  thorough  study  of  and  practice  both  in 
shorthand  and  on  the  machine  the  following  forms. 

3.  In  connection  with  this  practice  on  legal  forms, 
make  a  thorough  study  of  the  legal  terms  of  the  Short- 
hand Dictionary. 

4.    AFFIDAVIT  FOR  ATTACHMENT. 
State  op  Illinois,  )  ^^ 

''  r  SS. 

County  of  Cook,   ) 

Arthur  B.  Brooke,  of  Chicago,  etc.,  being  duly  sworn,  upon  his 
oath  says,  that  Chester  Deitrick  is  justly  indeljted  to  him  in  the  sura 
of  One  Hundred  Dollars  by  his,  the  said  Chester  Deitrick's,  certain 
promissory  note  in  writing,  and  tliat  the  said  Chester  Deitrick  is 
about  to  depart  from  this  State,  with  the  intention  of  having  his 
effects  removed  from  this  State,  to  the  injury  of  the  said  Arthur  B. 
Brooke;  and  athant  further  says  that  he  saw  the  note  signed  by 
the  said  Chester  Deitrick,  and  knows  the  aniount  to  be  One  Hundred 
Dollars. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me, 

this dayot; ,  1890. 

E.  F.,  Clerk. 

5.   AFFIDAVIT  FOR  GARNISHEE  PROCESS. 

State  of  Illinois,  [ 
County  of  Cook.   I 

A.  B.,  being  duly  sworn  according  to  law,  deposes  and  says: 
that  on  the  10th  day  of  March,  A.  D.  1889,  the  said  A.  B.  recovered 


228  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

a  judgment  in  the  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County  against  Munn  G. 
Wood,  for  the  sum  of  Ninety  Dollars,  besides  costs  of  suit;  that 
afterward,  to  wit,  on  the  19tli  day  of  March,  A.  D.  1889,  an  execu- 
tion was  issued  upon  said  judgment,  wliich  said  execution  was,  on 
the  20th  day  of  March,  1889,  returned  by  the  sheriflE  of  Cook  County, 
to  whom  the  same  was  directed,  no  part  satisfied,  and  no  property 
found. 

Deponent  further  saith  that  the  said  defendant  has  no  property, 
within  the  knowledge  of  affiant,  in  his  possession,  liable  to  execu- 
tion; and  that  affiant  hath  just  reason  to  believe  that  John  B.  Little 
is  indebted  to  said  defendant,  Munn  G.  Wood,  and  has  effects  and 
estate  of  said  defendant  in  his  hands. 

Deponent  further  saith  that  there  is  danger  that  the  benefit  of 
said  judgment  will  be  lost,  unless  garnishee  process  issue  before  the 
leturn  day  of  the  said  execution.  A.  B. 

Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me, 

this day  of .,  A.  D.  1889. 

E.  F.,  Clerk. 

6.   POWER  OF  ATTORNEY  TO  COLLECT  A  DEBT. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  Alvin  Boltwood,  of  Chi- 
cago, Cook  County,  Illinois,  reposing  special  trust  and  confidence  in 
Charles  Dunning  of  Moreland,  Cook  County,  Illinois,  have  made,  or- 
dained, nominated,  constituted  and  appointed,  and  by  these  presents 
do  make,  ordain,  nominate,  constitute  and  appoint  him  ray  true  and 
lawful  attorney,  for  me,  and  in  my  name  and  stead,  and  for  my  own 
proper  use  and  benefit  to  ask,  demand,  sue  for,  recover  and  receive 
of  and  from  Elmer  F.  Foss,  of  Chicago,  Cook  County,  Illinois,  all 
such  sum  or  sums  of  money,  debts  and  demands,  whatsoever,  which 
are  now  due  and  owing  unto  me,  the  said  Alvin  Boltwood,  by  and 
from  the  said  Elmer  F.  Foss,  and  to  have,  use  and  take  all  lawful 
ways  and  means,  in  my  name  or  otherwise,  for  the  recovery  thereof, 
by  attachnient,  arrest,  distress  or  otherwise,  and  to  compound 
and  agree  for  the  same ;  and  acquittances  or  other  sufficient  dis- 
charges for  the  same,  for  me  and  in  my  name,  to  make,  seal  and 
deliver ;  and  to  do  all  other  lawful  acts  and  things,  whatsoever,  con- 
cerning the  premises,  as  fully  and  in  every  respect  as  I  myself  might, 
or  should  do,  were  I  personally  present  at  the  doing  thereof;  and  attor- 
neys, one  or  more  under  him  for  the  purposes  aforesaid,  to  make,  and 
again  at  his  pleasure  to  revoke ;  ratifying  and  confirming,  and  by 


THE   LEGAL  AMANUENSIS.  239 

these  presents  allowing  whatsoever  my  said  attorney  shall,  in  my 
name,  lawfully  do,  or  cause  to  be  done,  in  and  about  the  premises, 
by  virtue  of  these  presents. 
In  witness  whereof,  etc. 

7.   DECLARATION  ON  A  PROMISSORY  NOTE. 

State  of  Illinois,  |  „„  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County, 

r  ss. 
Cook  County.       )  January  Term,  A.  D.  1890. 

John  S.  Williams,  Plaintiff  in  this  suit,  by  William  B.  Briglit, 
Attorney,  complains  of  James  B.  Poorpay,  Defendant  in  this  suit,  in 
a  plea  of  trespass  on  the  case  on  promises: 

FOR  THAT  WHEREAS,  the  said  defendant,  heretofore,  to 
wit:  on  the  First  day  of  October,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  one 
thousand  eight  hundred  and  eighty-nine,  at  the  County  aforesaid  to 
wit:  at  Chicago  in  the  county  aforesaid,  made  his  certain  Promis- 
sory Note  in  writing,  commonly  called  a  Promissory  Note  bearing 
date  the  day  and  year  last  aforesaid,  and  then  and  there  delivered 
the  said  Note  to  the  said  Plaintiff,  in  and  by  which  said  Note  the 
said  Defendant  by  the  name,  style  and  description  of  James  B. 
Poorpay,  promised  to  pay  to  the  order  of  said  Plaintiff,  by  the  name, 
style,  and  description  of  John  S.  Williams  the  sum  of  Five  Hundred 
Dollars  two  years  after  the  date  thereof  with  interest  thereon  at 
the  rate  of  seven  (7)  per  cent,  per  annum  from  the  date  thereof, 
payable  semi-annually,  for  value  received.  By  reason  whereof,  and 
by  force  of  the  Statute  in  such  case  made  and  provided,  the  said 
Defendant  became  liable  to  pay  to  said  Plaintiff  the  said  sum  of 
money  in  the  said  Note  specified,  according  to  the  tenor  and  effect 
of  said  note;  and,  being  so  liable,  the  said  Defendant,  in  considera- 
tion thereof  afterwards,  to  wit:  on  the  same  day  and  year  last  afore- 
said, and  at  the  place  last  aforesaid,  undertook,  and  then  and  there 
faithfully  promised  the  said  Plaintiff  well  and  truly  to  pay  imto  the 
said  Plaintiff,  the  said  sum  of  money  in  the  said  Note  specified, 
according  to  the  tenor  and  effect  of  said  Note. 

YET  the  said  Defendant,  although  often  requested,  etc.,  has  not 
yet  paid  the  said  sum  of  money,  or  any  part  thereof,  to  the  said 
Plaintiff,  but  so  to  do  has  hitherto  wholly  refused,  and  still  does 

refuse,  to  the  elamage  of  the  said  Phiinti  ff of 

and,  tlierefore,  he  brings  suit,  etc. 

WILLIAM  B.  BRIGHT, 

Plaintiff's  Attorney. 


230  ECLECTIC    SIIORTIIAXD. 

8.    CERTIFICATE  OF  PROTEST. 

State  of  Illinois,  •^ 
City  of  Chicago,     J-  ss. 
County  of  Cook.    J 

Be  it  known,  that  on  this  20th  day  of  July,  in  the  year  of  our 
Lord  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  eighty-nine,  I,  Warren  Law- 
rence, a  notary  public,  duly  com  missioned  and  sworn,  and  residing 
in  the  City  of  Chicago,  in  Cook  County,  and  State  of  Ilhnois,  at  the 
request  of  Will  D.  Judd,  went  with  the  original  Note,  which  is  above 
attached,  to  the  office  of  Lyman  Gardner,  and  demanded  payment 
thereon,  which  was  refused. 

Whereupon,  I,  the  said  notary,  do  hereby  certify  that,  on  the 
same  day  and  year  above  written,  due  notice  of  the  foregoing  pro- 
test was  put  in  the  PostoflSce  of  Chicago,  as  follows : 

Notice  for  Philip  L.  Davis,  500  West  Monroe  St.,  Chicago. 

Notice  fpr  Warner  Good,  1100  Wabash  Avenue,  Chicago. 

Each  of  the  above  named  places  being  the  reputed  place  of  resi- 
dence of  the  persons  to  whom  this  notice  was  directed. 

In  testimony  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my  hand  and  affixed 
my  official  seal  the  day  and  year  above  written. 

WARREN  LAWRENCE, 

Notary  Public. 

9.   SHORT  FORM  OF  LEASE. 

This  indenture,  made  this  10th  day  of  April,  1890,  between  John 
Wadhams,  party  of  the  first  part,  and  Harry  D.  Lee,  party  of  the 
second  part,  witnesseth,  that  the  said  party  of  the  first  part,  in 
consideration  of  the  covenants  of  the  said  party  of  the  second  part^ 
hereinafter  set  forth,  do,  by  these  presents,  lease  to  the  said  party  of 
the  second  part,  the  following  described  property,  to  wit:  Rooms 
No.  10,  11,  12  and  13,  Borden  Block,  located  in  Chicago,  Illinois. 
To  have  and  to  hold  the  same  to  the  said  party  of  the  second  part, 
from  the  1st  day  of  May,  1890,  to  the  1st  day  of  May,  1894.  And 
the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  in  consideration  of  the  leasing 
the  premises  as  above  set  forth,  covenants  and  agrees  with  the 
party  of  the  first  part,  to  pay  the  said  party  of  the  ^rst  part, 
as  rent  for  the  same,  the  sum  of  $200.00  per  month,  payable 
as  follows,   to  wit:    on  the  first  day  of   each    month.     The  said 


THE   LEGAL   AMAXUEXSIS.  231 

party  of  the  second  part  further  covenants  with  the  said  party 
of  the  first  jiart  that,  at  the  expiration  of  the  time  mentioned  in 
this  lease,  peaceable  possession  of  the  said  premises  shall  be  given 
to  said  party  of  the  first  part,  in  as  good  condition  as  they  are  now, 
the  usual  wear,  inevitable  accidents,  and  loss  by  fire  excepted;  and 
that  upon  the  non-payment  of  the  whole  or  any  portion  of  tlie  said 
rent  at  the  time  when  the  same  is  above  promised  to  be  paid,  tlie 
said  party  of  the  first  part  may,  at  liis  selection,  either  distrain  for 
said  rent  due,  or  declare  this  lease  at  an  end,  and  recover  possession 
as  if  the  same  was  held  by  forcible  detainer;  the  said  party  of  the 
second  part  hereby  waiving  any  notice  of  such  election,  or  any 
demand  for  the  possession  of  said  premises. 

The  covenants  herein  shall  extend  to  and  be  binding  upon  the 
heirs,  executors  and  administrators  of  the  parties  to  this  lease. 

Witness  the  hands  and  seals  of  the  parties  aforesaid. 

10.  LEASE  OF  A  COW  FOR  A  YEARLY  RENT. 

This  indenture,  made  the  5th  day  of  March,  A.  D.  1889,  by  and 
between  Alson  Butcher,  of,  etc.,  on  the  one  part,  and  Carlo  Dolce,  of, 
etc.,  on  the  other  part,  witnesseth,  that  the  said  Alson  Butchei',  for 
and  in  consideration  of  the  rent  and  benefit  hereafter  mentioned  and 
reserved  to  be  paid  and  performed  by  the  said  Carlo  Dolce,  his,  etc., 
hath  demised  and  let,  and  by  these  laresents  doth  demise  and  let,  to 
the  said  Carlo  Dolce  his,  etc.,  a  certain  black  cow,  now  of  the  age  of 
four  years,  for  and  during  the  term  of  three  years  next  ensuing  the 
date  hereof,  for  him,  the  said  Carlo  Dolce,  his,  etc.,  to  use,  improve 
and  receive  all  the  benefit  and  profit  to  be  derived  from  the  milk 
which  may  be  given  by  the  said  cow  during  the  said  term ;  and  the 
said  Carlo  Dolce,  for  liimself,  his,  etc.,  covenants  and  agrees  that  he 
will  yield  and  pay  yearly,  and  every  year,  on  the  5th  day  of  March, 
to  the  said  Alson  Butcher,  his  heirs,  etc.,  the  sum  of  Twelve 
Dollars  ($12.00)  for  and  during  the  whole  term  he  shall  keep  said 
cow.  And  also,  that,  at  the  end  of  three  years  frcmi  the  date  hereof, 
he  will  return  and  redeliver  said  cow  to  the  said  Alson  Butcher,  his, 
etc.,  in  as  good  order  or  state  of  flesh  as  she  is  now,  when  to  him 
delivered.  Provided  nevertheJess,  that  if  said  cow  shall  die  or  be 
killed  before  the  expiration  of  said  term  of  three  years,  and  come  to 
end  without  the  negligence  or  defanlt  of  the  said  Carlo  Dolce,  his, 
etc.,  then  the  said  Carlo  Dolce,  his,  etc.,  sbftU  not  be  required  to  pay 


232  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAXD. 

the  value  thereof;  but  so  long  as  the  said  cow  shall  live  and  be  in 
the  use  and  possession  of  the  said  Carlo  Dolce,  his,  etc.,  he,  the  said 
Carlo  Dolce,  shall  pay  the  yearly  rent  aforesaid. 
In  witness,  etc. 

11.   FORM  OF  SIMPLE  BOND,  WITH  CONDITION. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents  that  I,  Albert  Bond,  of  Geneva, 
Illinois,  am  held  and  firmly  bound  unto  Carl  Dane,  of  Elgin,  Illi- 
nois, in  the  sum  of  Eight  Hundred  Dollars,  good  and  lawful  money 
of  the  United  States,  to  be  paid  to  the  said  Carl  Dane,  his  executors, 
administrators  and  assigns,  to  which  payment,  well  and  truly  to  be 
made,  I  bind  myself  my  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  and 
every  one  of  them,  firmly  by  these  presents. 

Sealed  with  my  seal  this  first  day  of  April,  A.  D.  1889. 

The  condition  of  this  obligation  is  such,  that,  if  the  above - 
bounden  Albert  Bond,  his  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  or 
either  of  them,  shall  well  and  truly  pay,  or  cause  to  be  paid-,  unto 
the  said  Carl  Dane,  his  executors,  administrators  or  assigns,  the  just 
and  full  sum  of  Four  Hundred  Dollars,  lawful  money  aforesaid, 
with  interest  thereon,  at  the  rate  of  ten  per  centum  per  annum  for 
the  same,  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  November,  A.  D.  1889,  with- 
out fraud  or  further  delay,  then  this  obligation  to  be  void  and  of 
none  eftect;  otherwise  to  remain  in  full  force  and  virtue. 

Signed  and  sealed  in  |  ALBERT  BOND 

presence  of  Ray  Woltz.  f 

12.   A  BILL  OF  SALE  OP  GOODS. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  Frank  Wells,  of  Spring- 
field, Illinois,  in  consideration  of  the  sum  of  Five  Hundred  Dollars, 
to  me  in  hand  paid  by  Henry  Coles,  of  Springfield,  Illinois,  at  and 
l)efore  the  sealing  and  delivery  of  these  presents,  the  receipt  whereof 
I  do  hereby  acknowledge,  have  granted,  bargained,  sold  and  con- 
firmed, and  by  these  presents  do,  grant,  bargain,  sell  and  confirm, 
unto  the  said  Henry  Coles  all  the  goods,  household  stuff,  and  imple- 
ments of  household,  and  all  the  other  goods  and  chattels  whatsoever, 
mentioned  in  the  schedule  hereunto  annexed.  To  have  and  to  hold  all 
and  singular  the  said  goods,  household  stuff,  and  implements  of  house- 
hold, and  every  of  them  by  these  presents  granted,  bargained,  sold 
and  confirmed  to  the  said  Henry  Coles,  his  executors,  administrators 
and  assigiig  forever.     And  I,  the  SH,id  Frank  Wells,  for  myseli,  my 


THE   LEGAL  AMA]S"UENSIS.  233 

executors  and  administrators,  shall  and  will  warrant,  and  forever 
defend,  all  and  singular,  the  said  goods  and  household  stuff  unto  the 
said  Henry  Coles,  his  executors,  administrators  and  assigns,  against 
me,  the  said  Frank  Wells,  my  executors,  administrators  and  assigns, 
and  against  all  and  every  other  person  and  persons  whatsoever,  of 
which  goods,  etc.,  I,  the  said  Frank  Wells,  have  put  the  said  Henry 
Coles  in  full  possession,  by  delivering  him  one  silver  cup,  in  the  name 
of  all  the  goods  and  chattels  at  the  sealing  and  delivery  hereof. 
In  witness,  etc. 

13.   CAPTION  TO  DEPOSITION. 

SsATE  OF  Illinois,  } 
County  of  Cook,     j 

The  deposition  of  Jesse  D.  PuUman,  of  the  County  of  Cook  and 
State  of  Illinois,  a  witness  of  lawful  age,  produced,  sworn  and 
examined  upon  his  corporal  oath,  on  the  15th  day  of  January,  in  the 
year  of  our  Lord  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  ninety,  by  me, 
Charles  Marston,  Clerk  of  the  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County,  in  the 
State  aforesaid,  at  my  office  in  Chicago,  in  said  County,  in  compli- 
ance with  the  Dedimus  hereto  attached,  to  be  used  in  a  certain  suit 
and  matter  in  controversy  now  pending  and  undetermined  in  the 
Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County,  in  the  State  of  Illinois,  on  behalf  of 
the  said  Chicago  Manufacturing  Company. 

The  said  Jesse  D.  Pullman,  being  first  duly  sworn  by  me,  as  a 
witness  in  the  said  cause,  previous  to  the  commencement  of  his 
examination,  to  testify  the  truth  in  relation  to  the  matters  in  con- 
troversy, so  far  as  he  should  be  interrogated,  testified  and  deposed 
as  follows : 

14.   FORM  OF  DEPOSITION. 

State  of  Illinois,  )  In  Circuit  Court 

Cook  County.      )     '  Of  the  May  term,  A.  D.  1889. 

J«°^  ^J"^'        I  Assumpsit. 

■D  '  Ty        I  Affidavit  for  continuance  on  the  part  of  defendant. 

State  of  Illinois,  } 

Cook  County.      ) 

Richard  Roe,  being  duly  sworn,  says :  that  he  is  the  defendant 
named  in  the  above  entitled  cause,  and  that  he  cannot,  with  safety 
and  justice  to  himself,  proceed  to  the  trial  of  the  above  cause  at  this 


234  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

term,  for  the  want  of  testimony,  material,  competent  and  proper,  in 
the  said  suit.  And  this  deponent  further  saith,  that  Evan  Frank, 
late  of  Chicago,  is  a  material,  competent  and  proper  witness  for  this 
deponent  in  the  said  cause,  as  he  is  advised  and  believes  to  be  true, 
and  that  he  cannot  safely  proceed  to  the  trial  thereof  without 
the  testimony  of  him,  the  said  Evan  Frank;  that  he  expects  to 
prove  by  the  testimony  of  the  said  Evan  Frank,  that,  etc.,  etc.,  and 
this  deponent  further  saith,  tliat  he  has  endeavored  to  find  the  said 
Evan  Frank,  but  that  he  liath  been  to  the  house  of  tlie  said  Evan 
Frank  and  was  informed  that  he  was  gone  to  Elgin,  in  the  county  of 
Kane,  and  that  he,  this  deponent,  hath  sent  there  for  the  purpose  of 
subpoenaing  him,  but  that  the  said  Evan  Frank  is  gone  from  there 
as  this  deponent  hath  heard  and  verily  believes  to  be  true ;  and  that 
he,  this  deponent,  cannot  get  any  information  where  the  said  Evan 
Frank  is,  but  is  informed  that  he  will  be  at  home  in  Chicago,  and  that 
he,  the  deponent,  hopes  and  expects  to  be  able  to  procure  the  presence 
of  the  said  Evan  Frank  at  the  next  term.  RICHARD  ROB. 

Subscribed. and  sworn  to  before  me, 
this  12th  day  of  May,  A.  D.  1889. 
Henry  S.  Ames,  J.  P. 

15.   FORM  OF  STIPULATION. 

United  States  Circuit  Court. 
FOR  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 
Catherine  L.  Dobson,      -i 

vs.  y  In  equity. 

Edwin  J.  Cubley,  et  al.    J 

It  is  hereby  stipulated  and  agreed  that  the  testimony  in  the  above 
entitled  cause  shall  be  taken  in  writing  orally  by  questions  and  an- 
swers and  may  be  taken  from  any  Notary  Public  or  United  States 
Commissioner  authoiized  to  administer  oaths  at  the  place  where  such 
testimony  is  to  be  taken,  witli  like  effect  as  if  the  same  were  taken 
before  an  examiner  appointed  therein,  and  otherwise  as  provided  in 
the  67th  Rule  in  Equity  as  amended:  and  that  ordinary  printed 
copies  of  letters  patent  and  drawings  of  any  letters  patent  which 
either  side  may  be  entitled  to  introduce  in  evidence,  shall  have  the 
same  force  and  cffec^t  as  would  duly  certified  copies. 


Solicitor  for  Complainant. 
New  York,  July  26^  1886.  Of  Counsel  for  Defendants. 


Bill  of  Particulars. 


THE   LEGAL   AMANUENSIS.  235 

16.   PETITION  IN  REPLEVIN. 

In  the  County  Court  for  Douglas  County, 
State  of  Nebraska. 
The  Italian'  Insurance  Company  "j 
OF  Freeport,  Illinois, 
vs. 
August  Belmont. 
The  above  named  plaintiff  alleges  that  it  is  a  corporation  organ- 
ized and  existing  under  the  laws  of  the  State  of  Illinois,  and  is  doing 
business  within  the  State  of  Nebraska. 

Plaintiff  further  alleges  that  it  is  the  owner  and  entitled  to  the 
possession  of  the  following  described  property,  to  wit,  two  books  com- 
monly called  Policy  Registers,  fifty  blank  policies,  and  printed  sta- 
tionery. And  that  the  defendant,  August  Belmont,  wrongfully  and 
unlawfully  detains  in  his  possession  the  said  property  and  has  so 
detained  it  for  more  than  a  week  last  past,  to  plaintiff's  damage  $50. 
Wherefore,  plaintiff  prays  judgment  for  the  possession  of  said 
property  or  for  the  value  thereof  if  the  same  is  not  returned,  and 
for  his  damages  and  costs. 

17.   PROOF  OF  LOSS, 

Of  Adam  Freeman  to  the  Excelsior  Insurance  Company,  of  Chicago. 

State  of  Illinois,  ) 
County  of  Cook.    ) 

Be  it  known,  that  on  the  16th  day  of  December,  A.  D.  1889, 
before  me,  Alex.  J.  Pullman,  legally  qualified,  and  residing  in  the 
City  of  Galesburg,  in  the  County  and  State  aforesaid,  personally 
appeared  Adam  Freeman,  of  Galesburg,  in  the  County  of  Knox, 
and  State  of  Illinois,  who,  being  duly  sworn,  according  to  law, 
declares  under  oath,  that  the  Excelsior  Insurance  Company,  of  the 
City  of  Chicago,  through  its  agency  at  Chicago,  did,  on  the  first  day 
of  August,  1887,  issue  to  Adam  Freeman  their  policy  of  insurance, 
No.  16,790,  the  written  body  of  which,  with  its  immediate  context, 
IS  as  below  specified,  said  insurance  terminating  on  the  first  day  of 
August,  1891,  at  twelve  o'clock,  noon. 

No.  16,790.  The  Excelsior  Insurance  Company,  of  the  City  of 
Chicago,  in  consideration  of  Fifty  Dollars  ($50.00)  do  insure,  which 
said  policy  was,  on  the  first  day  of  August,   1890,   renewed  by 


336  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

certificate  No.  9,300,  until  the  first  day  of  August,  A.  D.  1892,  at 
twelve  o'clock  noon. 

That,  in  addition  to  the  amount  covered  by  said  policy  of  said 
company,  there  was  other  insurance  made  thereon,  to  the  amount  of 
Two  Thousand  Dollars  ($2,000)  as  specified  in  the  accompanying 
schedule,  showing  the  name  of  each  company  and  the  written  parts 
of  each  policy,  besides  which  there  was  no  other  insurance  thereon. 

That  on  the  16th  day  of  December,  A.  D.  1890,  a  fire  occurred, 
by  which  the  property  insured  was  destroyed,  to  the  amount  of  Ten 
Thousand  Dollars  ($10,000),  as  set  forth  in  the  statement,  and  the 
several  schedules  and  papers  hereunto  annexed,  which  tlie  deponent 
declares  to  be  a  just,  true  and  faithful  account  of  his  loss,  so  far  as 
he  has  been  able  to  ascertain  the  same. 

That  the  actual  cash  value  of  the  property  so  insured  amounted 
to  the  sum  of  Ten  Thousand  Dollars  ($10,000)  at  the  time  immedi- 
ately preceding  the  fire,  as  will  appear  by  the  annexed  schedule, 
showing  a  full  and  accurate  description  of  each  kind  of  property, 
and  the  value  of  the  same,  with  the  damage  or  loss  on  each. 

That  the  building  insured  or  containing  the  property  destroyed 
was  occupied  in  its  several  parts  by  2:)arties  hereinafter  named,  and 
for  the  following  purposes,  to  wit :  residence,  and  for  no  other  pur- 
poses whatever. 

That  the  fire  originated  in  the  basement  thereof.  Amount  of 
claim.  Four  Thousand  Dollars  ($4,000);  and  the  said  deponent 
further  declares  that  the  fire  did  not  originate  by  any  act,  design  or 
procurement  on  his  part,  or  in  consequence  of  any  fraud  or  evil 
practice  done  by  or  with  his  privity  or  consent  to  violate  the  condi- 
tions of  insurance,  or  render  void  the  policy  aforesaid. 
Subscribed  and  sworn  to  before  me,  this  ) 
17th  day  of  December,  A.  D.  1889.       ) 

18.   FORM  OF  TITLE  IN  JUSTICE  COURT. 

State  of  Illinois,  )  ^^  In  Justice  Court, 

Cook  County.       )     '  Before  James  C.  Gregg,  Esq.,  J. P. 

John  Doe,     "i  Affidavit  for  continuance 

^s.  y  In  assumpsit.  on  part  of  plaintiff. 

Richard  Roe.  J 
State  of  Illinois, 
Cook  County. 

John  Doe,  being  duly  sworn  says,  that  he  is  plaintiff  in  above 
eutitled  cause,  etc. 


THE  LEGAL  AMANUENSIS.  237 

19.  FORM  OP  TITLE  IN  CIRCUIT  COURT. 

State  of  Illinois,  )  In  Circuit  Court 

Cook  County.       r  '  Of  the  April  term,  A.  D.  1889. 

John  Doe, 
vs. 
Richard  R(je,    >  Security  for  costs. 
John  Dox, 
James  Buck. 

20.  FORM  OF  TITLE  IN  COUNTY  COURT. 

State  of  Illinois,  )  ^g  In  County  Cou«t 

Cook  County.       P  "  Of  the  May  term,  A.  D.  1889. 

Peter  Johnson,  ^ 

vs.  >  Assumpsit. 

Conrad  Reed,    J 

21.   FORM  OP  TITLE  IN  PROBATE. 

State  of  Illinois,  )  In  County  Court. 

Cook  County.       S     '  In  Probate. 

In  the  matter  of  the  estate  i 
of  John  Doe,   late    of    said   }■  Account  of  Administrator,  etc. 
county,  deceased.  J 

22.   FORM  OF  TITLE  IN  CHANCERY. 

State  of  Illinois,  {  In  the  Superior  Court. 

Cook  County.       S     '  In  Chancery. 

John  Doe,  complainant, 

vs.  )■  Affidavit  for  preliminary  injunction. 

Richard  Roe,  defendant, 


CHAPTER  XI. 


COUET   REPORTI^^G. 

1.  Court^reportiiig  consists  in  making  a  full  record  ol 
all  that  is  done  in  courts  of  justice.  After  you  have  the 
required  speed  and  accuracy  in  writing,  have  made  your- 
self familiar  with  the  following  points,  and  have  some 
idea  of  what  court  reporting  is,  you  will  still  be  liable  to 
experience  a  feeling  of  incompetency  when  you  first  enter 
the  court  room  for  practical  work.  This  cannot  be 
avoided,  but  gradually  the  strangeness  of  the  situation 
will  wear  olf  as  with  attentive  eye  and  ear  you  strive  to 
make  yourself  familiar  with  the  order  of  business.  It  will 
be  greatly  to  your  advantage  if  you  can  practice  awhile  in 
court  with  some  experienced  stenographer  in  making  the 
report  of  a  case,  observing  carefully  what  part  of  the  pro- 
ceedings he  writes,  and  what  he  does  not  write,  that 
you  may  acquire  a  practical  idea  of  the  general  run  of 
business. 

2.  Do  not  think  of  undertaking  to  report  a  case  in 
court  until  you  can  write  at  an  adequate  rate  of  speed. 
The  statutes  of  most  States  which  have  provided  for  the 
appointment  of  court  reporters,  require  of  the  candidate 
for  appointment  an  average  writing  speed  of  150  words  a 
minute.  By  writing  a  few  cases  in  court  for  practice,  you 
will  be  able  to  form  an  idea  of  the  adequacy  or  inadequacy 
of  your  speed.  233 


COUKT   REPORTIXa.  339 

3.  Be  sure  to  secure  a  seat  aiul  talkie  very  near  to  the 
witness  stand,  that  you  may  have  the  best  possible  oppor- 
tunity to  hear  all  that  is  said  by  the  witness  and  interro- 
gating counsel.  If  at  any  time  you  fail  to  hear  either 
question  or  answer,  immediately  request  its  repetition, 
that  you  may  lose  no  part  of  the  testimony. 

4.  Do  not  allow  yourself  to  become  nervous,  nor  care- 
less in  writing;  but  write  every  word  so  that  you  may  be 
sure  what  it  is  when  called  upon  to  read  it.  Write  so 
that  the  fact  that  you  haye  a  word,  phrase,  or  sentence 
written  is,  to  you,  positive  proof  that  it  was  uttered  as 
you,  have  written  it. 

5.  If  called  upon  to  read  any  part  of  your  notes,  do  not 
undertake  to  read  aloud  until  you  are  sure  of  the  right 
place,  and  then  run  your  eye  over  it  before  reading  aloud, 
to  give  you  confidence  in  reading.  When  by  practice  you 
have  acquired  absolute  confidence  in  your  ability  this  sug- 
gestion may  be  disregarded. 

6.  Write  the  caption  of  the  case  on  the  cover  of  your 
book,  for  easy  reference. 

7.  Keep  an  index  of  each  case  as  it  progresses  on  a 
separate  sheet  or  a  small  book  kept  lying  at  your  hand, 
noting  in  it  the  page  of  the  beginning  of  the  testimony  of 
each  witness,  also  the  pages  of  the  direct,  re-direct,  cross 
and  re-cross  examinations,  that  should  any  particular 
question  or  answer  be  called  for,  you  may,  by  means  of  the 
index,  I'eadily  locate  it  in  your  note  book.  If  your  note 
book  is  not  paged  by  the  printer  you  must  page  it  before 
the  trial  begins. 

8.  Accustom  yourself  to  referring  to  your  notes,  pick- 
ing out  a  question  here  and  an  answer  there,  to  so  famil- 


240  ECLECTIC   SHOKTHAND. 

iarize  yourself  with  doing  this  that  when  you  are  called  on 
in  court  to  read  a  certain  question  or  answer^  you  will  be 
able  to  find  and  read  it  at  once. 

9.  Reporting  a  case  in  court  comprises  two  things: 

I.  The  taking  of  complete  notes  of  all  that  is  trans- 
acted in  court,  necessary  to  be  recorded. 

II.  A  perfect  transcript  of  the  written  notes.  These 
two  features  we  shall  treat  of  in  their  order, 

TAKING   THE   NOTES   OF   A   TRIAL. 

10.  Taking  notes  of  a  trial  consists  in  writing  the  en- 
tire proceedings,  except  arguments  of  counsel,  as  follows: 

I.  The  caption  of  the  case,  with  appearances,  etc.,  as, 
for  instance : 

State  of  Illinois,  "j 

j-ss. 
Cook  County,     j 

In  the  Superior  Court  of  Cook  County, 

September  Terra,  A.  D.  1889. 

Jonathan   Edwards  et  al  ") 

I 
vs.  )■  Assumpsit. 

Abraham  Jones  et  al       j 

Before  His  Hoiior,  Richard  W.  Clifford,  Judge,  and  a  Jury. 

Appearances:  Smith,  Davis  &  Wesson,  for  plaintiff  (or  com- 
plainant); Johnson,  Edwards  &  Coon,  for  defendant. 

11.  It  is  not  usually  necessary  in  civil  cases  to  report 
the  examination  of  the  jurymen,  but  occasionally  the 
reporter  will  be  requested  by  counsel  to  do  so.  In  crim- 
inal cases,  it  is  the  invariable  practice  to  report  the 
examination  of  the  jurymen  as  far  as  possible.  The  re- 
port will  consist  of  the  names  of  the  jurors,  their  cross- 
examination,  together  with  any  objections  or  changes. 


COURT  REPORTING.  241 

and  the  reasons  for  them,  and  the  decisions  of  the  court 
on  the  same. 

12.  Every  preliminary  motion  connected  with  the  case 
must  be  noted,  with  the  rulings  of  the  court  on  it. 

13.  The  opening  statement  of  the  case  by  counsel,  in 
putting  it  before  the  jury,  should  be  reported,  but  need 
not  be  transcribed,  unless  ordered  by  counsel  or  court. 
To  write  the  statement  of  the  case,  and  thus  become 
acquainted  with  it,  will  often  prove  invaluable  to  the 
stenographer  in  writing  the  testimony. 

14.  As  soon  as  a  witness  is  sworn,  take  his  name,  writ- 
ing first  the  surname,  that  you  may  be  sure  to  get  it 
correctly.  Following  this,  every  word  of  the  testimony, 
both  of  questions  and  answers,  should  be  exactly  written. 

15.  All  objections  made  by  the  counsel,  and  the 
rulings  of  the  court  in  regard  to  them,  and  exceptions 
made  to  the  rulings  by  counsel,  must  be  noted. 

16.  The  first  examination  of  the  witness  by  the  party 
who  has  called  him  is  called  the  ''direct  examination." 
After  the  direct  examination  comes  the  examination  by 
the  opposite  party,  which  is  called  the  ''cross-examina- 
tion," unless  they  waive  the  right.  After  the  cross- 
examination  comes  the  "re-direct  examination;"  that  is, 
the  re-examination  of  the  plaintiff.  This  will  be  fol- 
lowed by  the  "re-cross-examination,"  which  is  the  exam- 
ination of  the  same  witness  by  the  second  party.  Each 
of  the  above  examinations,  as  they  occur,  is  noted  in  the 
middle  of  the  page  in  strong  characters,  that  they  may 
be  distinct  and  prominent. 

17.  At  the  beginning  of  the  examination,  the  name  of 
the  examining  counsel  must  be  noted,  thus: 

Direct  Examination  by  Mr.  Smith. 


242  ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 

18.  When  the  plaintiff  closes  his  testimony  it  should 
be  stated:  "Plaintiff  rests;"  and  at  the  close  of  the 
defendant's  evidence  make  the  statement:  "Defendant 
rests." 

19.  If  a  case  is  closed  by  the  charge  of  the  judge  to 
the  Jury,  the  same  should  be  accurately  reported;  but, 
instead  of  the  charge,  the  court  usually  gives  the  jury 
written  instrucitions,  in  which  case  it  is  not  necessarily 
reported. 

20.  In  writing  the  questions  and  answers  which  com- 
prise the  testimony,  let  the  questions  be  commenced  at 
the  left  side  of  the  page  and  extended  across  it,  beginning 
each  new  line  of  a  question  at  the  left  side  of  the  page. 
Each  answer  should  be  indented  an  inch  or  more,  thus 
preserving  a  clear  distinction  between  questions  and 
answers,  which  is  a  very  important  aid  in  referring  to 
testimony,  which  the  reporter  is  often  obliged  to  do,  as 
he  is  called  u^jon  unexpectedly  by  counsel  or  the  court 
to  read  some  particular  question  or  answer.  It  is  desi- 
rable to  drop  the  answer  a  line  below  the  question. 

21.  Court  reporting  is  usually  done  in  blank  books 
prepared  for  the  purpose,  having  a  perpendicular  line 
about  an  inch  from  tlie  left  side  of  the  page.  This  line 
is  used  to  make  a  distinction  between  questions  and 
answers;  questions  being  written  in  full  lines,  and  answers 
beginning  at  the  perpendicular  line.  If  the  perpen- 
dicular line  is  omitted,  the  same  relative  positions  of 
question  and  answer  should  be  preserved.  Some  court 
reporters  use  very  narrow  books,  to  avoid  the  long  sweep 
of  the  hand  across  the  page  at  the  end  of  each  line. 
Others  double  the  book  in  the  middle,  to  form  a  crease 


COURT  REPORTING.  243 

down  the  middle  of  the  page,  thus  dividing  tlie  pages 
into  halves,  each  half  page  being  used  as  a  separate  page. 
On  narrow  pages,  the  distinction  between  question  and 
answer  is  preserved  by  indenting,  as  is  done  in  the  ordinary 
full- width  page. 

32.  In  taking  the  notes,  everything  must  be  written 
as  it  occurs,  whether  it  be  question  or  answer,  objection, 
ruling  of  the  court,  or  exceptions  to  the  ruling,  in  order 
that  a  perfect  mirror  of  the  jiroceedings  may  be  given. 
The  opening  and  close  of  each  session  must  be  noted, 
giving  the  date,  noting  whether  it  be  morning  or  after- 
noon session,  thus: 

Morning  session,  Jan.  4,  1889. 

Afternoon  session,  Jan.  4,  1889. 

Court  adjourned  to  10  o'clock  to-morrow. 

Adjourned  to  2  o'clock  p.  m. 

Adjourned  to  2  P.  M.,  Nov.  30,  1889. 

Court  convened  pursuant  to  adjournment. 

Parties  present  as  before. 

Afternoon,  Nov.  29,  1889. 

MAKING   TRANSCRIPT. 

•^3.    There  are  two  methods  of  making  transcripts: 

I.    The  full  form. 
II.    The  narrative  form. 

24.  Most  transcripts  are  made  in  the  full  form.  In 
this  form  the  questions  and  answers  are  given  complete, 
but  in  the  narrative  form  questions  are  omitted  in  all 
cases  in  which  the  answer  would  suggest  the  question. 
However,  when  the  question  cannot  be  clearly  inferred 
from  the  answei',  it  is  given. 


244  ECLECTIC   SHOETEAXB. 

25.  In  either  form  of  the  transcript,  the  title  of  the 
case  embracing  grade  of  the  court,  the  caption  of  the  case, 
and  the  appearances,  are  Avritten  in  full  at  the  beginning 
of  it.  The  name  of  each  witness  as  he  is  called,  the 
name  of  the  attorney  who  conducts  the  examination,  the 
remarks  and  rulings  of  the  court,  the  kind  of  examina- 
tion; namely.  Direct,  Cross,  etc.,  and  any  deviation  from 
the  question  and  answer,  must  be  clearly  transcribed. 

26.  In  the  full  form  the  question  and  answer  is  fully 
given,  each  in  a  separate  paragraph,  each  question  pre- 
ceded by  the  capital  Q.,  and  each  answer  by  a  capital  A. 

27.  In  the  narrative  form,  all  questions  that  can  be 
inferred  from  the  answer  are  omitted,  and  the  answers 
continued  one  after  another,  only  separated  by  a  period. 
Questions  that  cannot  be  clearly  inferred  from  the  answer 
are  given. 

28.  In  the  court  room,  all  cases  are  reijorted  in  full, 
and  in  criminal  cases  are  fully  transcribed,  but  for  reasons 
of  economy,  civil  cases  are  sometimes  transcribed  in  the 
narrative  form.  Whether  the  full  or  narrative  form  is 
adopted,  will  be  determined  by  the  counsel  in  the  case. 

29.  Transcripts  are  made  on  legal  paper,  which  gener- 
ally has  a  ruled  margin  on  each  side  of  the  page.  The 
writing  should  be  confined  within  those  ruled  lines  and 
written  only  on  one  side  of  the  page.  If  the  paper  is  not 
ruled,  a  margin  should,  however,  be  preserved.  The 
transcript,  when  completed,  is  backed  with  a  sheet  of  firm 
Manilla  paper,  which  is  folded  down  over  the  top  edge  of 
the  leaves  of  the  transcript  and  all  fastened  together  by 
means  of  brass  clasps  or  tape  tied  through  holes  which 
are  punched  through  the  upper  end  of  the  sheets. 


COURT  EEPORTIlSrG.  245 

30.  The  first  page  should  be  used  for  an  index  of  the 
case.  The  title  of  the  case  should  follow  on  a  page  after 
the  index,  and  should  contain  the  name  of  the  court,  title 
of  the  suit,  name  of  the  judge  before  whom  the  case  is 
tried,  and  whether  it  is  before  a  jury,  date  of  the  trial, 
names  of  counsel,  with  the  names  of  the  parties  for  whom 
they  appear.  A  new  title  page  should  be  made  for  each 
day  of  the  trial. 

31.    FORM  OF  INDEX. 

Circuit  Court  Cook  County, 

March  terra,  A.  D.  1889. 

John  McClennan,  •>_  „        ^„^  ,,  ,r,^. 

'  Before  Hon.  J.  S.  Grinnell,  March  21, 


vs. 

I       1889 
Chicago  Hansom  Cab  Co.    ' 

complainant's  testimony. 


W.  p.  Vineyard, 
L.  M.  Long, 
Mary  J.  Spring, 
W.  D.  Dows, 
W.  P.  Vineyard, 

Direct.        Cross.        Redirect, 

2  5                     9 

3  6                   10 

3  7 

4  11 

Recross. 
14 
14 

defendant's  testimony. 

John  B.  Ridgeway, 
G.  M.  McMill, 
James  P.  Coonley, 

15                 22 
17                 22 
20 

exhibits. 

23 

24 

Defendant's  exhibit, 

bill  of  J.  R.  Mills  &  Co. 

State  of  Illinois, 
Cook  County. 

32, 

tss. 

.    FORM  OF  TITLE. 

In  the  Circuit  Court  of  Cook  County, 
March  term,  A.  D.  1889. 
John  McClennan,         ^ 

vs.  >  Bill  of  Exceptions. 

Chicago  Hansom  Cab  Co.  J 

George  H.  Kitteredge,  Esq.,  appearing  for  plaintiff. 
Henry  S.  Morrow,  Esq.,  appearing  for  defendant. 


246  ECLECTIC   SHOETHAND. 

33.  FORM  OF  INDEX. 

State  of  Illinois,  )      t  *.       ^^i     i    i      -p  n  TVf  n      •*. 

'  r      Inquest  on  the  body  of  George  McGarrity. 
County  of  Cook.   ) 

Adam  Smith 1. 

Wallace  D.  Good 2. 

Herman  Y.  Orlaflf 3. 

Alex.  Tyndall 4, 

Benjamin  Harvey ....  5. 

34.  FORM  OF  TITLE. 

Inquest  on  the  Body  of  George  McGakrity. — 3  v.  m. 
Henry  Du  Jardin,  being  duly  sworn,  was  examined  by  the  Cor- 
oner, and  testified  as  follows : 

35.    FORMS  OF  STATEMENTS. 

Nathan  Evans. 
A  witness  called  on  behalf  of  complainant,  being  first  duly  sworn, 
testified  as  follows : 

Direct  Examination 

by  Mr.  Clews. 
Cross  Examination 

by  Mr.  Cratty. 
James  G.  Goodrich, 
A  witness  called  on  behalf  of  defendant,  being  first  duly  sworn, 
testified  as  follows : 

Direct  Examination 

by  Mr.  Cratty. 

Cross  Examination 

by  Mr.  Clews. 

Redirect  Examination 

by  Mr.  Cratty. 
Recross  Examination 
by  Mr.  Clews. 
By  the  Court: — You  may  answer  the  question. 
By  Mr.  Clews: — I  object  to  the  question  as  incompetent,  irrele- 
vant and  immaterial. 

ILLUSTRATIVE   TRANSCRIPT   AND   NOTES. 

36.  The  following  short  case  in  Chancery  was  presented 
for  this  book  by  M.  B.  Sherman,  Master  in  the  U.  S. 
Courts,  Chicago.    It  is  followed  by  the  same  in  shorthand; 


COUET   REPORTING.  247 


In  the  Circuit,  Court  of  the  United  States 
For  the  Northern  District  of  Illinois. 

In  Chancery. 


Josiah  Comstock 


Tames  Johnson  and  Sophronia  A.  Johnson. 


Bill  to  Foreclose  Mortgage. 


October  12,  1889. 

Testimony  taken  before  Ezra  B.  Smith,  Master  in  Chancery  of  saiJ 
Court,  pursuant  to  an  order  of  reference  therein. 

Present:  Mr.  James  Mason,  Solicitor  for  Complainant. 
Mr.  George  Rogers,  Solicitor  for  Defendants. 

JOHN  H.  KING 

a  witness  called  on  behalf  of  complainant,  being  first  duly  sworn, 
testified  as  follows: — 

DIRECT   EXAMINATION 
by  Mr.  Mason. 

Q   Please  state  your  name,  age,  residence  and  occupation. 

A   John  H.  King:  44  years;  Chicago;  real  estate  agent. 

Q   Do  you  know  the  parties  to  this  suit,  and  if  so,  hov;  long 
have  yon  Known  them  respectively? 

A   I  have  known  the  complainant  for  10  years,  and  the  defend- 
ants about  4  years. 

Q   Look  at  the  paper  now  shown  you,  and  state  what  it  is. 

A   This  is  a  note  for  810,000,  dated  January  1,  1885,  made  by 
the  defendant,  James  Johnson,  due  three  years — 

By  Mr.  Rogers,   i  object  to  the  witness'  stating  the  substance 
of  the  paper;  the  note  is  the  best  evidence  of  its  contents. 

By  the  Master.  The  witness  may  describe  the  paper  sufficiently 
to  identify  it:  the  contents  can  not  be  proven  by  parole. 

By  Mr.  Mason.  That  is  true;  1  did  not  ask  the  witness  to  give 
the  contents  of  the  written  instrument.   I  now  offer  this  note  in 
evidence,  as  complainant's  Exhibit  "A".   I  also  offer  in  evidence 
a  mortgage  from  defendant  to  complainant  of  even  date  with  the  note, 
and  given  to  secure  the  same,  as  complainant's  Exliibit  "B". 

Q   State,  if  you  know,  what  amount  is  due  to  complainant  on 
this  note. 

By  Mr.  Rogers.  State  what  you  know  of  your  own  knowledge* 


248  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

By  Mr«  Mason.  Or  what  you  have  heard  defendants  say  about  the 
amount  due> 

A   There  was  due  and  unpaid  on  the  first  day  of  January,  1889, 
the  principal  sum,  $10,000,  and  one  year's  interest  at  6^,  $600» 

Q   What  is  your  means  of  knowledge  as  to  the  amount  due? 

A   The  defendant,  Jeunes  Johnson,  stated  to  me  Just  before  this 
suit  was  commenced,  that  he  had  never  paid  the  note  or  the  last  year'e 
intergst  on  the  same. 

Q   State  as  nearly  as  you  are  able  when  this  conversation  took 
place,  and  where  it  was? 

A   It'  was  in  the  early  part  of  January  of  this  year,  and  in  my 
office. 

CROSS       EXAMINATION 
by  Mr.  Rogers. 

Q   Have  you  any  knowledge  as  to  the  consideration  of  this  note? 

A   No,  Sir. 

^   Were  you  present  when  the  note  and  mortgage  were  executed, 
or  did  you  have  anything  to  do  with  that  transaction? 

A   I  was  not  present,  and  I  had  nothing  whatever  to  do  with  the 
matter. 

Q   Do  you  mean  to  be  understood  as  saying  that  the  defendant 
Johnson  admitted  that  he  owed  the  complainant  $10,600  in  January, 
,  1889? 

A   Mr.  Johnson  told  me  that  he  had  not  paid  this  note  or  the 
last  year's  interest  thereon. 

Q   What  other  conversation,  if  any,  took  place  between  you  and 
Mr.  Johnson  at  the  time  he  made  this  statement,  as  you  say,  in  your 
office  in  January  last? 

A   I  can't  remember  all  that  was  said,  there  was  considerable 
conversation  between  us. 

Q  Didn't  Mr.  Johnson  say  to  you  in  that  conversation  that  the 
reason  he  had  not  paid  the  note  in  question  was  because  he  had  a  good 
defense? 

A   I  think  he  did  say  something  of  that  kind. 

Q   Didn't  he  tell  you  that  he  did  not  consider  that  he  owed  the 
complainant  a  single  dollar  on  that  note? 

A   He  told  me  that  the  note  was  given  to  complainant  to  close 
out  some  deals  on  the  Board  of  Trade. 

Q   What  is  the  business  of  the  complainant? 

A   He  is  a  commission  man;  he  is  on  the  Board  of  Trade. 

Q   What  does  he  deal  in  on  the  Board  of  Trade? 

A   I  think  his  transactions  are  mostly  confined  to  wheat,  corft 
«nd  porlc* 


COURT   REPOKTIKG.  249 


Q   Now,  didn't  Mr.  Johnson  say  to  you  that  this  note  was  given 
for  a  gambling  transaction? 

A   Yes,  I  think  he  said  the  note  was  given  to  close  out  some 
deals—option  deals— on  the  Board  of  Trade,  that  the  complainant  had 
made  for  him. 

Q   Didn't  he  tell  you  that  the  transactions  which  this  note  was 
given  to  close  out  were  gambling  transactions? 
A   Yes,  I  think  he  said  that  in  substance. 

Q   Then  he  didn't  admit  to  you  that  he  actually  owed  the  com- 
plainant $10,600,  did  he? 

By  Mr.  Mason.  I  object  to  this  question;   let  the  witness  state 
the  conversation  between  himself  and  Mr.  Johnson. 

By  the  Master.  State  what  was  said  at  this  interview  between 
you  and  Mr.  Johnson. 

A   I  can't  state  the  exact  conversation. 

By  the  Master.  Give  the  substance  of  this  conversation  as  you 
now  recollect  it. 

Q   ¥hat  reason  did  Mr.  Johnson  give  for  no'  paying  that  note? 
A   Well,  he  said  the  note  was  given  for  losses  in  deals  made 
through  the  complainant  on  the  Board  of  Trade. 

Q   Didn't  Mr.  Johnson  say  that  the  note  was  given  for  a  gam- 
bling debt? 

By  Mr.  Mason.  I  object  to  the  question;  Mr.  Johnson's  state- 
ments are  not  competent  evidence  in  his  own  favor. 

By  Mr.  Rogers.  Certainly  not,  but  you  have  tried  to  prove  by 
this  witness  that  Mr.  Johnson  admitted  that  he  owed  the  complainant 
$10,600  on  this  note,  and  1  am  entitled  to  the  whole  conversation. 

By  the  Master.  Of  course  the  statements  made  to  the  witness  by 
Mr.  Johnson  will  not  prove  or  tend  to  prove  that  this  note  is  void 
because  given  for  a  gambling  transaction;  but  since  the  complainant 
sought  to  show  by  the  witness  that  the  defendant,  James  Johnson,  ad- 
mitted that  the  note  and  one  year's  interest  was  due  and  unpaid,  the 
defendants  are  entitled  to  all  the  conversation  so  that  the  Court  may 
determine  whether  there  was  any  admission  of  a  bona  fide  indebtedness 
to  the  complainant. 

A   Yes,  Mr.  Johnson  said  that  he  had  made  a  lot  of  deals  on  the 
Board  of  Trade  through  the  complainant,  and  that  he  had  incurred  large 
losses,  and  that  the  note  was  given  in  settlement  of  these  losses, 
*>nd  that  the  transactions  were  all  gambling  transactions. 

Q   Did  Mr.  Johnson  say  that  the  reason  he  didn't  pay  the  note 
and  the  interest  on  it,  was  because  these  were  gambling  transactions 
and  this  was  a  gambling  debt? 

A   Yes,  that  was  the  reason  he  gave. 


250  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

NOTES   OF    PRECEDING   TRANSCRIPT. 


COURT    KEPORTIXG. 


251 


~r 


-6^ 


g—     ^_ 


^=^--t 


A 


H ^^ 


^ 


^-"^fc- 


/ 


L 


-&- 


^i>r 


A^ 


~>' 


;/ 


r 


"^ 


-^-cr 


252 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


A^ 


i^ 


^^T-^ 


^ 


~z 


^ 


_^= GL 


COURT   REPORTING. 


253 


7^^-^^ 


'^^ 


254 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


COURT  REPORTING.  255 

ILLUSTEATIONS  OF  TRANSCRIPT. 

The  following  transcript  in  the  full  form  is  also  fol- 
lowed by  the  same  matter  transcribed  in  narrative  form, 
that  you  may  form  a  clear  idea  of  their  difference.  They 
may  also  be  used  for  dictation,  and  should  be  repeatedly 
written.  Also  make  transcripts  of  them  on  the  machine 
until  you  can  do  it  quickly  and  without  embarrass- 
ment. 

W.  P.  Sission,  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

Q.    Mr.  Sission,  how  long  have  you  been  manager  of  this  company? 

A.  I  have  been  a  general  manager  of  the  Brick  Co.  since  a  year 
ago  last  July.  I  was  there  April  5,  and  twice  after  that  before 
July  1. 

Q.  Can  you  give  the  exact  dates  of  the  several  times  you  were 
there  before  July  first? 

A.   I  cannot. 

Q.  To  what  extent  were  the  piles  of  faced  and  paint  brick  dam- 
aged? 

A.  The  bottom  of  the  pile  of  the  fticed  and  paint  brick  were 
damaged. 

Q.   When  did  yoii  ascertain  this? 

A.   I  learned  about  it  the  fifth,  when  I  was  buying  brick. 

Q.   Which  brick  are  the  finest  quality? 

^4..    The  faced  brick  are  the  finest. 

Q.   Describe  the  brick  which  you  call  paint  brick? 

A.  The  paint  brick  are  called  off  color,  are  a  true  brick,  have 
a  smooth  surface,  and  are  used  for  side  and  rear  walls. 

Q.   How  did  the  flood  injure  these  brick? 

A.  The  muddying  of  the  brick  reduced  tlieir  price.  They  were 
not  even  salable  so  long  as  we  had  common  brick. 

Q.   State  to  what  extent  they  were  damaged? 

A.    I  kept  no  account. 

Q.    How  many  of  these  brick,  and  to  whom  did  you  sell? 

A.  We  sold  from  20  to  25  thousand  paint  brick,  some  to  Geo. 
Arnold,  some  to  A.  P.  Anderson,  and  some  scattering.  1  cannot 
say  how  many  paint  brick  I  sold. 


256  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

Q.    How  many  faeeil  brick  have  you  on  hand  now? 

A.    There  are  8  or  10  thousand  faced  brick  there  yet. 

Q.    Is  it  not  possible  to  clean  off  these  brick? 

A.    You  cannot  wash  them  off  except  with  salt  and  water. 

Q.    When  was  this  suit  first  brought? 

A.   July  first. 

Q.  Did  you  not  say  that  no  damages  would  be  claimed  for  these 
brick  ? 

A.    I  did  not  know  what  damages  would  be  asked  for  those  brick. 

Q.   You  did  not  know  it? 

A.   Yes,  I  did  know  it,  in  a  general  way. 

Q.    Has  this  suit  been  under  your  general  directions? 

A.    No,  I  have  not  had  much  to  do  with  it. 

Q.    Did  you  not  refuse  to  continue  it? 

A.   Yes. 

Q.    Why,  then,  have  you  been  pushing  it? 

A.  I  have  done  what  I  deemed  to  be  ray  duty  as  manager,  in 
pushing  it. 

Q.   Have  you  not  taken  any  interest  in  this  suit? 

A.    I  have. 

Q.    Did  you  keep  a  correct  account  of  the  brick  sold? 

A.  1  did  not.  1  made  no  special  endeavor  to  keep  a  correct 
account  of  the  brick  sold.  I  thought  nothing  of  trusting  to  memory 
or  books. 

Q.   Why  did  you  not  keep  an  accurate  account? 

A.   I  did  not  know  they  would  claim  damages  for  brick. 

Q.  Did  you  not  call  my  attention  to  the  damaged  brick? 

A.   I  did. 

Q.  And  have  you  not  sworn  that  you  did  not  know  they  would 
not  clain\  damages  ? 

A.   I  have  not. 

Q.    Who  commenced  this  suit? 

A.   Mr.  Calkins. 

Q.  You  sold  these  brick,  counted  them,  but  kept  no  account  of 
the  damaged  ones? 

A.   Yes,  that  is  the  exact  statement  of  the  case. 

Q.    To  whom  did  you  sell  ? 

A.  I  sold  some  to  Tom  Smith,  12,000  to  15,000,  for  the  West 
building. 

Q.    When  was  that? 


COURT  REPORTING.  257 

A,   That  was  last  May. 

Q.   In  what  condition  were  these  brick  ? 

A.   They  were  muddy. 

Q.    To  what  other  parties  did  you  sell  ? 

A.   I  sold  Geo.    Arnold  3,000  or  4,000  for  Marshall  Parson's 
house. 

Q.   For  what  price  did  you  sell  them  ? 

A.    We  sold  them  for  $8.00. 

Q.   How  many  did  j^ou  sell  Mitchell? 

A.   I  could  tell  by  looking  at  the  books. 

Q.  Did  you  not  have  some  yourself? 

A.   Yes. 

Q.   How  many  of  the  good  paint  brick? 

A.   I  bought  3,600  to  send  to  Decatur,  and  30,000  to  Chicago. 

Q.   What  did  you  do  with  the  rest? 

A.   I  sold  them  here  and  there. 

Q.   How  many  were  there  of  them? 

A.    I  cannot  say. 

J.  H.  Calkins  recalled. 

Q.   Have  you  made  a  draft  of  these  works,  Mr.  Calkins? 

A.   I  have. 

Defendant's  counsel  objects :  objection  overruled :  counsel  excepts. 

Q.    Is  this  map  drawn  to  a  scale  ? 

A.   It  is  not. 

Q.   Did  you  yourself  make  the  sketch  ? 

A.   Yes,  except  three  or  four  pointers  or  spears. 

Q.   Is  the  drawing  mathematically  correct? 

A.   It  is  not. 

Q.  Why  did  you  not  draw  it  to  a  scale  ? 

A .   I  had  no  scale. 

Defendant  objects  to  each  and  every  question  regarding  map. 
Objection  overruled  by  court,  and  tlie  defendant  excepts. 

Q.    What  is  letter  A  in  this  sketch  ? 

A.   That  is  the  miners'  tool  house.     The  L  was  not  there  at  the 
time  of  the  flood. 

Q.   What  are  the  figures? 

A.   The  figures  3,  4,  and  5  are  the  kilns. 

Q.   What  is  i?? 

A.   B  isn  coal  shaft. 


258  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

Q.   You  may  explain  the  other  points. 

A.  G  is  the  store-room;  D  the  bridge  at  the  north  end  of  the 
yard;  E  represents  another  bridge ;jP is  theofncc;  6' is  the  brick- 
shed.  I  tried  to  make  it  as  accurate  as  I  could  without  measurement. 
Tlie  dotted  lines  are  supposed  to  be  the  cemetery  grounds.  It  rejire- 
■^ents  the  base  of  the  l.ill  where  the  water  would  riaturally  go.  It 
shows  the  dam. 

The  plaintiff  offers  tlie  plat  in  evidence. 

CROSS-EXAMINED. 

Q.  Did  you  draw  the  plat  from  measurement? 

A.  I  did  not. 

Q.  "Where  were  you  when  you  drew  it? 

A.  I  was  in  the  ofBce  of  the  Second  National  Bank  when  I  drew 
it. 

Q.  When  were  you  last  on  the  ground  ? 

A.  I  looked  over  the  grounds  last  week. 

Q.  What  does  X  and  Y  represent  here  in  the  plat? 

A.  They  represent  a  rise  in  the  hill. 

Q.  What  do  the  arrows  mark? 

A.  They  show  the  course  of  the  water,  according  to  my  idea  of  it. 

Q.  Where  was  there  the  most  water  ? 

A.  At  the  east  and  south  of  kiln  4  there  was  more  than  north  of 
it. 

Q.  Where  did  the  water  show  the  most  force? 

A.  AtkihiS. 

Q  When  did  you  decide  to  abandon  kiln  4? 

A.  I  never  heard  of  kiln  4  being  abandoned. 

The  plat  is  offered  in  evidence ;  objected  to  by  counsel  for  defend- 
ant.    Overruled  by  the  court,  and  exception  taken  by  defendant. 

F.  E.  SMITH  SWORN. 

Q.   Mr.  Smith,  what  is  your  occupation? 
A.    I  am  a  builder. 

Q.  Have  you  bought  brick  from  this  company? 
A.    1  bought  some  muddy  brick. 

Q.  Mr.  Sission  here  tells  me  the  brick  for  the  Snap  House  was 
sold  to  you. 

Defendant  objects;  objection  overruled;  defendant  excepts. 
A.   We  were  short  of  brick. 


COUET   REPORTING.  259 

Q.    What  was  the  market  value  of  this  brick? 
A.   I  do  not  know  the  market  value. 

The  Court:  Let  him  state  the  fair  market  value  as  compared 
with  the  common  brick. 

A.  We  paid  the  same  price  for  that  as  we  did  for  those  that  were 
not  dirty,  and  had  them  to  wash  afterwards.  We  paid  the  same  as 
for  the  same  kind  not  dirty. 

CROSS-EXAMINED. 

Q.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  these  brick  ? 

A.  I  paid  $7.00. 

Q.  Why  did  you  get  them  for  this  low  price  ? 

A.  The  brick  were  dirty,  that  was  all.  I  had  a  man  washing 
them  all  the  time. 

Q.  How  much  did  it  cost  you  to  wash  those  brick? 

A.  It  cost  from  $15.00  to  $30.00. 

Q.  How  many  were  there  of  them  ? 

A.  Thirty  thousand. 

Q.  Did  washing  entirely  remove  the  stain  of  mud  from  them? 

A.  No;  they  did  not  look  so  nice  as  the  others, 

Q.  Could  they  be  stained? 

A.  They  could  be. 

Q.  Would  it  cost  10  cents  a  brick? 

A.  It  would  not. 

Q.  Could  they  not  be  painted? 

A.  They  could. 

Q.  Could  they  not  be  washed  thoroughly  clean  ? 

A.  They  could  not. 

Q'  What  kind  of  brick  were  they? 

A.  They  were  paint  brick. 

Q.  Were  they  first  quality? 

A.  They  were  not  so  hard  as  other  paint  brick.  They  were 
culled  out  of  the  others. 

Q.  What  discolored  them? 

A.  I  do  not  know 

NARRATIVE  FORM  OP    PRECEDING  TRANSCRIPT. 
W.  P.  SissiON,  Sworn. 
1.         I  have  been  general  manager  since  a  year  ago  last  July,  of 
the  brick  company.     I  was  there  April  5,  and  twice  after  that 


260  ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 

before  July  1.     Can't  give  dates.     The  bottoms  of  the  piles  of 
the  faced  and  paint  brick  were  damaged.     I  learned  about  it 

2.  the  fifth,  while  buying  brick.  Faced  brick  are  finest.  The 
paint  brick  are  called  off  color,  are  a  true  brick,  have  a  smooth 
surface.  They  are  used  for  side  and  rear  walls.  The  muddying 
of  the  brick  reduced  their  price.     They  were  not  even  salable  as 

3.  long  as  we  had  common  brick.  I  can't  give  a  definite  amount. 
I  kept  no  account.  We  sold  from  20,000  to  25,000  of  paint 
brick;  some  to  George  Arnold,  some  to  A.  P.  Anderson,  some 
scattering.     I  can't  say  how   many  faced  brick  I  sold.     There 

4.  are  8,000  or  10,000  faced  brick  there  yet.  You  can't  wash  them 
off  except  with  salt  and  water.     At  the  first  of  July  the  suit  was 

5.  brought.  I  didn't  know  that  damages  would  be  asked  for  these 
brick.     Yes,  I  did  know  it  in  a  general  way.     I  have  not  had  a 

6.  good  deal  to  do  with  this  suit.  Yes,  I  refused  to  continue  it.  I 
have  done  wliat  I  considered  my  duty  as  manager  in  pushing  it. 
I  have  taken  an  active  interest.  I  don't  know  as  I  made  a  special 
effort  to  keep  a  correct  account  of  the  brick  sold.  I  thought 
nothing  about  trusting  to  memory.  I  didn't  know  they  would 
claim  damages  for  brick.  I  called  your  attention  to  the  damaged 

7.  brick.  I  didn't  swear  that  I  didn't  know  they  would  claim 
damages.  I  sold  brick,  counted  them,  but  kept  no  account  of 
the  damaged  ones.     I  sold  them  to  Tom  Smith,  12,000  to  15,000 

8.  for  the  West  building.  That  was  last  May.  They  were  muddy. 
I  sold  George  Arnold  3,000  to  4,000  for  Marshall  Parsons' house. 

9.  We  sold  them  for  $8.00,  1  could  tell  how  many  I  sold  Mitchell 
by  looking  at  books.     Of  the  good  paint  brick  I  bought  some 

10.  myself,  3,600  to  Decatur,  and  30,000  to  Chicago.  Bought  some 
in  July.     I  sold  the  rest  here  and  there.     I  can't  say. 

11.  J,  H.  Calkins,  Recalled. 
I  have  a  sketch  of  the  works. 
Objection;  overruled;  exception. 

It  is  not  drawn  to  a  scale.  I  made  it,  except  three  or  four 
pointers  or  spears,     I  made  the  rest  of  it.     It  is  not  mathe- 

12.  matically  correct,     I  had  no  scale. 

Defendant  objects  to  each  and  every  question  regarding  map. 
Objection  overruled  and  exception  taken. 

The  letter  A  is  the  miners'  tool  house.  That  L  was  not  there 
ar  the  time  of  the  flood.     The  figures  2,  3,  4  and  5  are  the  kilns. 


COUKT   llEPORTIXG.  261 

13.  B  is  the  coal  shaft,  C  the  storeroom,  D  the  bridge  north  end  of 
yard ;  E  represents  another  bridge,  F  is  the  office,  G  is  the  brick 

14.  shed.  I  tried  to  make  it  as  accvirate  as  I  could  without  measure- 
ment. The  dotted  lines  are  supposed  to  be  the  cemetery  ground. 
Tt  represents  the  base  of  the  hill  where  the  water  would  naturally 
go.     It  shows  the  dam. 

Cross-Examined. 

15.  I  made  no  measurement.  I  was  in  the  office  of  tho  Second 
National  Bank  when  I  drew  it.  I  looked  over  the  grounds  last 
week.     At  X  and  Y  there  was  a  rise  in  the  hill.     The  arrows 

16.  mark  the  course  of  the  water  according  to  my  idea.  There  was 
more  water  east  and  soutli  of  kiln  four  than  north  of  it.     It 

17.  showed  more  force  down  at  kiln  5.  I  never  heard  of  kiln  4 
going  to  be  abandoned  before. 

18.  Plat  offered. 

Objection;  overruled;  exception. 

T.  E.  Smith,  Sworn. 

1  am  a  builder.     I  bought  muddy  brick  from  the  company. 

Q.  Mr.  Sission  here  tells  me  that  the  brick  for  the  Snap  house 
were  sold  to  you. 

Objection;  overruled;  exception. 

We  were  short  of  brick.     I  do  not  know  the  market  value. 

Court:  Let  him  state  their  fair  marketable  value  as  compared 
with  common  brick. 

We  paid  the  same  price  for  them  we  did  for  those  that  were  not 
dirty  and  had  them  to  wash  afterwards.  We  paid  the  same  as  for 
the  same  kind  not  dirty. 

CROSS-EXAMINED. 

I  paid  $7.00.  The  brick  were  dirty,  that  is  all.  I  had  a  man 
washing  them  all  the  time.  It  cost  from  $15.00  to  $20.00  to  wash 
what  we  had.  There  were  30,000.  The  brick  don't  look  so  nice  as 
the  others.  They  could  be  stained.  It  would  not  cost  10  cents  a 
brick.  I  could  paint  them.  You  can't  wash  them  thoroughly  clean. 
They  were  paint  brick.  They  were  culled  out  of  others.  I  don't 
know  what  discolored  them. 


362 


ECLECTIC    SHORTHAND. 


ILLUSTKATIONS   OF   CUEVE-LINE   RULING. 
Our  Country, 


/    U    "    ^^^^^^^-^^^^^^^^/d^z,,,,^ 


CURVE-LINE    RULING. 

The  Bower  of  Habit, 


263 


364 


ECLECTIC   SHORTHAND. 


The  Love  of  Country. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 

UBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  AT  LOS  ANGELES 

THE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below 

2  8  194;  I 


uuV  2 


1  laol 


Form  L-9 

20m-l, '42(8519) 


^rSeO — E6-aeuLiC   short- 
hand. 


^56 

C38e 
ISOO 


